Santa Fe (2020) - Automotive HYUNDAI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Automobile
Brand	Hyundai
Model	Santa Fe (2020)
Vehicle Class	Mid-size SUV
Overall Length	4770 mm (187.8 in)
Overall Width (with mirrors)	1890 mm (74.4 in)
Overall Height	1680 mm (66.1 in)
Wheelbase	2765 mm (108.9 in)
Curb Weight (approx)	1700-1900 kg (3748-4189 lb)
Fuel Type	Gasoline, Diesel, or Hybrid
Transmission	6-speed automatic, 8-speed automatic
Drivetrain	Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) or All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Seating Capacity	5 or 7 (with optional third row)
Engine Options	2.4L I4, 2.0T I4, 2.2L Diesel
Fuel Tank Capacity	71 L (18.8 gal)
Safety Features	Airbags, ABS, ESC, Lane Keep Assist, Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
Infotainment System	8-inch or 10.25-inch touchscreen, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto
Maintenance Schedule	Oil change every 7,500 mi or 12 months
Spare Tire	Compact spare or tire mobility kit
Towing Capacity	Up to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) with appropriate equipment
Warranty	5 years / 60,000 miles basic, 10 years / 100,000 miles powertrain

Frequently Asked Questions - Santa Fe (2020) HYUNDAI

What type of oil does the 2020 Hyundai Santa Fe require?

The recommended oil is SAE 5W-30 or 0W-30 synthetic oil, meeting API SN Plus or ILSAC GF-5 standards. Always check the oil cap and owner's manual for the exact specification.

What is the recommended tire pressure for the Santa Fe?

The recommended cold tire pressure is typically 33-36 psi (2.3-2.5 bar) for front and rear. Check the sticker on the driver's door jamb for the exact values.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Enable Bluetooth on your phone, then on the infotainment screen select 'Phone' > 'Add New' and search for devices. Select 'Hyundai' and confirm the pairing code on both devices.

What is the towing capacity of the 2020 Santa Fe?

With the proper equipment, the Santa Fe can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) for V6 models, but vary by engine and drivetrain. Always consult the manual for your specific configuration.

How do I reset the oil change reminder?

Turn the ignition ON, navigate to 'Service' in the instrument cluster menu, select 'Oil Life' and press and hold 'Reset' until it sets to 100%.

What type of coolant does the Santa Fe use?

Use Hyundai-approved ethylene glycol-based coolant (phosphate-free). For most climates, a 50/50 mix of coolant and distilled water is recommended.

How do I operate the all-wheel drive system?

The AWD system is fully automatic. For additional control, use the 'Drive Mode' button to select 'Snow', 'Mud', or 'Sand' modes for optimal traction.

What is the cargo capacity with rear seats folded?

With the second and third row (if equipped) folded, maximum cargo volume is approximately 80.2 cubic feet (2,270 liters).

How do I use the Smart Cruise Control?

Press the 'Cruise' button, then set your speed. Adjust following distance with the 'Distance' button. The system can bring the car to a complete stop in traffic.

What is the recommended schedule for major maintenance?

Major services (spark plugs, transmission fluid, coolant) are typically at 60,000 miles or 5 years. Refer to the maintenance schedule in the owner's manual for exact intervals.

USER MANUAL Santa Fe (2020) HYUNDAI

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.

Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification without the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification to those installed in production. The electric power assisted steering system is specifically programmed to operate only with the road wheels fitted during production. The installation of alternative specification road wheels may result in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body resulting in tyre damage and compromised safety. The installation of after market wheels on vehicles equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties or malfunction of the TPMS system.

We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels are installed.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR MOBILE TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or mobile telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI authorised repairer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

FOREWORD

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of distinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner's Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

CAUTION

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2018 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI Motor Company.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimise the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight chapters plus an index. Each chapter begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

SAFETY MESSAGES

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety. Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Fuel label

Petrol engine

For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you use unleaded petrol according to the fuel label attached on the fuel filler door.

A. Octane rating of unleaded petrol
1) RON/ROZ : Research Octane Number
2) (R+M)/2, AKI : Anti Knock Index
B. Identifiers for Petrol-type fuels ※ This symbol means usable fuel. Do not use any other fuel.
C. For further details, refer to the owner's manual.

Diesel engine

For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you use diesel according to the fuel label attached on the fuel filler door.

A. Fuel : Diesel

B. Identifiers for FAME containing Diesel-type Fuels

* This symbol means usable fuel. Do not use any other fuel.

C. For further details, refer to the owner's manual.

Petrol engine

Unleaded

We recommend to use unleaded petrol which has an octane rating of RON(Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 87 or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system's oxygen sensor and affect emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified (We recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Petrol containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and petrol or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded petrol.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

Other fuels

Using fuel additives such as:

• Silicone fuel additive
• MMT (Magnanese, Mn) fuel additive
• Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
• Other metallic-based fuel additives

may result in cylinder misfire, poor acceleration, engine stalling, damage to the catalyst, or abnormal corrosion, and may cause damage to the engine resulting in a reduction in the overall life of the powertrain.

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapour lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

We recommend to use unleaded petrol which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 87 or higher. For customers who do not use good quality petrols including fuel additives regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank according to the maintenance schedule is recommended. Additives are available from your HYUNDAI authorised repairer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only on commercially available diesel fuel that complies with EN 590 or comparable standard. (EN stands for "European Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as this will increase wear and cause damage to the engine and fuel system. The use of non-approved fuels and / or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions.

• Above -5^ (23°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully: If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION

Do not let any petrol or water enter the tank. This would make it necessary to drain it out and to bleed the lines to avoid jamming the injection pump and damaging the engine.

CAUTION

Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for diesel vehicle equipped with the DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214 or equivalent specifications. (EN stands for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause increased wear or damage to the engine and fuel system. Repair or replacement of worn or damaged components due to the use of non approved fuels will not be covered by the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise, that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS

• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
  In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorised electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorised electronic devices.

VEHICLE HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher centre of gravity than other types of vehicles. In other words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres. Again, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure to read the "Reducing the risk of a rollover" driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.
• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.

RETURNING USED VEHICLES

HYUNDAI promotes an environmentally sound treatment for end of life vehicles and offers to take back your HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.

You can get detailed information from your national HYUNDAI home-page.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance	1
Safety system of your vehicle	2
Convenient features of your vehicle	3
Multimedia System	4
Driving your vehicle	5
What to do in an emergency	6
Maintenance	7
Specifications & Consumer information	8
Index	1

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview (I) 1-2

Exterior overview (II) 1-3

Interior overview....1-4

Instrument panel overview....1-5

Engine compartment 1-6

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)

■ Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Bonnet ......3-46
2. Head lamp....3-112, 7-60
3. Tyres and wheels....7-32, 8-4
4. Outside rearview mirror 3-32
5. Sunroof 3-41
6. Front windscreen wiper blades....7-25
7. Windows 3-36
8. Parking Distance Warning system (Reverse/Forward) 3-136

OTM018001

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)

■ Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Door....3-13
2. Fuel filler door....3-58
3. Rear combination lamp 7-69
4. Tailgate 3-47
5. High mounted stop lamp 7-71
6. Rear windscreen wiper....3-129
7. Parking Distance Warning system (Reverse) 3-132
8. Antenna 4-2
9. Rear view monitor....3-130

OTM018002L

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

OTM018003R
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Inside door handle 3-14
2. Central door lock switch .....3-15
3. Power window switches .....3-36
4. Power window lock button .....3-39 Electronic child safety lock button .....3-17
5. Outside rearview mirror folding .....3-34
6. Outside rearview mirror control .....3-33
7. Headlight levelling device ....3-119
8. Instrument panel illumination control switch 3-62
9. Lane keeping assist (LKA) system..5-146
10. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system 5-103
11. 4WD lock button ....5-55
12. ESC OFF button....5-46
13. Power tailgate button ....3-49
14. Bonnet release lever....3-46
15. Steering wheel ....3-26
16. Seat 2-4
17. Fuse box....7-44

A: Type A, B: Type B, [C]: Type C

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OTM018004R
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Instrument cluster ....3-61
2. Horn 3-28
3. Engine Start/Stop button 5-12
4. Hazard warning flasher switch....6-2
5. Audio system ....4-8 Navigation system ....4-4
6. Manual climate control system ....3-162 Automatic climate control system ....3-171
7. Heated steering wheel 3-27
8. Seat warmer....2-24
9. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat .....2-25
10. Power outlet 3-190
11. Aux, USB and iPod ^® 4-2
12. USB charger ....3-191
13. Wireless mobile phone charging system....3-193
14. Passenger's front air bag 2-54
15. Glove box....3-185
16. Manual transmission shift lever .....5-20 Automatic transmission shift lever .....5-23
17. Drive mode button 5-71
18. Idle stop and go (ISG) OFF button .....5-64
19. DBC button 5-52
20. Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) button 3-137
21. Parking assist button 3-149
22. Surround view monitor....3-140
23. Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)....5-34
24. Auto Hold 5-40
25. AC 220V inverter ....3-192
26. Flex steering button 5-69
    A: Type A, B: Type B

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

■ Petrol Engine (Theta 2.4 MPI)

1. Engine coolant reservoir....7-16
2. Engine coolant cap 7-16
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir .....7-19
4. Air cleaner....7-22
5. Engine oil filler cap 7-14
6. Engine oil dipstick 7-13
7. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir .....7-20
8. Fuse box 7-44
9. Battery terminal [+] 7-28
10. Battery terminal [-] 7-28

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTM078085R

■ Petrol Engine (Theta 2.4 GDI)

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir....7-16
2. Engine coolant cap 7-16
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir .....7-19
4. Air cleaner....7-22
5. Engine oil filler cap 7-14
6. Engine oil dipstick 7-13
7. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir .....7-20
8. Fuse box 7-44
9. Battery terminal [+] 7-28
10. Battery terminal [-] 7-28

OTM078084R

■ Diesel Engine (R 2.0/2.2)

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir....7-16
2. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir .....7-20
3. Engine coolant cap 7-16
4. Fuse box 7-44
5. Engine oil dipstick 7-14
6. Engine oil filler cap .....7-15
7. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir .....7-19
8. Air cleaner....7-22
9. Battery terminal [+] 7-28
10. Battery terminal [-] 7-28

OTM078020R

Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work. Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important safety precautions....2-2

Always wear your seat belt....2-2

Restrain all children....2-2

Air bag hazards....2-2

Driver distraction....2-2

Control your speed 2-3

Keep your vehicle in safe condition....2-3

Seats 2-4

Safety precautions....2-5

Front seats....2-6

Rear seats 2-12

Head restraint....2-19

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats....2-24

seat belts....2-27

Seat belt safety precautions....2-27

Seat belt warning light 2-28

Seat belt restraint system 2-31

Additional seat belt safety precautions 2-37

Care of seat belts 2-39

Child restraint system (CRS) 2-40

Our recommendation: Children always in the rear..2-40

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) 2-41

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)....2-43

Suitability of each seating position for belted & ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to UN

regulations 2-48

Air bag - supplemental restraint system .....2-52

Where are the air bags? 2-54

How does the air bags system operate?......2-59

What to expect after an air bag inflates....2-62

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ......2-64

SRS care 2-69

Additional safety precautions....2-70

Air bag warning labels....2-70

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags, ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate Child Restraint System. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

Air bag hazards

Whilst air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using mobile phones.

Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction and an accident:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email whilst driving. Most countries have laws prohibiting drivers from texting. Some countries and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.

- NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tyre blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tyre pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

SEATS

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion angle
(4) Seat cushion height
(5) Seat cushion length
(6) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)
(7) Seat warmer
(8) Air ventilation seat
(9) Head restraint
(10) Passenger seat adjustment (seat sliding, seatback angle)

2 ^nd row seat

(11) Forward and backward
(12) Seatback angle
(13) Walk-in switch
(14) Head restraint
(15) Seat warmer
(16) 2^nd row seat remote folding switch

3^rd row seat

(17) Seatback folding
(18) Head restraint

OTM038001R

Safety precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety, together with seat belts and air bags, in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates. Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, whilst still maintaining control of the vehicle.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

• Adjust the driver's seat as far to the rear as possible maintaining the ability to control the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to minimise the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between you and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimise the risk of leg injuries.

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip. At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained. Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate Child Restraint Systems. Children who have outgrown a booster seat and adults must be restrained using the seat belts.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.
- NEVER allow children or small infants to ride on a passenger's lap.
- Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.
- Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

Front seats

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control lever (or knob) or switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the seat whilst the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.

• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position and proper locking of the seat-back.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.

• Use extreme caution when picking up small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the centre console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the rear seats, be careful whilst adjusting the front seat position.

CAUTION

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat whilst wearing your seat belt.
  Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms whilst the seat is moving.

Manual adjustment

Illustration of a car seat assembly with highlighted side view and arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols)

Forward and rearward adjustment To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted blue zones and an inset showing dotted line patterns (no text or symbols)

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.
3. Release the knob and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted side arm and internal channel (no text or symbols)

Seat cushion height (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cushion:

• Push down the lever several times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up the lever several times, to raise the seat cushion.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted blue buttons and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning (no text or symbols present)

Lumbar support (for driver's seat, if equipped)

• The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch.
• Press the front portion of the switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.

Power adjustment (if equipped)

WARNING

NEVER allow children in the vehicle unattended. The power seats are operable when the engine is turned off.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats when the seat has been adjusted as far forward or rearward as possible.
- Do not adjust the seats longer than necessary when the engine is turned off. This may result in unnecessary battery drain.
- Do not operate two or more seats at the same time. This may result in an electrical malfunction.

Forward and rearward adjustment To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Push the control switch forward or rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-back reaches the desired position.

Cushion extension

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

To move the front part of cushion forward:

1. Push the front part of control switch to move the seat cushion to the desired length.
2. Release the switch once the seat cushion reaches the desired length.

To move the front part of cushion rearward:

1. Push the rear part of control switch to move the seat cushion to the desired length.
2. Release the switch once the seat cushion reaches the desired length.

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cushion:

1. Push the front portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion.
   Push the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the height of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

• The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch.
• Press the front portion of the switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.
  • To move the support position up or down, press switch (3) or (4).

Front passenger seat control (if equipped)

The rear seat passenger may use the switches to control the front passenger seat.

- Sliding forward or rearward:

To move the front passenger seat forward, press the switch (1). To move the front passenger seat rearward, press the switch (2).

- Angle adjustment:

To recline the front passenger seat forward, press the switch (3).

To recline the front passenger seat rearward, press the switch (4).

Seatback pocket

Interior view of a car backrest with a wall-mounted folder and seat cover (no visible text or symbols)

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front seatbacks.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

Rear seats

Rear seat adjustment

Interior view of a car dashboard with side-mounted seatbelt and overhead diagram (no text or symbols)

Forward and backward (2nd row seat)

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a close-up inset showing a person seated on the seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Seatback angle (2nd row seat)

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-back of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Walk-in seat (2nd row seat, if equipped)

Close-up of a car interior with a blue plastic clip and a small tool, no visible text or symbols

To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,

1. Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guide clip. After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.
2. Push the walk-in switch located in upper part (1) of 2nd row seat or side part (2) of 2nd row seat.
3. The 2nd row seatback will be folded and push the seat to the farthest forward position.

After getting in or out, slide the 2nd row seat to the farthest rearward position and pull the seatback firmly backward until it clicks into place. Make sure that the seat is locked in place.

WARNING

Never attempt to adjust whilst the vehicle is moving or the 2nd row seat is occupied as the seat may suddenly move and cause the passenger on the seat to be injured.

WARNING

Interior view of a car trunk with visible structural components and a small inset showing a blue arrow pointing to a component labeled 'OTM038089' (no text or symbols on the main structure)

• If the walk-in switch does not work, pull the strap (1) located on the lower left side of the right seat. Then you can move the 2nd row seat forward.
• Never attempt to pull the strap (1) whilst the 2nd row seat is occupied as the seat may suddenly move and cause the passenger on the seat to be injured. Use only the strap when the walk-in switch does not work.

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback whilst the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a highlighted blue rectangular component and a small inset showing a tool or device (no text or symbols visible)

1. Locate the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down the seatback to avoid the seatbelt system interfering with the seatback.

Interior view of a car showing a blue car seat with a 2nd row seat highlighted, and an inset close-up of the seat (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

1. Pull on the seatback folding lever (2nd row seat), then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. Pull the strap backward (3rd row seat), then fold the 3rd seat toward the front of the vehicle. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward by pulling the folding lever or the strap.

Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

1. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

Illustration of a human head with a blue starburst and a downward arrow, symbolizing stress or urgency (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

If the tailgate is pushed down to close it when a passenger's head is not against a properly adjusted head restraint or a tall person is seated, the tailgate may hit the occupant's head, which could cause injury.

WARNING

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the engine is off, the shift lever is in P (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

CAUTION

• Be careful when loading cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving whilst driving.

WARNING

Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

2nd row seat folding (from outside) (if equipped)

Interior view of a car trunk with a digital control panel showing two icons (no text or symbols on the main body)

Push the 2nd row seat back folding switch (1) located in the both sides in the tailgate. (L: Left seatback folding, R: Right seatback folding)

Armrest

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue cushion device, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

The armrest is located in the centre of the rear seat. Pull the armrest down from the seatback to use it.

Rear occupant alert system (2nd seat)

This function alerts driver when you get out of a car with the passengers remain in the 2nd row seat.

If you open the door with the passengers in the 2nd row seat, the warning message appear on the cluster panel to give a first warning. If the movement is detected in the 2nd row seat after you lock all doors, 2nd warning alerts you.

Make sure you check the passenger in 2nd row seat before you get off.

For more information, refer to the "Rear occupant alert system" in chapter 3.

WARNING

Rear seat folding

Do not fold the rear seats (2nd & 3rd row seats), if passengers, pets or luggage are in the rear seats.

It may cause injury or damage to passengers, pets, luggage.

Head restraint

The vehicle's front and rear seats have adjustable head restraints. The head restraints provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your head restraints:

• Always properly adjust the head restraints for all passengers BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the head restraint removed.

Silhouette of a human head with a hand holding a device, marked with alignment lines and a plus symbol (no text or labels)

Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the head restraint position of the driver's seat when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as close to the passenger's head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.
  • Make sure the head restraint locks into position after adjusting it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the head restraints.

CAUTION

When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the head restraint to the lowest position. The rear seat head restraint can reduce the visibility of the rear area.

Front seat head restraints

Top-down schematic of a car showing interior compartments and structural features (no text or symbols)

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints for the passengers safety and comfort.

OTM038012 OTM038011

3D rendered image of a computer monitor with a left-pointing arrow and two vertical bars on the screen (no text or symbols)

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

Forward and rearward adjustment (if equipped)

The head restraint may be adjusted forward to 3 different positions by pulling the head restraint forward to the desired detent. To adjust the head restraint to it's furthest rearwards position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it.

Diagram of a car interior showing seat positions and a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with using the seatback angle lever or switch (1).

2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.

3. Press the head restraint release button (3) whilst pulling the head restraint up (4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to travel in a seat with the head restraint removed.

To reinstall the head restraint :

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the holes whilst pressing the release button (1).

3. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

4. Recline the seatback (4) the seat-back angle knob or switch (3).

WARNING

Always make sure the head restraint locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

Rear seat head restraints ( 2^nd , 3^rd row rear seat)

Top-down schematic of a car showing internal compartments and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

OTM038097L*: if equippe

The rear seats are equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the passenger's safety and comfort.

CAUTION

- Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

- When sitting on the rear seat, do not adjust the height of the head restraint to the lowest.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the head restraint :

1. Raise it as far as it can go.
2. Press the release button (1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the head restraint :

1. Put the head restraint poles (3) into the holes whilst pressing the release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats

Seat warmers (if equipped)

Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the skin should use extreme caution, especially the following types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
- Intoxicated individuals.

• People taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or petrol to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.

Whilst the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

- Manual temperature control Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows:

• Automatic temperature control The seat warmer starts to automatically control the seat temperature in order to prevent low-temperature burns after being manually turned ON.

If HIGH temperature is manually selected again, the temperature will be controlled automatically.

- When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

i Information

With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

Front air ventilation seat (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and a highlighted blue button (no text or symbols visible)

The air ventilation seats are provided to cool the front seats by blowing air through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seat-backs.

When the operation of the air ventilation seat is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

Whilst the engine is running, push the switch to cool the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat (if equipped).

• Each time you push the switch, the airflow changes as follows:

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the air ventilation seat operating, the operation will turn OFF.
• The air ventilation seats defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is placed to the ON position.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the air ventilation seat:

• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY when the climate control system is on. Using the air ventilation seat for prolonged periods of time with the climate control system off could cause the air ventilation seat to malfunction.
• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or petrol to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the surface of the front seats and seatbacks; this may cause the air vent holes to become blocked and not work properly.

• Do not place materials such as plastic bags or newspapers under the seats. They may block the air intake causing the air vents to not work properly.

• Do not change the seat covers. It may damage the air ventilation seat.

• If the air vents do not operate, restart the vehicle. If there is no change, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

SEAT BELTS

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags are designed to supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most countries require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts:

• Children under the age of 13 should be properly restrained in the rear seats.
- Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated. If a child is seated in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them in the seat.
- NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupant's lap.
- NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.
- Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.

• Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.
• Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the seat belt can damage it.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.
  • NEVER unfasten the seat belt whilst driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
  • Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

- No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing.
• Damaged hardware.
• The entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent.

Seat belt warning light

Seat belt warning

Driver's seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of seat belt fastening. At this time, if the seat belt is not fastened a warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

If the seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you start to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive under 12mph (20km/h), the corresponding warning light will continue to illuminate until you fasten the seat belt.

If you continue to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive over 12mph (20km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a warning sign and touchscreen display (no readable text or symbols)

OTM038038R OTM

Front passenger's seat belt warning (if equipped)

As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening. If the seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you start to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive under 20km/h, the corresponding warning light will continue to illuminate until you fasten the seat belt.

If you continue to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive over 12mph (20km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger to properly be seated as instructed in this manual.

i Information

• Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will blink or illuminate for 6 seconds. Also, when the front passenger gets off the vehicle whilst the warning is activating, the warning may continue for 6 seconds even after the passenger gets off.
• The front passenger's seat belt warning may operate when luggage, laptop or other electronic device is aced on the front passenger seat.

* 2 ^nd row seat (if equipped): 1, 2, 3 3 ^rd row seat (if equipped): 4, 5

Rear passenger's seat belt warning (if equipped)

As a reminder to the rear passenger, the rear passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you start to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive under 12 mph (20km/h), the corresponding warning light will continue to illuminate until you fasten the seat belt.

If you continue to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive over 12 mph (20km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 35 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the rear passenger's seat belt warning system.

It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger to properly be seated as instructed in this manual.

i Information

• Although the rear side passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will blink or illuminate for 6 seconds.
• The rear side passenger's seat belt warning may operate when luggage, laptop or other electronic device is placed on the rear side passenger seat.

Rear centre passenger's seat belt warning (if equipped)

The seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of seat belt fastening.

And then, the rear corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 70 seconds if any of the following occurs:

• The rear seat belt is not fastened.
• The rear seat belt is disconnected whilst driving under.

If you drive over 12 mph (20km/h) when the rear seat belt is not fastened or the rear seat belt is disconnected whilst driving over 12 mph (20km/h), the corresponding seat belt warning light will blink and a warning chime will sound for 35 seconds.

Seat belt restraint system

Lap/shoulder belt

Car seatbelt buckle diagram showing two positions (1 and 2) with no text or symbols on the belt itself

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

Person wearing a seatbelt with blue arrow indicating pressure point (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

You should place the lap belt (1) portion across your hips and the shoulder belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you.

If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Person sitting in a seat with a blue arrow indicating a specific seatbelt or grip (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:

- Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly. This allows your strong pelvic bones to absorb the force of the crash, reducing the chance of internal injuries.

• Position one arm under the shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illustration.
  • Always position the shoulder belt anchor into the locked position at the appropriate height.
• Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the four different positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) whilst pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

Person wearing a seatbelt with blue arrow indicating a cable or buckle (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Rear centre seatbelt (3-point rear centre seat belt)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with numbered components (1, 2) and a highlighted section, no readable text or symbols beyond labels

1. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the buckle (2) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

When using the rear centre seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

WARNING

Always have the metal tab inserted into the buckle.

i Information

If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Stowing the rear seat belt

• The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.

• Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats. After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt, use it after taking it out of the guides. If you pull the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Illustration of a car interior showing two people inside the dashboard, with no visible text or symbols.

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's and rear passengers (if equipped) Pre-tensioner Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner). The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal or side collision(s). The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal or side collision(s) is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position.

In certain frontal collisions, the pretensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

- Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

CAUTION

The pre-tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision or rollover, if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag.

WARNING

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.
- Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
- Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an accident.
- NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioner can become hot and can burn you.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the vehicle may damage the pre-tensioner seat belt system. Therefore, we recommend the system to be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Top-down technical drawing of a car showing internal seating layout and structural components (no text or symbols)

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration above:

(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner (front)
(3) SRS control module
(4) Retractor pre-tensioner (rear) (if equipped)

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS control module is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument cluster will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, we recommend the pre-tensioner seat belts and/or SRS control module be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

i Information

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be inhaled for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

Additional seat belt safety precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt.

Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY across your hips and pelvic bone, under the rounded part of the belly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

Most countries have Child Restraint System laws which require children to travel in approved Child Restraint System devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of Child Restraint System differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling. Infant and Child Restraint System must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" in this chapter.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a Child Restraint System appropriate for the child's height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving. The violent forces created during an accident will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a Child Restraint System that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country. Before buying any Child Restraint System, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Safety Standard of your country.

The Child Restraint System must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the Child Restraint System for this information. Refer to "Child Restraint Systems" in this chapter.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. In the event of an accident, children are afforded the best safety restrained by a proper Child Restraint System in the rear seats.

If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck, they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Always make sure larger children's seat belts are worn and properly adjusted.
• NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the child's neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

Seat belt use and injured people

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seat back is reclined, the greater the chance for the passenger's hips to slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck to strike the shoulder belt.

WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.
• Driver and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. We recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)

Our recommendation: Children always in the rear

WARNING

Always properly restrain children in the vehicle. Children of all ages are safer when riding in the rear seats. Never place a rearward-facing Child Restraint System on the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

Children under age 13 should always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimise the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Children too large for a Child Restraint System must use the seat belts provided.

Most countries have regulations which require children to travel in approved Child Restraint Systems.

The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of Child Restraint System differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling.

Child Restraint Systems must be properly installed in the vehicle seat. Always use a commercially available Child Restraint System that meets the requirements of your country.

Child Restraint System (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rearward-facing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System.

WARNING

• Always follow the Child Restraint System manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
  • Always properly restrain your child in the Child Restraint System.
• Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that “hooks” over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.
  • After an accident, we recommend a HYUNDAI dealer to check the Child Restraint System, seat belts, ISOFIX anchorages and top-tether anchorages.

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)

When selecting a Child Restraint System for your child, always:

• Make sure the Child Restraint System has a label certifying that it meets applicable Safety Standards of your country.
  A Child Restraint System may only be installed if it was approved in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.
• Select a Child Restraint System based on your child's height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information.
• Select a Child Restraint System that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the Child Restraint System.

Child Restraint System types

There are three main types of Child Restraint Systems: rearward-facing, forward-facing and booster Child Restraint Systems.

They are classified according to the child's age, height and weight.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seatbelt and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Rearward-facing Child Restraint System

A rearward-facing Child Restraint System provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the Child Restraint Systems and reduce the stress to the fragile neck and spinal cord.

All children under the age of one year must always ride in a rearward-facing Child Restraint System. There are different types of rearward-facing Child Restraint Systems: infant-only Child Restraint Systems can only be used rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-1 Child Restraint Systems typically have higher height and weight limits for the rearward-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rearward-facing for a longer period of time.

Keep using Child Restraint Systems in the rearward-facing position as long as children fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the Child Restraint System's manufacturer.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a car seat, no visible text or symbols

Forward-facing Child Restraint System

A forward-facing Child Restraint System provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forward-facing Child Restraint System with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your Child Restraint System's manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-facing Child Restraint System, your child is ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a Child Restraint System designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the stronger parts of your child's body. Keep your children in booster seats until they are big enough to fit in a seat belt properly.

For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie comfortable across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie comfortable across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always be properly restrained to minimise the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre.

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your Child Restraint System always:

Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a Child Restraint System, the head restraint of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

After selecting a proper Child Restraint System for your child and checking that the Child Restraint System fits properly on the seating position, there are three general steps for a proper installation:

- Properly secure the Child Restraint System to the vehicle. All Child Restraint Systems must be secured to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX anchorage and/or with the support leg.

- Make sure the Child Restraint System is firmly secured. After installing a Child Restraint System to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A Child Restraint System secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-to-side movement can be expected.

When installing a Child Restraint System, adjust the vehicle seat and seatback (up and down, forward and rearward) so that your child fits in the Child Restraint System in a comfortable manner.

- Secure the child in the Child Restraint System. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the Child Restraint System according to the Child Restraint System manufacturer's instructions.

! CAUTION

A Child Restraint System in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the Child Restraint System.

ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage system) for children

The ISOFIX system holds a Child Restraint System during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to make installation of the Child Restraint System easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the Child Restraint System to the rear seats.

ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each ISOFIX seating position that will accommodate a Child Restraint System with lower attachments.

To use the ISOFIX system in your vehicle, you must have a Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.

The Child Restraint System manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the Child Restraint System with its attachments for the ISOFIX anchorages.

Top-down schematic of a car showing four circular components with blue dots and an asterisk marking the center (no text or symbols present)

*: if equipped
OTM038090R

ISOFIX anchorages have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. In addition, ISOFIX anchorages have been provided in the right outboard front passenger seating position(if equipped).

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a Child Restraint System using ISOFIX anchorages in the rear centre seating position. There are no ISOFIX anchorages provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchorages, for the CRS installation on the rear centre seating position, can damage the anchorages.

[1]: ISOFIX Anchorage Position Indicator
(Type A- type B-),

[2]: ISOFIX Anchorage

ISOFIX anchorages are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions, indicated by the symbols.

In addition, ISOFIX anchorages are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the front passenger seat outboard seating positions.(if equipped)

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push the upper portion of the ISOFIX anchorage cover.

Securing a Child Restraint System with the "ISOFIX Anchorage System"

To install an i-Size or ISOFIX-compatible Child Restraint System in either of the rear outboard seating positions and the front passenger outboard seating positions (if equipped):

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the ISOFIX anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from the anchorages that could prevent a secure connection between the Child Restraint System and the ISOFIX anchorages.
3. Place the Child Restraint System on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the ISOFIX anchorages according to the instructions provided by the Child Restraint System manufacturer.
4. Follow the instructions of the Child Restraint System's manufacturer for proper installation and connection of the ISOFIX attachments on the Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX anchorages.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the ISOFIX system:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.
  • To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one Child Restraint System to a single anchorage. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.
  • Always have the ISOFIX system inspected by your dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the ISOFIX system and may not properly secure the Child Restraint System.

Securing a Child Restraint System seat with "Top-tether Anchorage" system

Top-down view of a car trunk with multiple camera sensors and a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

Top-tether anchorages for Child Restraint Systems are located on the rear of the seatbacks and on the rear of the front passenger seatback (if equipped).

Interior view of a car seat assembly (no text or symbols visible)

1. Route the Child Restraint System top-tether strap over the seatback. Placing the top tether strap, please follow the instructions of the Child Restraint System manufacturer.
2. Connect the top-tether strap to the top-tether anchorage, then tighten the top-tether strap according to the instructions of your Child Restraint System's manufacturer to firmly attach the Child Restraint System to the seat.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when installing the top-tether:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.
• NEVER attach more than one Child Restraint System to a single ISOFIX top-tether anchorage. This could cause the anchorage or attachment to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether to anything other than the correct top-tether anchorage. It may not work properly if attached to something else.
• Child Restraint System anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted Child Restraint System.

Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Suitability of each seating position for belted & ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to UN regulations

(Information for vehicle users and CRS manufacturers)

• Yes: Suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS
• No : Not suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS
• "-" : Not applicable

CRS categories		Seating position									Seating position
		1 2	3 4 5	6 7 8 9
Universal belted CRS --				Yes ^1) F, R	YesF, R	YesF, R	YesF, R	Yes ^2) F, R	-	Yes ^2) F, R	F : Forward facingR : Rearward facing
i-size CRS --				YesF, R	YesF, R	NO	YesF, R	NO -	NO
ISOFIX infant CRS(i.e. CRS for a baby)	ISOFIX(R1)	-	-	YesR	YesR	NO	YesR	NO -	NO
Carry cot(ISOFIX lateral facing CRS)	ISOFIX(L1,L2)	--	NO No	NO	No NO	- NO
ISOFIX toddler CRS - small	ISOFIX(F2,F2X,R2,R2X)	-	-	YesF, R	YesF, R	NO	YesF, R	NO -	NO
ISOFIX toddler CRS - large* (*: not booster seats)	ISOFIX(F3, R3)	-	-	YesF, R	YesF, R	NO	YesF, R	NO -	NO
Booster Seat - reducedWidth	ISO CRF : B2	-	-	Yes	Yes	No	Yes	No	-	NO
Booster Seat - full Width	ISO CRF : B3	-	-	No	No	No	No	No	-	NO

Note 1): You should adjust seatback or seat pumping (if equipped) properly.
Note 2): The seating positions (number 7,9) are not suitable for fitment of child restraint system with support leg.
When placing CRS in seating position (number 7, 9), the 2nd row seat should be moved forward to allow installation and to avoid interference.

Seat number	Position in the vehicle
1 Front	right
2 Front	centre
3 Front	left
4	2^nd row left
5	2^nd row centre
6	2^nd row right
7	3^nd row left
8	3^nd row centre
9	3^nd row right

WARNING

• Never place a rearward facing Child Restraint System on the front passenger seat.
• For semi-universal or vehicle specific CRS (ISOFIX or belted CRS), please see the vehicle list provided in the manual of CRS.
• It is recommended to remove the head restraint, when CRS is unstable due to head restraint.

Recommended Child Restraint Systems

Mass group Name	Manufacturer	Type of Fixation		ECE-R44/R129 Approval No.
Group 0+	Cabriofix & Familyfix	Maxi Cosi	ISOFIX	E4 04443907
Group I	Duo Plus	Britax Römer	ISOFIX and top-tether	E1 04301133
Group II	KidFix II XP	Britax Römer	ISOFIX and vehicle Belt	E1 04301323
Group III	Dream	Nania/OSANN	vehicle Belt	E2 04 03011

CRS Manufacturer information

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix & Familyfix http://www.maxi-cosi.com

Britax Römmer http://www.britax.com

Osann https://www.osann.de

Securing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt

When not using the ISOFIX system, all Child Restraint Systems must be secured to a rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

Illustration of a car seatbelt with a belt buckle, no text or symbols present

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a person's seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

Installing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt

To install a Child Restraint System on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the Child Restraint System on a rear seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the Child Restraint System, following the Child Restraint System manufacturer's instructions. Make sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

i Information

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a person's seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the Child Restraint System whilst feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
2. Push and pull on the Child Restraint System to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place.

If your Child Restraint System manufacturer recommends the use of a top-tether with the lap/shoulder belt, see page 2-46.

To remove the Child Restraint System, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the Child Restraint System and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver's front air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF switch

OTM038049R

The vehicles are equipped with a Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver's seat and front passenger's seats.

The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision. In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and Child Restraint Systems - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any Child Restraint System or booster seat in the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centred on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or centre console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, whilst still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Where are the air bags?

Driver's and passenger's front air bags

Interior view of a car showing the front air bag and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the centre of the steering wheel, in the driver's side lower crash pad below the steering wheel, and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labelled with the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the pad covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from inflating front air bags, take the following precautions:

- Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, whilst still maintaining control of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or centre console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad cover, mobile phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windscreen glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not attach any objects on the front windscreen and inside mirror.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with blue accents, mounted on a curved surface (no visible text or symbols)

OTM038095E OTI

To deactivate the passenger's front air bag:

Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)

The purpose of the switch is to disable the passenger's front air bag in order to transport occupants who are at increased risk for air bag-related injury due to age, size, or medical condition.

Insert the key or a similar rigid device into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the OFF position. The passenger air bag OFF indicator ( × ) will illuminate and stay on until the passenger's front air bag is reactivated.

To reactivate the passenger's front air bag:

Insert the key or a similar rigid device into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON position. The passenger air bag ON indicator (which will illuminate and stay on for 60 seconds.

i Information

The passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING

Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the passenger air bag OFF indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Turn on the passenger's front air bag or have your passenger move to the rear seat.

WARNING

If the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the following conditions may occur:

• The air bag warning light ( ) on the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• The passenger air bag OFF indicator (✗) will not illuminate and the ON indicator (✗) will come on and go off after approximately 60 seconds. The passenger's front air bag will inflate in a frontal impact even though the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position.
• We recommend that a HYUNDAI authorised repairer inspect the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

Side air bags

Medical illustration of a shoulder joint with a highlighted device (no text or symbols present)

Interior view of a car showing two seated cars with one highlighted in blue, no visible text or symbols

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

The side air bags on both sides of the vehicle are designed to deploy when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.

The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions:

- Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory seat covers. This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
• Do not hang other objects except clothes. In an accident it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury especially when air bag is inflated.

• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.
• Do not cause impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position as this may cause the side air bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is damaged, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Curtain air bags

Interior view of a car showing two views: top is full-down view of the dashboard with a circular logo, bottom is side profile of the dashboard interior (no text or symbols visible)

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.

The curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle are designed to deploy when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.

The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bag, take the following precautions:

- All seat occupants must wear seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Properly secure Child Restraint System as far away from the door as possible.
- Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.
- Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.
- Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
- Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.

How does the air bags system operate?

The SRS consists of the following components:

(1) Driver's front air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Retractor pre-tensioner (front)
(6) Air bag warning light
(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/Rollover sensor
(8) Front impact sensors
(9) Side impact sensors

(10) Side pressure sensors
(11) Retractor pre-tensioner (rear) (if equipped)
(12) Passenger's front air bag OFF indicator (front passenger's seat only)
(13) Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components whilst the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration. The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential problem with your air bag system, which could include your side and/or curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

• The light does not turn on for approximately six seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the engine is running.

We recommend that a HYUNDAI authorised repairer inspect the SRS as soon as possible if any of these conditions occur.

During a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle's rapid deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags, at the time and with the force needed.

The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover by supporting the side upper body area.

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
  • Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
- The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
- In addition to inflating in serious side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and/or curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

- To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

- There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs space to inflate. It is recommended that drivers sit as far as possible between the centre of the steering wheel and the chest whilst still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Driver's front air bag (1) shown in a car seat with hands placed on the back seat (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

3D rendered illustration of a driver's front air bag (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the front passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

Driver's front air bag (3) shown in a car seatbelt device, no text or symbols on the diagram itself.

Illustration of a passenger front air bag with a stylized figure inside (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

WARNING

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

What to expect after an air bag inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windscreen or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.
  • Always wash exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and mild soap.
  • We recommend that a HYUNDAI authorised repairer replace the air bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to be used only once.

Noise and smoke from inflating air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

Do not install a Child Restraint System on the front passenger seat

■ Type A

OYDESA2042

Never install a Child Restraint System in the front passenger seat.

WARNING

NEVER use a rearward facing Child Restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision?

There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death:

• Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine part. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deployment performance.

• Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.
  • We recommend that all air bag repairs are conducted by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor (front)
4. Side impact sensor
5. Side impact sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a modern car head with visible grille and grille grating (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car door panel with a blue rectangular object on top and a dotted circle highlighting a section (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat and side panel with a highlighted circular detail (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

OTM038060R/OTM038061R/OTM038062R/OTM038063R/OTM038064/OTM038065

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the severity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

Illustration of two cars with blue light effects on the side, no visible text or symbols

Interior view of a car showing two seated individuals with a blue airflow or water flow inside (no text or symbols)

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the driver's and front passenger's air bags are designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

Also, the side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

Illustration of a car with a driver inside the dashboard and a blue explosion effect nearby (no text or symbols)

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

Illustration of a car with a blue light beam interacting with two adjacent vehicles (no text or symbols visible)

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

Top-down illustration of two cars collision on a road with a blue explosion effect (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a truck and a car with blue spray effects, no text or symbols present

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "underride" collisions.

Abstract 3D rendering of metallic mechanical parts arranged in a cluster against a light blue background (no text or symbols)

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

i Information

The side and curtain air bags may inflate in a rollover situation, when it is detected by the rollover sensor.

Illustration of a silver SUV charging at a toll booth with blue light trails (no text or symbols)

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or continuously remains on, we recommend that the system be immediately inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

We recommend any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails be performed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death take the following precautions:

- Do not attempt to modify or disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.
  • We recommend that inflated air bags be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Additional safety precautions

Passengers should not move out of or change seats whilst the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors. Impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Air bag warning labels

Close-up of a car interior showing a blue rectangular object on the side of a door, with no visible text or symbols.

Air bag warning labels are attached to alert the passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owner's Manual.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing your vehicle 3-4

Remote key....3-4

Smart key 3-7

Immobiliser system 3-12

Door locks....3-13

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .....3-13

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .....3-14

Deadlocks....3-16

Auto door lock/unlock features....3-16

Child-protector rear door locks....3-17

Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system 3-18

Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system....3-20

Theft-alarm system 3-22

Driver position memory system....3-23

Storing memory positions....3-23

Recalling memory position....3-24

Easy access function 3-24

Driver position memory system reset....3-25

Steering wheel....3-26

Electric power steering (EPS)....3-26

Tilt steering / Telescopic steering....3-27

Heated steering wheel....3-27

Horn....3-28

Mirrors....3-29

Inside rearview mirror....3-29

Outside rearview mirror 3-32

Reverse parking aid function....3-35

Windows 3-36

Power windows....3-36

Remote window closing function....3-40

Sliding the sunroof 3-42

Tilting the sunroof....3-43

Closing the sunroof 3-43

Resetting the sunroof....3-44

Sunroof open warning....3-45

Exterior features 3-46

Bonnet....3-46

Tailgate....3-47

Power tailgate....3-49

Smart tailgate....3-55

Fuel filler door....3-58

Instrument cluster....3-61

Instrument cluster control 3-62

Gauges and meters....3-62

Icy road warning light....3-66

Transmission shift indicator 3-67

Warning and indicator lights 3-69

LCD display messages 3-84

LCD display 3-91

LCD display control....3-91

LCD display modes....3-92

Trip computer 3-104

Trip modes 3-104

Head up display (HUD)....3-108

Lighting....3-111

Exterior lights 3-111

Welcome system 3-121

Interior lights....3-122

Wipers and washers 3-126

Windscreen wipers 3-126

Windscreen washers 3-128

Rear window wiper and washer switch ....3-129

Driver assist system 3-130

Rear view monitor (Type A) 3-130

Rear view monitor (Type B) 3-131

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system......3-132

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system....3-137

Surround view monitor (if equipped)....3-140

Parking assist

(parallel, perpendicular reverse)....3-143

Operating condition....3-144

Non-operating condition....3-145

How the system works (Parking Mode)....3-148

Additional instructions (messages)....3-155

System malfunction....3-156

How the system works (Exit mode) 3-156

Additional instructions (messages)....3-160

System malfunction....3-160

Defroster....3-161

Rear window defroster 3-161

Manual climate control system....3-162

Heating and air conditioning....3-163

3rd row air conditioning....3-166

System operation....3-167

System maintenance....3-169

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic climate control system....3-171

Automatic heating and air conditioning....3-172

Manual heating and air conditioning....3-172

3rd row air conditioning....3-177

System operation....3-177

System maintenance....3-179

Windscreen defrosting and defogging......3-181

Manual climate control system 3-181

Automatic climate control system 3-182

Auto defogging system (only for automatic climate control system) ......3-183

Climate control additional features....3-184

Automatic ventilation 3-184

Sunroof inside air recirculation....3-184

Storage compartment....3-185

Centre console storage 3-185

Glove box 3-185

Cool box....3-186

Sunglass holder 3-186

Tray....3-187

Luggage tray....3-187

Interior features....3-188

Ashtray 3-188

Cup holder....3-188

Sunvisor....3-190

Power outlet....3-190

USB charger....3-191

AC inverter....3-192

Wireless mobile phone charging system 3-193

Clock....3-195

Clothes hanger 3-195

Floor mat anchor(s)....3-196

Luggage net (holder) 3-197

Cargo security screen....3-197

Side curtain....3-199

Exterior features 3-200

Roof rack 3-200

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE Remote key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and tailgate) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine bonnet and tailgate.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.

3. The doors will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink. Also, the outside rearview mirror will fold, if 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' is selected from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

2. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Also, the outside rearview mirror will unfold, if 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' is selected from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

i Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Tailgate Unlock button (3) on the remote key for more than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

i Information

The word "HOLD" is written on the button to inform you that you must press and hold the button for more than one second.

Start-up

For detailed information refer to "Key Ignition Switch" in chapter 5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote key:

- Keep the remote key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the smart key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction and may void the vehicle warranty.

- Avoid dropping or throwing the remote key.

- Protect the remote key from extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key

Close-up of a car key with a blue arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols visible

If the remote key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually whilst pressing the release button.

NOTICE

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

- The remote key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the remote key.

If the remote key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the remote key, it is recommended that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phone's normal operational signals.

This is specifically relevant when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the remote key and your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

i Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from electromagnetic materials that block electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

Battery replacement

Diagram showing a car key being inserted into a battery, with an upward arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the cover.
2. Using a screw driver, remove the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery and insert a new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the battery cover and key cover in the reverse order of removal.

If you suspect your remote key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your remote key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Smart key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and tailgate) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock

Locking

Close-up of a car door handle with a blue arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the door itself)

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine bonnet and tailgate.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button (1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink. Also, the outside rearview mirror will fold, if 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock or On driver approach' is selected from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

i Information

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7\~1 m (28\~40 in.) from the outside door handle.

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
- The Engine Start/Stop button is in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is open.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the Engine Start/Stop button and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.
3. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Also, the outside rearview mirror will unfold, if 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock or On driver approach' is selected from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Information

• The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7\~1 m (28\~40 in.) from the outside door handle. Other people can also open the doors without the smart key in possession.
  • After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the tailgate handle button or press the Tailgate Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Information

• The Tailgate Unlock button (3) will only unlock the tailgate. It will not release the latch and open the tailgate automatically. If the Tailgate Unlock button is used, someone must still press the tailgate handle button to open the tailgate.
  • After unlocking the tailgate, the tailgate will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless the tailgate is opened.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the Engine Start/Stop button in chapter 5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the smart key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction and may void the vehicle warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.
• Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

Two views of a car key showing internal components and a close-up view (no text or symbols)

Move the release lever in the direction of the arrow (1) and then remove the mechanical key (2). Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, it is recommended that you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your HYUNDAI authorised repairer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key may not work if any of the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a mobile phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

If the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, it is recommended that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phone's normal operational signals. This is specifically relevant when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

i Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

NOTICE

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.

Battery replacement

Interior view of a car showing the open and closed doors with a blue indicator light and an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Use a slim tool to pry open the rear cover of the smart key.
3. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart key.

Restrictions in handling keys

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and dashboard with a blue abstract logo (no text or symbols visible)

When leaving keys with parking lot and valet attendants, the following procedures will ensure your vehicle's glove box compartment can only be opened with the mechanical key.

To lock:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Smart Key.
2. Lock the glove box using the mechanical key.
3. Leave the smart key with the attendant and keep the mechanical key with you.

The Smart Key can only be used to start the engine and operate door locks.

To unlock:

Open the glove box with the mechanical key.

Immobiliser system

The immobiliser system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the immobiliser system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognise the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, then place the ignition switch to the ON position again.

The system may not recognise your key's coding if another immobiliser key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key. The engine may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not recognise the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobiliser password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential.

NOTICE

The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobiliser system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobiliser system malfunction could occur.

DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

Mechanical key

A: Unlock, B: Lock

Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to lock and toward the front of the vehicle to unlock.

First, pull the outside door handle (1) and push the hook (2) located inside of outside door handle by using the mechanical key. And remove the cover (3).

If you lock/unlock the driver's door with a key, a driver's door will lock/unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Remote key

To lock the doors, press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.

To unlock the doors, press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key. Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Smart key

Close-up of a car door handle with a blue arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the door itself)

Top-down view of a car's front panel with three buttons and icons (no readable text or symbols)

To lock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle whilst carrying the smart key with you or press the door lock button on the smart key.

To unlock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle whilst carrying the smart key with you or press the door unlock button on the smart key.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.
  • To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is open.

• Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.

i Information

If a power door lock ever fails to function whilst you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) whilst simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles.

Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

With the central door lock/unlock switch

Close-up of a car dashboard with blue control switches and a highlighted dial (no text or symbols visible)

When pressing the ( 🔒 portion (1) on the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• If any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

When pressing the (∅ portion (2) on the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

WARNING

• The doors should always be fully closed and locked whilst the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.
- Do not pull the inner door handle of the driver's or passenger's door whilst the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, whilst depressing the brake, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transmission), engage the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long time whilst the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.

Deadlocks (if equipped)

Some vehicles are equipped with a deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent opening of a door from either inside or outside the vehicle once the deadlocks have been activated providing an additional measure of vehicle security.

To lock the vehicle using the deadlock function, the doors must be locked by using the remote key or smart key. To unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or smart key must be used again.

WARNING

Do not lock the doors with the remote key or the smart key with anybody left in the vehicle. The passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the doors with the door lock button. For example, if the door is locked with the remote key, the passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the door without the transmitter.

Auto door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

You can activate or deactivate the Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Child-protector rear door locks (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the door, vent, and side panel with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.

To lock the child safety lock, insert a small flat blade tool (like a screwdriver or similar) (1) into the slot and turn it to the lock position as shown.

To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

WARNING

If children accidentally open the rear doors whilst the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

Electronic child safety lock system (if equipped)

Close-up of a car dashboard with control panels and a blue navigation button (no text or symbols visible)

If you push the Electronic child safety lock button and the indicator illuminates, rear passengers can not open the rear door from inside the vehicle. To cancel the Electronic child safety lock system, you push the Electronic child safety lock system button one more time and then the indicator turns off.

The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system is operated when the Electronic child safety lock system is activated and the Safe Exit Assist (SEA) function is selected on the cluster. The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system does not activate automatically the Electronic child safety lock system.

The Electronic child safety lock system can be operated for approximately 10 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the LOCK (or OFF) position.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Electronic child safety lock system, the Child-protector rear door locks which is manually operated is not provided.

* If Electronic child safety lock system is activated, rear passenger can not open or close the rear window also. For more details, refer to "Windows" in this chapter.

CAUTION

OTM048424R

If the Electronic child safety lock system is not operated when pushing the Electronic child safety lock button, the message is displayed and the alarm will sound.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system (if equipped)

Top-down view of two cars on a road with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. The Safe Exit Assist system is provided to help prevent the passengers from opening door by warning the passengers when an approaching vehicle from the rear area is detected after the vehicle stops.

2. When an approaching vehicle from the rear area is detected after the vehicle stops, the rear door is not unlocked even when the driver tries to unlock the rear door using the Electronic child safety lock button. The "Check surroundings then try again" warning message appears on the cluster and a warning sounds.

However if you press the button within 10 seconds after the warning message appears (the indicator on the button extinguishes) the system judges that the driver unlocked the door acknowledging the rear status and the lock is released regardless of the rear status.

1. When an approaching vehicle from the rear is detected the moment the door is opened, the "Watch for traffic" warning message appears on the cluster and a warning sounds.

- The above 2 and 3 functions are activated when you select "Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → SEA (Safe Exit Assist)" from the User Settings mode on the cluster.

- The Electronic child safety lock system will operate for approximately 10 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the LOCK (or OFF) position. After about 10 minutes, the indicator on the button turns off and you can not deactivate the Electronic child safety lock system. To deactivate the Electronic child safety lock system, press the Electronic child safety lock button again with the ignition switch in the ON position or after starting the engine.

- When the power is supplied again after removing the battery or battery discharge whilst the child safety lock in the lock position, press the rear door lock button once again to match the state of the indicator on the rear door lock button and actual status of the rear door child safe lock.

- If the airbag is activated whilst the rear door lock button is ON (the indicator on the button illuminates) it automatically switches OFF and the rear door is unlocked.

CAUTION

- The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system may not operate normally if there is any vehicle or obstacle at the rear area of your vehicle.

- The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system may not operate normally when a vehicle is coming rapidly from the two lanes next to your vehicle or a vehicle is approaching fast to the next lane from the rear of your vehicle.

- The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system may be activated later than normal or may not operate normally if a vehicle is approaching fast from the rear of your vehicle.

- The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system will not operate if there is a malfunction with the Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system as follows:

- When the BCW warning message appears

When the BCW sensor or the sensor surrounding is polluted or covered

- When the BCW does not warn or warns wrongly

For more details, refer to cau-tions and limitations in “Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)” in chapter 5.

WARNING

• The system does not detect every obstacle approaching the vehicle exit.
- The driver and passenger are responsible for the accident occurred whilst exiting the vehicle. Always check the surrounding before you exit the vehicle.

Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system

The Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system is provided to help prevent exiting the vehicle with the rear passenger left in the vehicle.

- 1st alert

- When you open the front door after opening and closing the rear door and turning off the engine, the "Check rear seats" warning message appears on the cluster.

- 2nd alert

• After the 1st alert the 2nd alert operates when any movement is detected in the vehicle after the driver's door is closed and all the doors are locked. The horn will activate for about 25 seconds. If the system continues to detect the movement the alert operates up to 8 times.
• Unlock the door with the remote key or smart key to stop the alert.
• The system detects movement in the vehicle for 24 hours after the door is locked.
  * The 2nd alert is activated only after the prior activation of the 1st alert.
  * You can activate or deactivate the Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system from the User Settings mode on the LCD display (Convenience → Rear seat passenger alert).

CAUTION

Cluster

OTM048165L

- Make sure that all the windows are closed. If the window is open, the alert may activate by the sensor detecting an unintended movement (e.g. wind or bugs).

- If you do not want to use the Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system, press OK button on the steering wheel when the 1st alert is displayed on the cluster. Doing so will deactivate the 2nd alert once.

CAUTION

• If boxes or objects are stacked in the vehicle, the system may not detect the obstacle. Also, the warning may generate if the box or object falls off.
• The sensor may not operate normally if the senor is obscured by foreign substances.
• The alert may activate if movement in the driver or passenger seat is detected.
• The alert may activate with the doors locked due to car wash or surrounding vibration or noise.
• If the horn operates 3 times after you lock the vehicle, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• Even if your vehicle is equipped with the Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system, always make sure you check the rear seat before you get off the vehicle.

The alert may not operate if:

• The movement does not continue for a certain period of time or the movement is small.
• The rear passenger is covered with an obstacle such as a blanket.
• Also, always be cautious of the passenger's safety as the detection function and 2nd alert may not operate according to the surrounding environment and certain conditions.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occur:

• A door is opened without using the remote key or smart key.
• The tailgate is opened without using the remote key or smart key.
• The engine bonnet is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the tailgate. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the tailgate from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the tailgate, or the bonnet without using the remote key or smart key will cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if the bonnet, the tailgate, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the bonnet, the tailgate, or the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

i Information

• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the remote key or smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and place the ignition switch in the ON position (for remote key) or start the engine (for smart key) and wait for 30 seconds.
• When the system is disarmed but a door or tailgate is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

i Information

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm system will have a label attached to the vehicle with the following words:

1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car showing a blue plastic clip and its side panel, with no visible text or symbols.

The Driver Position Memory System is provided to store and recall the following memory settings with a simple button operation.

• Driver's seat position
• Outside rearview mirror position
• Instrument panel illumination intensity
• Head Up Display (HUD) position and brightness (if equipped)

WARNING

Never attempt to operate the driver position memory system whilst the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

i Information

• If the battery is disconnected, the memory settings will be erased.
• If the Driver Position Memory System does not operate normally, we recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Storing memory positions

1. Shit to P (Park) whilst the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver's seat position, outside rearview mirror position, instrument panel illumination intensity and head-up display height/brightness to the desired position.
3. Press the SET button. The system will beep once and notify you "Press button to save settings" on the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) within 4 seconds. The system will beep twice when the memory has been successfully stored.
5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will appear on the LCD display.

Recalling memory position

1. Shit to P (Park) whilst the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button (1 or 2). The system will beep once, and then the driver's seat position, outside rearview mirror position, instrument panel illumination intensity and head-up display height/brightness will automatically adjust to the stored positions.
3. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings applied" will appear on the LCD display.

i Information

• Whilst recalling the "1" memory position, pressing the SET or 1 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 2 button recalls the "2" memory position.
• Whilst recalling the "2" memory position, pressing the SET or 2 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 1 button recalls the "1" memory position.
• Whilst recalling the stored positions, pressing one of the control buttons for the driver's seat, outside rearview mirror, steering wheel, instrument panel illumination or head-up display will cause the movement of that component to stop and move in the direction that the control button is pressed.

Easy access function

The system will move the driver's seat and steering wheel automatically as follows:

- Exiting the vehicle:

The driver's seat will move rearward and the steering wheel will move upward when the driver's door is opened and the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position with the gear in P (Park).

However, the driver's seat may not move rearward if there is not enough space between the driver's seat and the rear seats.

Also, on a regular basis, the steering wheel will also move forward to adjust its location by itself.

- Entering the vehicle:

The driver's seat and steering wheel will move back to its original position when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the driver's door is closed with the smart key in possession or when the Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the ACC/ON/START position from the OFF position.

You can activate or deactivate the Easy Access Function from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

• Seat easy access: Convenience → Seat easy access → Off/Normal/Extended.
• Steering easy access: Convenience → Steering easy access → On/Off.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

CAUTION

Driver should be cautious when using this function to assure no injury to passenger or child on the back seat. In case of emergency the driver has to stop movement of front seat (when easy access feature is activated) by pressing SET button or any of the driver seat control switches.

Driver position memory system reset

If the Driver position memory system does not work properly, initialise the system as follows.

How to initialise:

1. Stop the vehicle and open the driver's door with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).
2. Pull the driver's seat forward as far as possible and have the seatback upright as much as possible using the driver's seat forward/backward adjustment and seatback angle (recline) switches.
3. Push the SET button and seat forward movement switch for 2 seconds simultaneously.

Initialisation in the process:

1. Initialisation begins as the alarm sounds.
2. The seat and seatback will automatically move backwards. The alarm sound will continue whilst the system is in operation.
3. Initialisation will be complete after the seat and seatback move to the centre with an alarm sound. If, however, cases as follows occur, the initialisation process will come to a stop and the alarm sound will stop as well.
4. When pushing driving position memory system button
5. When pushing driver's seat height adjustment switch
6. When shifting from P (Park) to other positions
7. When driving speed exceeds 2mph (3 km/h)
8. When the driver's door is closed

STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes heavier as the vehicle's speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle's speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

- If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warning light ( will illuminate or blink on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate. Take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

- When abnormality is detected in the electric power steering system, to prevent a deadly accident, the steering assist function will stop. At this time, the warning light turns on or blinks on the cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate. Have your vehicle checked immediately, after moving the vehicle to a safe zone.

i Information

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
  This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is placed in the ON or LOCK/OFF position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperatures, abnormal noise may occur. If the temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if you turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel effort increases. This is not a system malfunction. As time passes, the steering wheel effort will return to its normal condition.

Tilt steering / Telescopic steering

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel whilst driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

i Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lock-release lever may not lock the steering wheel.

It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on the steering wheel column and adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and position (3). Move the steering wheel, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face.

Make sure you can see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

After adjusting, pull up the lock-release lever (1) to lock the steering wheel in place. Push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue control panel and a highlighted touchscreen interface (no readable text or symbols)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel.

The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

i Information

The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

NOTICE

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. This cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

Horn

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a blue logo and directional arrow (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel. The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the centre on the view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area or behind the rear head restraints which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror whilst driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

A: Day, B: Night

Make this adjustment before you start driving and whilst the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever towards you to reduce glare from the headlamps of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) (if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlamp of the vehicle behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror. The sensor detects the light level around the vehicle, and automatically adjusts to control the headlamp glare from vehicles behind you. Whenever the shift lever is placed in R (Reverse), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the driver's view behind the vehicle.

Top-down view of a car's rearview mirror with numbered labels (1, 2, 3) and OTM048428L watermark at bottom right (no other text or symbols)

[1] : Indicator, [2] : ON/OFF button, [3] : Sensor

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

- Press the on/off button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Press the on/off button to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

- The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass

1. Rear light sensor
2. Status indicator LED

3. ECM ON/OFF button

4. Compass button

5. Display window

Automatic dimming rear view mirror controls automatically the glare of headlights of the vehicle behind you when it turned on by pressing the ECM ON/OFF button. It is turned off by pressing the ECM ON/OFF button once more.

1. To operate Compass feature

Press and release the compass button, then the vehicle's directional heading will be displayed. Pressing and releasing the button again will turn off the display.

Heading display

2. Calibration procedure

Press and hold the button for more than 6 but less than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

• Driving the vehicle in a circle at less than 8km/h 2 times or until the compass heading appears.
• Driving in a circle in right-handed direction and opposite direction are possible, and if the calibration is completed, the compass heading will appear.
• Keep driving in a circle until a compass heading appears.

3. Setting the compass zone

1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map.

1. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display.

2. Press the button until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the button in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTICE

1. Do not install the ski rack, antenna, etc. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.

2. If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, we recommend that you have the compass checked at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

3. The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or whilst driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

1. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside rearview mirror

Side view of a car showing its blue visor and side door (no text or symbols visible)

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors.

The mirror can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch.

The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

WARNING

• The outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
- Use your interior rearview mirror or turn your head and look to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors whilst driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Adjusting the rearview mirrors

1. Move the lever (1) either to the L (left side) or R (right side) to select the rearview mirror you would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control (2) to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, move the lever (1) to the middle to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate whilst the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand otherwise the motor may be damaged.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Side view of a car with a blue plastic component on the side, showing airflow direction (no text or symbols)

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue control panel and a close-up of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can be folded or unfolded by pressing the switch.

• If 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' is selected in the User Settings mode on the LCD display, the outside mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle.

- If 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' and 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On driver approach' is selected in the User Settings mode on the LCD display, the outside mirror will unfold automatically when you approach the vehicle (all doors closed and locked) with a smart key in possession.

NOTICE

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary whilst the engine is not running.

NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type outside rearview mirror by hand. It could cause motor failure.

Reverse parking aid function (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a gear shift and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

When you move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position, the outside rearview mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid with driving in reverse.

The position of the outside rearview mirror switch (1) determines whether or not the mirrors will move:

Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or R (Right) switch is selected, both outside rearview mirrors will move.

Neutral : When neither switch is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will not move.

The outside rearview mirrors will automatically revert to their original positions if any of the following occur:

• The Engine Start/Stop button is placed to either the OFF position or the ACC position.
• The shift lever is moved to any position except R (Reverse).
• The outside rearview mirror switch is not selected.

WINDOWS

Power windows (if equipped)

(1) Driver's door power window switch
(2) Front passenger's door power window switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window switch*
(4) Rear door (left) power window switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch

*: if equipped

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a Power Window switch to control that door's window. The driver has a Power Window Lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows will operate for approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front doors are opened, the Power Windows cannot be operated even within the 10 minutes period.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows whilst driving.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• Whilst driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch). If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open:

Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position whilst the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, it is recommended that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate whilst resetting power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle whilst it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 30 cm (12 inches) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance whilst the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reverse feature, the automatic window reverse will not operate.

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only active when the "Auto Up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16 inch) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

NOTICE

Do not install any accessories on the windows. The automatic reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a highlighted blue button (no text or symbols visible)

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.
- The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passengers' power window.

* If the power window lock switch is operated (indicator turns on), rear passenger can not open the rear door. (if equipped)

For more details, refer to "Safe Exit Assist" system in this chapter.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional window operation by a child.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
- Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING

• NEVER leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.
  • Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.
• Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows whilst driving.

Remote window closing function (if equipped)

Top-down view of a car's front panel with three buttons and a labeled pointer (no text or symbols on the main body)

You can still control the window movement with the engine turned off by pressing the Door Lock button (1) for more than 3 seconds. The window moves (up), as long as you press the door lock button. The window movement stops, when you release the door lock button. The hazard warning lights blink 3 times, when the window is completely closed.

Information

• The remote window closing function may abruptly stop, when you move away from your vehicle during the operation. Stay in close proximity of your vehicle, whilst monitoring the window movement.
• One of the windows may stop operating, when the window is interrupted by certain force. However, the other windows will keep operating. Thus, you should make sure that all windows are closed, and that the hazard warning lights blink 3 times.
• The remote window closing function is only operated by the vehicle equipped with an automatic power window on all windows.

PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

Close-up of a car air intake control panel with buttons and dials (no visible text or symbols)

The ignition switch must be in the ON position before you can open or close the sunroof.

The sunroof can be operated for approximately 10 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK(or OFF) position. However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated even within 10 minutes.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-roof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
  • After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

NOTICE

• Do not continue to move the sun-roof control lever after the sun-roof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
  • Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as allow theft.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade whilst driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.
  • Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.
• Do not leave the engine running and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.
• The panorama sunroof is made of glass, subject to break in case of accident. Passengers without the appropriate protection(e.g. seat belt, CRS, etc.) on may project out through the broken glasses and get seriously injured or even result in death.
• Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.

Sunshade

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and control buttons (no text or symbols)

• To open the sunshade, pull the sunroof control lever backward (1) to the first detent position.
  • To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed, push the sunroof control lever forward (2).

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever either forward or backward momentarily.

Sliding the sunroof

Top-down view of a car dashboard with blue directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever backward past the first detent, the sunshade will slide all the way open and then the sunroof glass will slide all the way open.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever either forward or backward momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof control lever backward, the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

i Information

Only the front glass of the panorama sunroof opens and closes.

i Information

Activating the control lever to the first detent requires only a very light touch.

Tilting the sunroof

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunshade will slide open then the sunroof glass will tilt open.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever either forward or backward momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunroof glass will tilt open.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever either forward or backward momentarily.

Closing the sunroof

Close-up of a car dashboard with blue directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

To close sunroof glass

Push the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position.

To close sunroof glass with sunshade

Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position. The sunroof glass will close then the sunshade will close automatically.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever either forward or backward momentarily.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

Illustration of a cartoon bear on a smartphone screen with blue sky and arrow (no text or symbols)

If the sunroof senses any obstacle whilst it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction then stop to allow the object to be cleared.

WARNING

Small objects that can get caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof glass will not detect the object and will not reverse direction.

WARNING

• In order to prevent accidental operation of the sunroof, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the sunroof.
- Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause vehicle damage.

NOTICE

• Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the sunroof guide rail or between the sun-roof and roof panel, which can make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, otherwise the motor could be damaged. In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly.

Resetting the sunroof

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and control buttons (no text or symbols)

The sunroof may need to be reset if the following conditions occur:

• The battery is discharged or disconnected or the sunroof fuse has been replaced or disconnected
• The sunroof control lever is not operating correctly

To reset the sunroof, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the engine on and close the sunroof glass and sunshade completely.

2. Release the control lever.

3. Push and hold the sunroof control lever forward (to close the sun-shade) for about 10 seconds until the sunroof moves slightly, then release the control lever.

4. Push and hold the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:

Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open → Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide Close → Sunshade Close

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.

For more details, contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Information

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

Sunroof open warning (if equipped)

Top-down view of a white car against a dark background (no text or symbols)

OTM048118

• If the driver turns off the engine when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approximately 3 seconds and the sunroof open warning will appear on the LCD display.
• If the driver turns off the engine and opens the door when the sunroof is not fully closed, the open sunroof warning will appear on the LCD display until the door is closed or the sunroof is fully closed.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

Bonnet

Opening the bonnet

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt mechanism and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the bonnet. The bonnet should pop open slightly.

Illustration of a car's front grille and dashboard, showing engine components and a close-up inset of the dashboard (no text or symbols)

1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the bonnet slightly, push the secondary latch up (1) inside of the bonnet centre and lift the bonnet (2). After it has been raised about halfway, it will raise completely by itself.

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check the following:

2. All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.

3. Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

4. Lower the bonnet halfway (lifted approximately 30cm (12 inches) from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the bonnet is secure.

If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not securely locked. Open it again and close it with more force.

WARNING

• Before closing the bonnet, ensure all obstructions are removed from around the bonnet opening.
  • Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. Check there is no bonnet open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. If the bonnet is not latched whilst the vehicle is moving, the chime will sound to warn the driver the bonnet is not fully latched. Driving with the bonnet opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an accident, and the bonnet could fall or be damaged.

Tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Illustration of a car trunk with open lid and three close-ups showing hand cleaning and opening (no text or symbols)

Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and set the parking brake.

Then do one of the following:

1. Unlock all doors with the Door Unlock button on your remote key or smart key. Press the tailgate handle button and open the tailgate.
2. Press and hold the Tailgate Unlock button on the remote key or smart key. Press the tailgate handle button and open the tailgate.
3. With the Smart Key in your possession, press the tailgate handle button and open the tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal gear (no text or symbols visible)

Lower the tailgate and press down until it locks. To be sure the tailgate lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again without pressing the tailgate handle button.

WARNING

Always keep the tailgate lid completely closed whilst the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

Information

To prevent damage to the tailgate lift cylinders and the attached hardware, always close the tailgate before driving.

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, tailgate lock and tailgate mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

Do not hold the part (gas lifter) that supports the tailgate. Be aware that the deformation of the part may cause vehicle damage and a risk of injury.

WARNING

• NEVER allow anyone to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. If the tailgate is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, serious injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The luggage compartment is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a protected occupant space but is a part of the vehicle's crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept locked and keys should be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in luggage compartments.

Emergency tailgate safety release

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal compartments, showing close-ups of battery and storage (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment. The tailgate can be opened by doing as follows:

1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right by a key.
3. Push up the tailgate.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in the vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Power tailgate (if equipped)

Power tailgate button

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The power tailgate operates when:

• The power tailgate button is pressed with the engine off.
• The power tailgate button is pressed when the ignition switch is in the ON position with the shift lever in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or the shift lever in neutral (for manual transmission vehicle).

To activate or de-activate the power tailgate, go to User Settings mode and select the Power Tailgate on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

WARNING

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

Children or animals might operate the power tailgate that could result in injury to themselves or others, or damage the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure there are no people or objects around the tailgate before operating the power tailgate. Wait until the tailgate is opened fully and stopped before loading or unloading cargo or passengers from the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not close or open the power tailgate manually. This may cause damage to the power tailgate. If it is necessary to close or open the power tailgate manually when the battery is discharged or disconnected, do not apply excessive force.

Opening the tailgate

Close-up of a car's front panel with three buttons and a blue arrow pointing to the right side (no text or symbols visible)

OTM048431L

The power tailgate will open automatically by doing one of the following:

- Press the tailgate unlock button on the remote key or smart key for approximately one second.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

• Press the power tailgate button for approximately one second.

For emergency stop whilst operating, press the power tailgate button shortly.

Exterior view of a white car with a hand near the front, showing a close-up of its side panel (no text or symbols visible)

• Press the tailgate handle switch carrying the smart key with you.

Closing the tailgate

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

• Press the power tailgate button for approximately one second when the tailgate is opened.

The tailgate will close and lock automatically.

For emergency stop whilst operating, press the power tailgate button shortly.

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and attached sensor icon (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- Press the power tailgate inner switch for approximately one second when the tailgate is opened. The tailgate will close and lock automatically.

Power tailgate non-opening conditions

The tailgate does not open when the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

The chime will sound if you drive with the tailgate opened. Stop your vehicle immediately at a safe place and check if your tailgate is opened.

! CAUTION

Operating the power tailgate more than 5 times continuously could cause damages to the operating motor. In this case, the system enters into a thermal protection mode. In thermal protection mode, the power tailgate can not operate and the chime will sound for 3 times by any switch inputs. Leave your power tailgate system for rest about 1 minute and then operate.

i Information

• The power tailgate can be operated when the engine is not running. However the power tailgate operation consumes large amounts of vehicle electric power. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate it excessively. (e.g.: more than approximately 10 times repeatedly.)
  • To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the power tailgate in the open position for a long time.
• Do not modify or repair any part of the power tailgate by yourself. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to change a tyre or repair the vehicle, do not operate the power tailgate. This could cause the power tailgate to operate improperly.
  • In cold and wet climates, the power tailgate may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Automatic reversal

Exterior view of a white SUV trunk with open lid showing internal compartments and airflow direction (no text or symbols)

During power opening and closing if the power tailgate is blocked by an object or part of the body, the power tailgate will detect the resistance.

• If the resistance is detected whilst opening the tailgate, it will stop and move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected whilst closing the tailgate, it will stop and move in the opposite direction.

However, if the resistance is weak such as from an object that is thin or soft, or the tailgate is near the latched position, the automatic stop and reversal may not detect the resistance.

If the automatic reversal feature operates continuously more than twice during opening or closing operation, the power tailgate may stop at that position. At this time, close the tailgate manually and operate the tailgate automatically again.

WARNING

Never intentionally place any object or part of your body in the path of the power tailgate to make sure the automatic reversal operates.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy stuffs on the power tailgate before you operate the power tailgate.

Additional weight on tailgate could cause damages to the system.

How to reset the power tailgate

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected, for the power tailgate to operate normally, reset the power tailgate as follow:

1. Automatic transmission:

Put the shift lever in P (Park).

Manual transmission:

Put the shift lever in neutral.

1. Whilst Pressing the power tailgate inner switch, press the tailgate handle switch for more than 3 seconds. (the chime will sound)
2. Close the tailgate manually.

If the power tailgate does not work properly after the above procedure, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

If the power tailgate does not operate normally, check again if the gear position is in right position.

Power tailgate speed adjustment

To adjust the power tailgate speed, go to User Settings mode and select Door → Power tailgate speed → Normal / Fast on the LCD display.

• If power tailgate function turns off or tailgate is not fully closed, you can not adjust the power tailgate speed.
• Initial speed of Power tailgate is set as "Fast".

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Power tailgate opening height user setting

Exterior view of a modern car with open trunk and attached sensor icon (no text or symbols on the car itself)

The driver may set the height of a fully opened tailgate by following the below instruction.

1. Position the tailgate manually to the height you prefer.
2. Press the power tailgate inner switch for more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the tailgate manually after hearing the buzzer sound.

The tailgate will open to the height the driver has set up.

WARNING

Always keep the tailgate completely closed whilst the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

WARNING

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

Emergency tailgate safety release

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal compartments, showing close-ups of a car's door panel and battery compartment (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the tailgate can be opened by doing as follows:

1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in the vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
  • Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Smart tailgate (if equipped)

Illustration of a person carrying boxes next to an open car trunk (no text or symbols)

On the vehicle equipped with a smart key, the tailgate can be opened with no-touch activation using the Smart tailgate system.

How to use the Smart Tailgate

The tailgate can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all the conditions below.

• After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked
- Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds.

i Information

• The Smart Tailgate does not operate when:
• The smart key is detected within 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected.
• The smart key is detected within 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and 1.5 m (60 in.) from the front door handles. (for vehicles equipped with Welcome Light)
• A door is not locked or closed.
• The smart key is in the vehicle.

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Tailgate, go to User Settings Mode and select Smart Tailgate on the LCD display.

* For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

2. Detect and Alert

If you are positioned in the detecting area (50 \~ 100 cm (20 \~ 40 in.) behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound to alert you the smart key has been detected and the tailgate will open.

i Information

Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the tailgate to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The tailgate will stay closed.

3. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound 6 times and then the tailgate will slowly open.

WARNING

• Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or objects around the tailgate before opening or closing the tailgate.
- Make sure objects in the rear cargo area do not come out when opening the tailgate on the slope way. It may cause serious injury.
- Make sure to deactivate the Smart tailgate function when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate may open inadvertently.
- The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently open the Smart Tailgate whilst playing around the rear area of the vehicle.

How to deactivate the Smart Tailgate function using the smart key

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

3. Tailgate open

If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Tailgate function will be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to deactivate the Smart Tailgate function for emergency situations.

i Information

- If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Tailgate function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the Smart Tailgate function will be activated again.

- If you press the tailgate open button (3) for more than 1 second, the tailgate opens.

- If you press the door lock button (1) or tailgate open button (3) when the Smart Tailgate function is not in the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Tailgate function will not be deactivated.

- In case you have deactivated the Smart Tailgate function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the Smart Tailgate function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors.

Detecting area

- The Smart Tailgate operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is detected within 50 \~ 100 cm (20 \~ 40 in.) from the tailgate.

- The alert stops at once if the smart key is positioned outside the detecting area during the Detect and Alert stage.

i Information

• The Smart Tailgate function will not work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a mobile phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease or increase when :
- One side of the tyre is raised to replace a tyre or to inspect the vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc.

Fuel filler door

Opening the fuel filler door

Close-up of a car's side panel with a blue arrow icon pointing to the corner (no text or symbols visible)

1. To open the fuel filler door, press the centre edge of the fuel filler door.

i Information

The fuel filler door will open and close only when all doors are unlocked.

1. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.
2. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
3. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

i Information

If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is latched securely.

i Information

The fuel filler door will not close if the driver's door is locked. If you lock the driver's door whilst fuelling, unlock it before closing the fuel filler door.

WARNING

Petrol is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station.
  • Before refuelling, note the location of the Emergency Petrol Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use mobile phones whilst refuelling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from mobile phones can potentially ignite fuel vapours and cause a fire.

- Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refuelling. You can generate a build-up of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity.

Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapours causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other petrol source, with your bare hand.

- When refuelling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transmission), set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.

• When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refuelling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapours causing a fire. Once refuelling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.
• Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store petrol.
• Do not use matches or a lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle whilst at a gas station, especially during refuelling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause petrol spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refuelling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

• If pressurised fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

i Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.

NOTICE

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■ Type A

Type B

1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges and Meters" in this chapter.

OTM048100E/OTM048101E

Instrument cluster control Instrument panel illumination

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

When the vehicle's position lights or headlamps are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster whilst driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or vehicle damage.

• The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.
- If the brightness reaches the maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.

Gauges and meters
Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or miles per hour (MPH).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

Engine coolant temperature gauge
■ Type A ■ Type B

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "130" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the Engine Overheats" in chapter 6.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Fuel gauge

■ Type A ■ Type B

Close-up of a car dashboard dial showing speed, battery, and handwheel (no text or symbols visible)

OTM048110L/OTM048111L

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

i Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.
  • The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "0" level.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

Outside temperature gauge

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures either in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.

- Temperature range : -40°C \~ 60°C (-104°F \~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the display may not immediately change like a general thermometer not to distract the driver.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F or from °F to °C) can be changed by:

- User Settings mode in the Cluster : You can change the temperature unit in the "Other features - Temperature unit".

- Automatic climate control system : Whilst pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The temperature unit of the instrument cluster and climate control system will change at once.

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

Distance to empty

• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display “---” as distance to empty.

i Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.3 lmp. gal.) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Icy road warning light (if equipped)

Pure black rectangular shape with white horizontal lines and a small triangular symbol at the bottom (no text or symbols)

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 4^ C ( 40^ F), the Icy Road Warning Light and Outside Temperature Gauge blinks 5 times, and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime sounds once.

i Information

If the icy road warning light appears whilst driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

Transmission shift indicator Manual transmission shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs which gear is recommended whilst driving, to save fuel.

- Shifting up: ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6

- Shifting down: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For example

▲3 : Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is recommended (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is recommended (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Automatic transmission shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator displays which shift lever position is selected.

• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
  • Sports mode : 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

OIK047141

Shift Indicator Pop-up (if equipped) The pop-up that indicates the current gear position is displayed in the cluster for about 2 seconds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).

Automatic transmission shift indicator (if equipped)

In the manual shift mode, this indicator informs which gear is desired whilst driving to save fuel.

• Automatic transmission shift indicator (8 speed transmission)
- Shifting up :▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6, ▲7, ▲8
- Shifting down :▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5, ▼6, ▼7

• Automatic transmission shift indicator (6 speed transmission)

- Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6

- Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

For example

▲3 : Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Warning and indicator lights

i Information

Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you turn the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.
  In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds
• It remains on if the parking brake is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail whilst you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time whilst driving:

- When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

We recommend you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

i Information - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, we recommend you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light (if equipped)

EPB

This warning light illuminates:

- When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the EPB.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability control (ESC) Indicator Light comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly (This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB).

AUTO HOLD Indicator Light (if equipped)

AUTO HOLD

This indicator light illuminates:

• [White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to "Auto Hold" in chapter 5.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the EPS.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

- When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

Driving with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control system which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.

CAUTION

Petrol Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Diesel Engine with DPF (if equipped)

When the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) blinks, it may stop blinking after driving the vehicle:

- at more than 37 mph (60km/h), or

- at more than 2nd gear with 1500 \~ 2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 25 minutes).

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) continues to blink in spite of the procedure, we recommend that you have the DPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you continue to drive with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) blinking for a long time, the DPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

CAUTION

Diesel Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) blinks, some error related to the injection quantity adjustment occurs which could result in loss of engine power, combustion noise and poor emission.

In this case, we recommend that you have the engine control system inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Charging System Warning Light

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

This warning light illuminates:

- When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter 7). If the level is low, add oil as required. If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

• If the warning light stays on whilst the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case:

• Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

• Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.
• Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When the fuel tank is nearly empty. Add fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below "0" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

Overspeed Warning Light (if equipped)

120 km/h

This warning light blinks:

• When you drive the vehicle more than 72 mph (120 km/h).
• This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with overspeed.
• The overspeed warning chime also sound for approximately 5 seconds.

Master Warning Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction in the below systems.
• Low washer fluid (if equipped)
• Exterior lamp malfunction (if equipped)
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) malfunction (if equipped)
• Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS, if equipped)

To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.

Low Tyre Pressure Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tyres are significantly underinflated (The location of the underinflated tyres are displayed on the LCD display).

For more details, refer to "Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on after blinking for approximately 60 seconds or repeatedly blinks on and off at approximately 3 second intervals:

- When there is a malfunction with the TPMS. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to "Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

WARNING

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tyre damage caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

Fuel Filter Warning Light (for diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates:

- When water has accumulated inside the fuel filter. In this case, remove the water from the fuel filter.

For more details, refer to "Fuel Filter" in chapter 7.

NOTICE

• When the Fuel Filter Warning Light illuminates, engine power (vehicle speed & idle speed) may decrease.
• If you keep driving with the warning light on, engine parts (injector, common rail, high pressure fuel pump) may be damaged. If this occurs, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

Exhaust System (GPF)

Warning Light (for petrol engine, if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

- When there is a malfunction with the Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter (GPF) system.

When this warning light illuminates, it may turn off after driving the vehicle:

• at more than 50 mph (80 km/h), or
• above 3rd gear with 1500 \~ 4000 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 30 minutes).

If this warning light blinks in spite of the procedure (at this time LCD warning message will be displayed), we recommend that you have the GPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

If you continue to drive with the GPF warning light blinking for a long time, the GPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

Exhaust System (DPF) Warning Light (for diesel engine, if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

- When there is a malfunction with the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system.

When this warning light illuminates, it may turn off after driving the vehicle:

• at more than 37 mph (60 km/h), or
• above 2nd gear with 1500 \~ 2500 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 25 minutes).

If this warning light blinks in spite of the procedure (at this time LCD warning message will be displayed), we recommend that you have the DPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

If you continue to drive with the DPF warning light blinking for a long time, the DPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

Glow Indicator Light (for diesel engine)

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the engine is being preheated with the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

- The engine can be started after the glow indicator light goes off.

- The illumination time varies depending on the with the engine coolant temperature, air temperature, and battery condition.

If the indicator light remains on or blinks after the engine has warmed up or whilst driving, there may be a malfunction with the engine preheating system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

If the engine does not start within 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the LOCK or OFF position for 10 seconds and then to the ON position in order to preheat the engine again.

SCR warning light (for diesel engine, if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When the urea solution tank is nearly empty.
  If the urea solution tank is nearly empty:
  Refill urea solution as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to "Low urea solution warning message" in the chapter 7.

4 Wheel Drive (4WD) Warning Light (if equipped)

Adaptive Front-Lighting System (AFS) Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the 4WD system.
  In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the AFS.

If there is a malfunction with the AFS:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light remains on, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light (if equipped)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light (if equipped)

AUTO STOP Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.
  In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.

For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.

This indicator light blinks:

- When the automatic starting occurs, the AUTO STOP indicator on the cluster will blink for 5 seconds.

For more details, refer to the "ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system" in chapter 5.

This indicator light blinks:

- Whilst the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

i Information

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system has malfunctioned.

Immobiliser Indicator Light (without smart key) (if equipped)

Immobiliser Indicator Light (with smart key) (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the vehicle detects the immobiliser in the key with the ignition switch in the ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

- When there is a malfunction with the immobiliser system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

- When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

- When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you cannot start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:

- If the smart key is in the vehicle and the Engine Start/Stop button is ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light blinks:

- When the battery voltage of the smart key is low.

- At this time, you cannot start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to "Starting the Engine" in chapter 5).

- When there is a malfunction with the immobiliser system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Turn Signal Indicator Light

Low Beam Indicator Light (if equipped)

High Beam Assist (HBA) indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light blinks:

- When you operate the turn signals.

If any of the following occur, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system.

• The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink
• The turn signal indicator light blinks rapidly
• The turn signal indicator light does not illuminate at all

If any of these conditions occur, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the headlamps are on.

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlamps are on and in the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

This warning light illuminates:

• When the high-beam is on with the light switch in the AUTO light position.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or preceding vehicles, the High Beam Assist (HBA) system will switch the high beam to low beam automatically.

For more details, refer to "High Beam Assist (HBA)" in this chapter.

Light ON Indicator Light

LED Headlamp Warning Light (if equipped)

4 Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the tail lights or headlamps are on.

Front Fog Indicator Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you turn the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• When there is a malfunction with the LED headlamp.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the front fog lights are on.

Rear Fog Indicator Light (if equipped)

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a LED headlamp related part.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

Continuous driving with the LED Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlamp life.

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you select 4WD Lock mode by pressing the 4WD LOCK button.
• The 4WD LOCK mode is to increase the drive power when driving on wet pavement, snow covered roads and/or off-road.

NOTICE

Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on dry paved roads or highway, it can cause noise, vibration or damage of 4WD related parts.

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)

CRUISE

Downhill Brake Control (DBC) Indicator Light (if equipped)

SPORT Mode Indicator Light (if equipped)

SPORT

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.

Speed Limiter Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when:

- When the speed limiter is enabled.

For more details, refer to "Speed Limit Control System" in chapter 5.

This warning light illuminates:

- Once you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When you activate the DBC system by pressing the DBC button.

This warning light blinks:

- When the DBC is operating.

This warning light illuminates yellow:

- When there is a malfunction with the DBC system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to "Downhill Brake Control (DBC) System" in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates

- When you select "SPORT" mode as drive mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

ECO Mode Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates

- When you select "ECO" mode as drive mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

SMART Mode Indicator Light

SMART

This indicator light illuminates:

- When you select "SMART" mode as drive mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system warning light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

- When you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the FCA.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

- [Green] When the system operating conditions are satisfied.

- [White] The system operating conditions are not satisfied.

- [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane keeping assist system.

In this case, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.

Icy Road Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 4^ C ( 40^ F), the icy Road Warning Light and Outside Temperature Gauge blinks and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime sounds 1 time.

i Information

If the icy road warning light appears whilst driving, you should drive more attentively and safely, refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

LCD display messages

Shift to P (for smart key system and automatic transmission)

This warning message is displayed if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

At this time, the Engine Start/Stop button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop button once more, it will turn to the ON position).

Low Key Battery (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the battery of the smart key is discharged whilst changing the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position.

Press START button whilst turning wheel (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the Engine Start/Stop button is pressed.

You should press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst turning the steering wheel right and left.

Steering wheel unlocked (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel is not locked whilst the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock normally whilst the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system and automatic transmission)

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (for smart key system and manual transmission)

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you open or close door in the ACC position or ON position. The warning sound is heard when you close door without a smart key in vehicle.

When attempting to start the vehicle always have the smart key with you.

Key not detected (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Press START button with key (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if you press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst the warning message "Key not detected" is displayed.

At this time, the immobiliser indicator light blinks.

Press START button again (for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the Engine Start/Stop button was pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button again.

If the warning message appears each time you press the Engine Start/Stop button, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse (for smart key system and automatic transmission)

This warning message is displayed if the brake switch fuse is disconnected. You need to replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

Shift to P or N to start engine (for smart key system and automatic transmission)

This warning message is displayed if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

i Information

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Door, Bonnet, Tailgate open

Top-down view of a car with visible roof and side-mounted wheels (no text or symbols)

OTM048117 OTM048118

This warning is displayed indicating which door, or bonnet, or tailgate is open.

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/bonnet/tailgate is fully closed. Also, check there is no door/bonnet/tailgate open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

Sunroof open (if equipped)

Top-down view of a car against a dark background (no text or symbols)

This warning is displayed if you turn off the engine when the sunroof is open.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

Window open (if equipped)

Top-down view of a white car on a dark background, no text or symbols visible

This warning is displayed if you turn off the engine when any window is open.

Lights mode

This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.

Wiper mode

This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.

Low Pressure (if equipped)

OTM048123L

This warning message is displayed if the tyre pressure is low. The corresponding tyre on the vehicle will be illuminated.

For more details, refer to "Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Heated Steering Wheel turned off (if equipped)

This message is displayed if you turn off the heated steering wheel.

For more details, refer to "Heated Steering Wheel" in this chapter.

Low washer fluid (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.

Low fuel

This warning message is displayed if the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the low fuel level warning light in the cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the nearest fuelling station and refuel as soon as possible.

Low engine oil (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed when the engine oil level should be checked.

If this warning message is displayed, check the engine oil level as soon as possible and add engine oil as required.

Slowly pour the recommended oil little by little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity: approximately 0.1 \~ 0.21 Imp. gal. (0.6 \~ 1.0/))

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in chapter 8.)

Do not overfill the engine oil. Make sure the oil level is not above F (Full) mark on the dipstick.

i Information

If you travel approximately 30\~60 miles (50\~100 km) after the engine warms up, after adding the engine oil, the warning message will be disappeared.

NOTICE

If the message is displayed continuously after adding the engine oil and travelling approximately 30\~60 miles (50\~100 km) after the engine warms up, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Even if this message is not displayed after the engine has started, the engine oil level should be periodically checked and topped up if required.

Engine has overheated (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed when the engine coolant temperature is above 120^ C ( 248^ F). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

Check headlight (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if the headlamps are not operating properly.

In addition, if a specific lamp(turn signal lamp etc.) is not operating properly, the warning message according to a specific lamp (turn signal lamp etc.) is displayed. A corresponding bulb may need to be replaced.

i Information

Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.

Check HBA (High Beam Assist) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the High Beam Assist (HBA) System. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to "High Beam Assist (HBA) System" in chapter 3.

Check FCA (Forward Collision Avoidance Asst.) (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a malfunction with the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

Check DAW (Driver Attention Warning) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system" in chapter 5.

Check FCW (Forward Collision Warning) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System" in chapter 5.

Check LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.

Check exhaust system (if equipped)

This warning message illuminates if the DPF or GPF system has a malfunction. at this time, DPF or GPF warning light also blinks.

In this case, we recommend that you have the DPF or GPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

DPF : Diesel Particulate Filter

GPF : Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter

For more details, refer to "Warning lights" in this chapter.

Low urea (for diesel engine)

This warning message illuminates if the urea solution level in the urea solution tank is nearly empty.

- When the SCR warning light is illuminates.

Refill urea solution as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to "Low urea solution warning message" in the chapter 7.

Check urea system (for diesel engine)

This warning message illuminates if the urea system has a malfunction.

In this case, we recommend that you have the urea system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to "Low urea solution warning message" in the chapter 7.

LCD DISPLAY

LCD display control

Interior view of a car steering wheel with two labeled diagnostic panels (Type A and Type B) showing dashboard controls and battery status indicators.

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.

(1) MODE button for changing modes
(2) ∧, ∨ : MOVE switch changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

LCD display modes

Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer			This mode displays driving information such as the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)	This mo days the state of the navigation.
Assist			This mode displays the state of:- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system- Tyre pressureFor more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system", "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system" in chapter 5 and "Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
User Settings In this mod can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Warning This mode dis warning messages related to the Cruise system, etc.

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

Shift to P to edit settings / Engage parking brake to edit settings

This warning message illuminates if you try to select an item from the User Settings mode whilst driving.

- Manual transmission

For your safety, change the User Settings after engaging the parking brake.

- Automatic transmission

For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide (Help, if equipped)

This mode provides quick guides for the systems in the User Settings mode.

Select an item, press and hold the OK button.

For more details about each system, refer to this Owner's Manual.

Trip computer mode

OIK047124N OPDE046147R

The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including fuel economy, tripmeter information and vehicle speed.

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist mode

SCC/LKA/DAW

This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) and Driver Attention Warning (DAW).

For more details, refer to each system information in chapter 5.

OTM048125R OTM048127L

Tyre Pressure

This mode displays information related to Tyre Pressure.

For more details, refer to "Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Driving force distribution (4WD)

This mode displays information related to 4WD driving force.

If the vehicle is in 4WD lock state, this mode is not displayed.

For more details, refer to the "Four Wheel Drive (4WD)" in the chapter 5.

Warning message mode

If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed on the LCD display for several seconds.

• Low washer fluid (if equipped)
• Exterior lamp malfunction (if equipped)
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system malfunction (if equipped)
• Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS, if equipped)
• High Beam Assist (HBA) malfunction (if equipped)
• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) malfunction (if equipped)

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the settings of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc.

1. Head-up display (if equipped)
2. Driver assistance
3. Door
4. Lights
5. Sound
6. Convenience
7. Service interval
8. Other features
9. Languages
10. Reset

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

1. Head-up display

Items Explanation
Enable Head-up display If this item is checked, Head-Up Display will be activated.
Display height To adjust the height of the image displayed.
Rotation To adjust the angle of the image displayed.
Brightness To adjust the brightness of the image displayed.
Content selection To select the content to be displayed.
Speedometer size	• Large/Medium/SmallTo select the speedometer size displayed.
Speedometer colour	• White/Orange/GreenTo select the speedometer colour displayed.

1. Driver assistance

Items Explanation
SCC response	Fast/Normal/SlowTo adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Cruise Control system.For more details, refer to "Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go" in chapter 5.
Driving assist	Leading vehicle departure alertTo activate or deactivate the Leading vehicle departure alert.For more details, refer to the "Leading vehicle departure alert" in chapter 5.ISLW (Speed Limit Warning)To activate or deactivate the Warning.For more details, refer to "Warning (ISLW)" in chapter 5.
DAW(Driver Attention Warning)	To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver Attention Warning.- Off/High sensitivity / Normal sensitivityFor more details, refer to the "Driver Attention Warning (DAW)" in chapter 5.
Warning timing	To adjust the warning timing of the driver assistance system.- Normal / Later
Warning volume	To adjust the warning volume of the driver assistance system.- High / Medium / Low

1. Driver assistance

Items Explanation
Lane safety	To adjust the Lane Keeping Assist function.- LKA (Lane Keeping Assist)- LDW (Lane Departure Warning)- OffFor more details, refer to the "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.
Forward safety	To adjust the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist function.- Active assist- Warning only- OffFor more details, refer to the "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist system" in chapter 5.
Blind-spot safety	SEA(Safe Exit Assistance)To activate or deactivate the Safe Exit Assistance.For more details, refer to the "Safe Exit Assistance" in chapter 5.RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning)To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning function.For more details, refer to "Rear Cross-traffic Collision Warning (RCW)" in chapter 5.Active assistWarning onlyOff

1. Door

Items Explanation
Auto lock	Disable: The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto unlock	Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be cancelled.On key out/On vehicle off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
Lock/Unlock sound	To activate or deactivate the lock/unlock sound.If you lock the door with a remote control key again after locking the door, the alarm beeps.
Power tailgate	If this item is checked, the power tailgate function will be activated.For more details, refer to "Power tailgate" in this chapter.
Power tailgate speed	To adjust the power tailgate speed.- Normal/FastFor more details, refer to "Power tailgate" in this chapter.
Smart tailgate	To activate or deactivate the smart tailgate.For more details, refer to "Smart tailgate" in this chapter.

1. Lights

Items Explanation
One touch turn indicator	Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
Head lamp delay	To activate or deactivate the headlamp delay function.For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
Travel mode	To activate or deactivate the traffic change function.For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.

1. Sound

Items Explanation
Welcome sound To activate or deactivate the welcome sound.

1. Convenience

Items Explanation
Seat easy access	Off: The seat easy access function is deactivated.Normal/Extended: When you turn off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.For more details, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
Rear seat passenger alert	To activate or deactivate the Rear seat passenger alert.For more details, refer to "Rear Occupant Alert (ROA) system" in this chapter.
Welcome mirror/light	On door unlock: The outside rearview mirrors are unfolded and the welcome light turns on automatically when the doors are unlocked.On driver approach: The outside rearview mirrors are unfolded and the welcome light turns on automatically when the vehicle is approached with the smart key.For more details, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.
Wireless charging system	To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.For more details, refer to "Wireless mobile phone charging system" in this chapter.
Wiper/Lights display	To activate or deactivate the Wiper/ Light mode.When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you changed the mode.
Auto rear wiper (reverse)	Off: The Auto Rear Wiper function will be deactivated.ON: If you move the shift lever from D to R when the front wiper operates, the rear wiper will operate automatically. Then, if you move the shift lever from R to D, the rear wiper will stop.
Gear position pop-up	To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.
Icy road warning To activate or deactivate the icy road warning.

7. Service interval

Items Explanation
Service interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.
Adjust interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.
Reset To reset the service interval.

i Information

To use the service interval menu, consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

• Service in
  : Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.
• Service required
  : Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

i Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

• The battery cable is disconnected.
• The fuse switch is turned off.

• The battery is discharged.

• Other features

Items Explanation
Fuel economy auto reset	Off: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refuelling.After ignition: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.After refuelling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 6 litres (1.3 Imp. gal.) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Fuel economy unit	To select the fuel economy unit.(UK gallon, US gallon)
Temperature unit	To select the temperature unit.(°C, °F)
Tyre pressure unit	To select the tyre pressure unit.(psi, kPa, bar)

1. Language (if equipped)

Items Explanation
Language Choose the language. You can choose the language in AVN device.(if equipped)

1. Reset

Items Explanation
Reset	You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are reset to factory settings, except language and service interval.

TRIP COMPUTER

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

i Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

graph TD
    A["Fuel Economy\n• Average Fuel Economy\n• Instant Fuel Economy"] <--> B["Accumulated Info\n• Tripmeter\n• Average Fuel Economy\n• Elapsed Time"]
    B <--> C["Drive Info\n• Tripmeter\n• Average Fuel Economy\n• Elapsed Time"]
    C <--> D["Digital Speedometer"]
    D <--> E["Smart Shift"]
    E <--> F["Auto stop (if equipped)"]
    F <--> G["Urea level (if equipped)"]

Interior view of a car steering wheel with two close-up insets showing blue buttons (no text or symbols)

To change the trip mode, toggle the “/” switch on the steering wheel.

Fuel economy

OIK047124N

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average fuel economy after refuelling, select the "Fuel economy auto reset" mode in the User Settings menu on the LCD display.

• After ignition: The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine.
• After refuelling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving speed exceeds 1 km/h, after adding 6 litres (1.3 Imp. gal.) of fuel or more.

i Information

The average fuel economy may be inaccurate, when the vehicle drives shorter than 0.19 miles (300 metres) after turning ON the Engine Start/Stop button.

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the [OK] button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

- This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is more than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).

Accumulated Info display

This display shows the accumulated trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is accumulated starting from the last reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Accumulated driving info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The accumulated driving information will continue to be counted whilst the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light).

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 metres) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Drive Info display

OTM048174R

This display shows the trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is combined for each ignition cycle. However, when the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the Drive Info screen will reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Drive Info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The driving information will continue to be counted whilst the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 metres) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Digital Speedometer

OIK047151N

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (MPH).

Smart Shift

This mode displays the currently selected drive mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

Auto stop time (if equipped)

This mode displays the elapsed time of Auto stop by "Idle stop and go system".

For more details, refer to the "Idle stop and go system" in chapter 5.

Urea level gauge (for diesel engine, if equipped)

This mode displays the amount of the remaining urea solution in the urea solution tank.

HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (IF EQUIPPED)

Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The head up display is a transparent display which projects a shadow of some information of the instrument cluster and navigation on the display located on the windscreen glass.

Precautions whilst using the head up display

It may be difficult to read information on the head up display in the following situations.

• The driver is improperly positioned in the driver's seat.
• The driver wears polarised sun-glasses.
• An object is located above the head up display cover.
• The vehicle is driven on a wet road.

- Any improper lighting accessory is installed inside the vehicle, or there is incoming light from outside of the vehicle.

- The driver wears glasses. - The driver wears contact lenses.

When it is difficult to read the head up display information, adjust the head up display angle or the head up display brightness level in the User Settings Mode. For more information, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

WARNING

• Do not tint the front wind-screen glass or add other types of metallic coating. Otherwise, the head up display image may be invisible.
• Do not place any accessories on the crash pad or attach any objects on the windscreen glass.
• The Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system warnings on the head up display are mere supplemental. Do not solely depend on them to change lanes. Always take a look around before changing lanes.

CAUTION

When replacing the front wind-screen glass of the vehicles equipped with the head up display, replace it with a windshield glass designed for the head up display operation. Otherwise, duplicated images may be displayed on the wind-screen glass.

Head-up display ON/OFF

OIK047152N OTM048442R

To activate the head up display, select 'Head-UP Display' on the User Settings mode on the instrument cluster LCD display.

If you do not select 'Head-Up Display', the head up display will be deactivated.

Head Up Display Information

1. Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information (if equipped)
2. Road signs (if equipped)
3. Speedometer
4. Cruise setting speed (if equipped)
5. Smart Cruise Control (SCC) information (if equipped)
6. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system information (if equipped)
7. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system information (if equipped)
8. Warning lights (Low fuel)
9. Audio/Video information

i Information

If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information as HUD contents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information will not be displayed on the LCD Display.

Head Up Display Setting

On the LCD display, you can change the head up display settings as follows.

• Display height
• Rotation
• Brightness
• Content selection
• Speedometer size
• Speedometer colour

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

LIGHTING

Exterior lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) O (OFF) position
(2) AUTO light position (if equipped)
(3) Position lamp position
(4) Headlamp position

AUTO light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the position lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located on the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windscreen, the AUTO light system may not work properly.

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

OAE046469L OAE046467L

Close-up of a hand holding a blue handheld device with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

Position lamp position ( )

The position lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

Headlamp position (3)

The headlamp, position lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

i Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.

High beam operation

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with a blue arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

OAE046453L

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

Illustration of a hand pointing to a device interface with a blue arrow and icons (no text or symbols)

OAE046455L

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

High Beam Assist (HBA) system (if equipped)

Hand holding a black handheld device with blue arrows indicating rotation and change (no text or symbols)

OPDE046057

High Beam Assist (HBA) is a system that automatically adjusts the head-lamp range (switches between high beam and low beam) according to the brightness of other vehicles and road conditions.

Operating condition

1. Place the light switch in the AUTO position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing the lever away from you.

3. The High Beam Assist (HBA) (AO) indicator will illuminate.

4. The High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn on when vehicle speed is above 25mph (40km/h).

1) If the light switch is pushed away when the High Beam Assist (HBA) is operating, the High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off and the high beam will be on continuously.
2) If the light switch is pulled towards you when the high beam is off, the high beam will turn on without the High Beam Assist (HBA) cancelled. When you let go of the light switch, the lever will move to the middle and the high beam will turn off.
3) If the light switch is pulled towards you when the high beam is on by the High Beam Assist (HBA), the low beam will be on and the High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off.
4) If the light switch is placed to the headlamp position, the High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off and the low beam will be on continuously.

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is operating, the high beam switches to low beam in the following conditions.

• When the headlamp of an on-coming vehicle is detected.
• When the tail lamp of a vehicle in front is detected.
• When headlamp/tail lamp of bicycle/motorcycle is detected.
• When the surroundings are bright enough high beams are not needed.
• When streetlights or other lights are detected.
• When the light switch is not in the AUTO position.
• When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is off.
• When vehicle speed is below 22mph (35 km/h).

Warning light and message

OOS047127R

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is not working properly, the warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate.

We recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked.

CAUTION

The system may not operate normally in the following conditions.

▶ When the light from on-coming or vehicle in front is dim
- When the in light from the oncoming or vehicle in front in is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.
- When the lamp of the on-coming or vehicle in front is covered with dust, snow or water.
- When the vehicle in front's headlamps are off but the fog lamps on and etc.

▶ When it is affected by an external condition
- When there is a similar shaped lamp with the vehicle front vehicle's lamps.
- When the headlamp is not repaired or replaced at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- When headlamp aiming is not properly adjusted.
- When driving on a narrow winding road or rough road.
- When driving downhill or uphill.
- When only part of the vehicle in front is visible on a cross-road or on a corner.
- When there is a traffic light, reflecting sign, flashing sign or mirror.
- When the road conditions are bad such as being wet or covered with snow.
- When the vehicle in front headlamps are off but the fog lamps on.

• When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a corner.
• When the vehicle is tilted from a flat tyre or being towed.
• When the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system warning light illuminates. (if equipped)
  ▶ When the front visibility is poor
• When the lamp of the on-coming or vehicle in front is covered with dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the oncoming or vehicle in front is not detected because of exhaust fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered with foreign matter.
• When it is hard to see because of fog, heavy rain or snow etc.

WARNING

• Do not disassemble a front view camera temporarily for tinted window or attaching any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked to need a calibration.
• When you replace or reinstall the windscreen glass, front view camera, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked.

• Be careful that water doesn't get into the High Beam Assist (HBA) unit and do not remove or damage related parts of the High Beam Assist (HBA) system.

• Do not place objects on the crash pad that reflect light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if sunlight is reflected.

• At times, the High Beam Assist (HBA) may not work properly. The system is for your convenience only. It is the responsibility of the driver for safe driving practices and always check the road conditions for your safety.
• When the system does not operate normally, change the lamp position manually between the high beam and low beam.

Turn signals and lane change signals

OTLE045284

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A). To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released or when the turn is completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

One-touch turn signal function

To activate a one-touch turn signal function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.

You can activate/deactivate the One Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Front fog lamps (if equipped)

Close-up of a hand holding a blue handheld device with a control knob, showing a finger pointing to the screen (no visible text or symbols on the device itself)

Fog lamps are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.

Use the switch next to the headlamp switch to turn the fog lamps ON and OFF.

1. Turn on the position lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front fog lamp position.
3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn the light switch to the front fog lamp position again or turn off the position lamp.

NOTICE

When in operation, the fog lamps consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lamps when visibility is poor.

Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

Close-up of a hand holding a blue handheld device with a circular dial and a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Vehicle with front fog lamps

To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the position lamp position, turn the light switch (1) to the front fog lamps position, and then turn the light switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one of the following:

• Turn off the position light switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog lamp position again.
• When the light switch is in the position lamp position, if you turn off the front fog lamps, the rear fog lamp will also turn off.

Hand holding a blue handheld device with a control panel and a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Vehicle without front fog lamps To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the head-lamp position, and then turn the light switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one of the following:

• Turn off the headlamp switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog lamp position again.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the position lamp when the driver turns the engine off and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the position lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the engine is turned off, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the position lamps OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function (if equipped)

If you place the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the head-lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or position lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, with the engine off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlamps (and/or position lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or position lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the remote key or smart key twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position. However, if you turn the light switch to the AUTO position when it is dark outside, the headlamps will not be turned off.

You can activate or deactivate the Headlamp Delay function from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, it causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the headlamps before getting out of the vehicle.

Daytime running light (DRL) (if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamps OFF when:

1. The headlamps or front fog lights are in the ON position.
2. The position light switch is in the ON position.
3. The engine is turned off.

Traffic change (if equipped)

The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming car driver.

To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand several technical solutions (ex. automatic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). These headlamps are designed not to dazzle opposite drivers.

You can activate or deactivate the Traffic Change feature from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. Go to 'Lights → Travel mode'.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Headlamp levelling device (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

Manual type

To adjust the headlamp beam level according to the number of the passengers and loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam levelling switch.

The higher the number on the switch position, the lower the headlamp beam level. Always keep the headlamp beam at the proper levelling position, otherwise headlamps may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are examples of appropriate switch settings for varying loads. For loading conditions other than those listed, adjust the switch position to the most similar situation.

Loading condition	Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers (including driver) 1
Full passengers (including driver) + Maximum permissible loading	2
Driver + Maximum permissible loading	3

Automatic type

It automatically adjusts the head-lamp beam level according to the number of passengers and loading weight in the luggage area.

It also adjusts to the appropriate head-lamp beam level for various situations.

WARNING

If the function does not work properly, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself.

AFS (Adaptive Front-Lighting System) (if equipped)

Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swiveling and levelling the headlamp.

Change the switch to the AUTO position when the engine is running. The adaptive front lighting system will operate when the headlamp is ON.

To turn off the AFS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but levelling operates continuously.

Close-up of a speedometer dial with a light bulb icon and a pointer (no readable text or symbols)

If the AFS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFS is not working properly.

Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the engine. If the indicator continuously remains on, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Welcome system (if equipped) Welcome light (if equipped)

Exterior view of a modern SUV (no visible text or symbols)

Puddle lamp and door handle lamp With all the doors (and tailgate) closed and locked, the puddle lamp and door handle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.

1. If 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' is selected in the User Settings mode on the LCD display,

- the lamps will turn on when the door lock button is pressed on the smart key.

• the lamps will turn on when the button of the outside door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.
• If both 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On door unlock' and 'Convenience → Welcome mirror/light → On driver approach' is selected in the User Settings mode on the LCD display, the lamps will turn on when the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

You can activate or deactivate Welcome Light function from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Headlamp and position lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and tailgate) are locked and closed, the position lamp and headlamp will come on for 15 seconds when the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the position lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.
• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lights

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is turned off otherwise the battery will discharge.

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The interior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the engine is turned off and the doors are closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the engine is turned off. If the doors are locked and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

Front lamps

■ Type A (Without sunroof)

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with blue airflow indicators (no text or symbols)

■ Type B (With sunroof)

(1) Front room lamp
(2) Front door lamp
(3) Front map lamp

Front map lamp (

Press either buttons to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

Front room lamp ( )

Press this button to turn the front and rear room lamps on or off.

Front door lamp

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened if the engine is running or not. When doors are unlocked by the smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off.

If a door is opened with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

Rear lamps

Rear room lamp switch :
Press this button to turn the room lamp on and off.

NOTICE

Do not leave the lamp switches on for an extended period of time when the engine is turned off.

Luggage compartment lamp

Exterior view of a silver car trunk with open lid, showing internal compartments and a close-up inset of the front panel (no text or symbols on main subject)

The luggage compartment lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened.

NOTICE

The luggage compartment lamp comes on as long as the tailgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the tailgate securely after using the tailgate.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Close-up of a car backrest door with a blue indicator light and arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols on the main subject)

OTM048448R OTI

Glove box lamp

Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Push the switch to turn the light on or off.

• The lamp will turn on if this button is pressed.
• The lamp will turn off if this button is pressed.

NOTICE

Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

If the glove box is not closed, the lamp will turn off after 20 minutes.

NOTICE

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

Puddle lamp

Exterior view of a silver SUV with a close-up inset showing a blue lens (no text or symbols visible)

Welcome light

When all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for 15 seconds if the door is unlocked by the smart key or outside door handle button.

For more details, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

Escort light

When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened, the puddle lamp will come on for 30 seconds. If the driver's door is closed within the 30 seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off after 15 seconds. If the driver's door is closed and locked, the puddle lamp will turn off immediately.

The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will turn on only the first time the driver's door is opened after the engine is turned off.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

■ Front windscreen wiper/washer

■ Rear windscreen wiper/washer

A : Wiper speed control (front)

. ∀Single wipe
. O - Off
- --- - Intermittent wipe AUTO* - Auto control wipe
- 1 - Low wiper speed
· 2 - High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

D : Rear wiper control\*

· 2 - High wiper speed
· 1 - Low wiper speed
· O - Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

*: if equipped

Windscreen wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

V : For a single wiping cycle, move the lever down ( ) and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

O : Wipers are not in operation

--- : Wipers operate intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.

1 : Normal wiper speed

2: Fast wiper speed

i Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windscreen, defrost the windscreen for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windscreen wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

AUTO (Automatic) control (if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windscreen glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The wiper operation time will be automatically controlled depends on rainfall.

When the rain stops, the wiper stops. To vary the sensitivity setting, turn the sensitivity control knob.

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is in the ON position, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury from the windscreen wipers, when the engine is running and the windscreen wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode:

• Do not touch the upper end of the windscreen glass facing the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the windscreen glass with a damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the windscreen glass.
• Set the wiper switch to the O (OFF) position when the wiper is not in use.

NOTICE

• When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the O (OFF) position to stop the auto wiper operation. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode whilst washing the vehicle.
• Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windscreen glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Because of using a photo sensor, temporary malfunction could occur according to sudden ambient light change made by stone and dust whilst driving.

Windscreen washers

Illustration of a hand pointing at a device with a blue arrow indicating the tip (no text or symbols on the device itself)

In the O (OFF) position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windscreen using the defroster to prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windscreen and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windscreen, do not operate the wipers when the windscreen is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped)

Close-up of a hand holding a black USB cable with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the cable itself)

The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever.

Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

2 – High wiper speed
1 - Low wiper speed
O - Off

Close-up of a hand holding a device with a blue arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wiper 1\~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. (if equipped)

Auto rear wiper (if equipped)

The rear wiper will operate whilst the vehicle is in reverse with the front wipers ON by selecting the function on the LCD display.

Go to 'User settings → Convenience → Auto rear wiper (reverse)'.

Rear view monitor (Type A) (if equipped)

Side view of a car's rear bumper with a close-up inset showing the engine compartment (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car gear shift lever system with a monitor displaying a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

The Rear view monitor will activate when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

3-130

This is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the mirror or navigation display whilst backing-up.

WARNING

The Rear view monitor is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the rear camera display when backing-up.
  • ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
  • Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

NOTICE

• Do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not use any cleanser containing acid or alkaline detergents when cleaning the lens. Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

i Information

Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt, water or snow.

Rear view monitor (Type B) (if equipped)

The Rear View Monitor system assists you to drive safely by allowing you to check the rear view through the screen whilst driving.

The system is activated when:

• The engine is ON
  • The shift lever is in D (Drive) or N (Neutral) and you press the button (1)

The system is deactivated when:

• You press the button (1) again
• You press the audio or AVN system button (2)

When the vehicle is reversing the screen switches to rear parking assist screen.

Warning indicator in the screen is indicated when:

• The tailgate is open
• The driver/passenger's door is open

WARNING

• The Rear View Monitor system is a supplementary driving assist system. Make sure to check the rear view directly for safety. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location.
• The camera may not operate properly if any foreign substance is on the rear camera lens. Always keep the lens clean.
• When the rear view is displayed whilst driving, an icon ( ) is indicated on the upper
  right side of the screen.

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system (if equipped)

Side profile of a silver SUV with visible rear bumper and front grille, marked with lane markers (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system assists the driver during reverse movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within the distance of 120 cm (50 inches) behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental system that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors, it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are not any objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
  • Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects may not be visible on the screen or be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

Operation of the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when backing up with the ignition switch in the ON position. However, if vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not detect objects.
• If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the system will not warn you even though objects are detected.
• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognised first.

Types of warning sound and indicator

Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is 120 cm to 60 cm (47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear bumper : Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 30 cm (24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear bumper : Buzzer beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 30 cm (12 in.) of the rear bumper : Buzzer beeps continuously.

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from the illustration depending on objects or sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction with Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

To turn off the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system (if equipped)

Push the button to turn off the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system. The indicator light on the button will turn on.

Non-operational conditions of Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system

The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system may not operate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• Sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m (40 inches) and narrower than 14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.

The following objects may not be recognised by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system. Always drive safely and cautiously.

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system precautions

• The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system may not sound consistently depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.
• The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognise objects less than 30 cm (11 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

- Do not spray the sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system (if equipped)

A: Front sensor, B: Rear sensor

The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system assists the driver during movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within the distance of 100 cm (39 inches) in front and 120 cm (47 inches) behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental system that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors, it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.
- Be aware that some objects may not be visible on the screen or be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

Operation of the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system

Operating condition

- This system will activate when the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/ Forward) system button is pressed with the engine running.

• The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system button turns on automatically and activates the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system when you move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position. However, if vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the system will not warn you even though objects are detected, and if vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h), the system will turn off automatically. To turn on the system, press the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system button.
• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognised first.

Types of warning sound and indicator
cm (in)

Distance from object		Warning indicator		Warning sound
		When driving forward	When driving rearward
61 ~ 100(24 ~39)	Front			Buzzer beeps intermittently
61 ~ 120(24 ~47)	Rear			Buzzer beeps intermittently
31 ~ 60(12 ~24)	Front		[YOX3]	Buzzer beeps frequently
	Rear			Buzzer beeps frequently
30(12)	Front		[SOCY]	Buzzer sounds continuously
	Rear			Buzzer sounds continuously

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from the illustration depending on objects or sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction with the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

Non-operational conditions of Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system may not operate normally when:

- Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

- Sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.

The following objects may not be recognised by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system.

Always drive safely and cautiously.

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system precautions

• The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system may not sound consistently depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.
• The Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognise objects less than 30 cm (11 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

- Do not spray the sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

Surround view monitor (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the front and side compartments with a blue arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

The Surround View Monitor system can assist in parking by allowing the driver to see around the vehicle. Push the button (1, indicator ON) to operate the system. To cancel the system, push the button again (1, indicator OFF).

Operating conditions

• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position
• When the transmission is in D, N or R
• When vehicle speed is under 9 mph (15km/h)

i Information

• When vehicle speed is over 15km/h, the system will turn off. The system will not automatically turn on again, even though vehicle speed gets below 9 mph (15 km/h). Push the button (1, indicator ON) again, to turn on the system.
• When the vehicle is backing up, the system will turn ON regardless of vehicle speed or button status. However, if vehicle speed is over 15 km/h when driving forward, the SVM system will turn off.
  • A warning appears on the system when:
• The tailgate is opened
• The driver's door is opened
• The passenger's door is opened
• The outside rearview mirror is folded

- If the system is not operating normally, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked.

For more details, refer to the separately supplied manual with your vehicle.

CAUTION

ODH047435

(1) Front camera
(2) Left/Right camera
(3) Rear camera

Surround View Monitor system only serves to assist the driver in parking. ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle.

NOTICE

Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with foreign material.

Rear view monitor (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with blue highlighted sections and an inset showing a blue arrow labeled 'ID' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital display showing a car on a road ahead (no visible text or symbols)

You may check the rear view through the screen whilst driving.

The system is activated when:

• The engine is ON
- The vehicle's speed is over 9 mph (15 km/h) and you press the SVM button (1, indicator ON)
- The vehicle's speed is under 9 mph (15 km/h) and you press the (2) on the screen
The system is deactivated when:
- You press the SVM button (1, indicator OFF) again
- You press the (2) on the screen again
- You press the audio or AVN system button (3)

Information

• If vehicle speed is over 9 mph (15 km/h)
• the rear image stays ON when the rear view was on the screen

• if other modes (top, front wide, front right and front left) of SVM system was on the screen, the screen changes to the screen of rear view.

• If the SVM system is ON and the vehicle speed is under 9 mph (15 km/h)

• the rear image stays ON when the rear view was on the screen
• a pop-up for selecting the SVM mode (top, front wide, front right and front left) appears when pressing (2) on the screen
• When the vehicle is backing up, the rear image will be appear on the screen automatically regardless of the vehicle speed or SVM button (1) status.
• If the rear image was ON, the screen switches to the parking assist screen.
• If the screen (top, front wide, front right and front left) of other modes of SVM system was ON, the screen for setting the initial rear view mode appears.

• When the shift lever is moved from R (Reverse) to D (Drive), the screen of the previous mode is displayed.

• A warning appears on the SVM system when

• the tailgate is opened
• the driver/passenger's door is opened
• the outside rearview mirror is folded

WARNING

• The Rear View Monitor system is a supplementary driving assist system. Make sure to check the rear view directly for safety. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location.
• The camera may not operate properly if any foreign substance is on the rear camera lens. Always keep the lens clean.
• When the rear view is displayed whilst driving, an icon (6) is indicated on the upper
  right side of the screen.

PARKING ASSIST (PARALLEL, PERPENDICULAR REVERSE) (IF EQUIPPED)

graph TD
    A["Top Car"] --> B["Downward Arrow"]
    B --> C["Left Car"]
    C --> D["Right Car"]
    D --> E["Bottom Car"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#bfb,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffb,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fbb,stroke:#333

Parking Assist system helps drivers park their vehicle by using sensors to measure parking spaces, control the steering wheel to semi-automatically park the vehicle and provide instruction on the LCD display to help through parking.

Additionally, the system provides assistance when leaving (parallel exit) a parking space.

CAUTION

• The vehicle will not stop for pedestrians or objects that may be in its path, so the driver must monitor the manoeuvre.
  • Use the system only in parking lots and places used for parking.
• The system does not work if there is no car parked in front of the parking space you are planning to park or if it is a diagonal parking space.
  • After parking your vehicle using the system, the vehicle may not be parked at the exact spot you have wished. For example, the space between your vehicle and wall may not be the distance you have desired.

• Deactivate the system and park your vehicle manually, when the situation requires parking manually.

• The Parking Distance Warning system's front and rear warning sound activates when the Parking Assist system is activated.
  • After searching for a parking space is completed, the Parking Assist system will be cancelled if the Parking Distance Warning system is cancelled by pressing the button to the OFF position.

WARNING

• The Parking Assist system should only be considered as a supplementary function. The driver must check the front and rear view for objects. The operational function of the Parking Assist system can be affected by many factors and conditions of the surroundings, so the responsibility rests always with the driver.
• The system may not operate normally if the vehicle needs wheel alignment adjustment. We recommend that the vehicle be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If you use a different tyre or wheel size rather than the size recommended by the HYUNDAI dealer, the system may not work properly. Always use the same size tyre and wheel.

Operating condition

The system will help park the vehicle in the middle or back of a parked vehicle. Use the system when all the below conditions are met.

• When the parking space is a straight line
• When parallel parking or reverse (perpendicular) parking is required
• When there is a parked vehicle
• When there is enough space to move the vehicle

Non-operating condition

Never use the Parking Assist system in the below conditions.

• Curved parking space
• Inclined roads
  • A vehicle loaded with longer or wider cargo compared to the vehicle
• Diagonal parking space
• Heavy snow or rain
• Near a circular pillar or narrow pillar, or a pillar surrounded by objects such as fire extinguisher, etc.
• The sensor is positioned incorrectly by an impact to the bumper
• Bumpy roads
  • A vehicle equipped with a snow chain or spare tyre
• Tyre pressure lower or higher than the standard tyre pressure
  • A trailer connected to the vehicle
• Slippery or uneven road
• Big vehicles such as buses or trucks parked
• Sensor covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water

• A motorcycle or bicycle parked
- An obstacle such as a trash can, bicycle, shopping cart, etc. is near
- Heavy wind
- Wheel changed to an unauthorised size
• A problem with the wheel alignment
• Vehicle leaned severely to one side
• Electronic Power Steering (EPS) warning indicator illuminates.
- Front or rear distance sensors are malfunction or not working properly. (Refer to the Parking Distance Warning system in chapter 3.)

WARNING

Do not use the Parking Assist system in the following conditions for unexpected results may occur and cause a serious accident.

1. Parking on inclines

Exterior view of a multi-lane SUV driving on a road with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the vehicles)

The driver must apply the accelerator and brake pedal when parking on inclines. If the driver is unfamiliar with applying the accelerator and brake pedal, a vehicle accident may occur.

1. Parking in snow

Illustration of three cars in a snowy landscape with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or numbers on vehicles)

Snow may interfere with sensor operation or the system may cancel if the road is slippery whilst parking. Also, if the driver is unfamiliar with applying the accelerator and brake pedal, a car accident may occur.

1. Parking in narrow space

Black-and-white photo of a row of parked cars with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on vehicles)

The system may not search for parking spaces if the space is too narrow. Even if the system is operating, always be careful.

1. Parking diagonal
   

The system is a supplemental for parallel parking or perpendicular parking. Diagonal line parking is not available. Even if the vehicle is able to enter the space, do not operate the Smart Parking Assist System. The system will attempt parallel parking or reverse (perpendicular) parking.

1. Parking in uneven road
   

Side view of a silver SUV on a hillside with a blue prohibition symbol nearby (no text or symbols on the vehicle or background)

Parking in uneven roads, the driver needs to properly apply the pedal (clutch, accelerator or brake). If not, the system may cancel when the vehicle slips or an accident may occur.

1. Parking behind a truck
   

Exterior view of a truck and a car with a blue no-smoking symbol (no text or numbers on the vehicle or background)

An accident may occur when parking behind a vehicle higher than yours. For example, bus, truck, etc.

Do not solely rely on the Parking Assist system.

7. Obstacle in parking space

Exterior view of a silver SUV with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Obstacle such as a pillar may interfere with the system when looking for a parking space. Even though, a parking space is available the system may not detect a parking space.

8. Leaving a parking space near a wall

Black-and-white photo of a row of parked cars in an urban setting with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no readable text or symbols on vehicles)

When leaving a parking space that is narrow and near a wall, the system may not work properly. When leaving a parking space similar to the above picture, the driver must watch out for obstacles whilst leaving.

How the system works (Parking Mode)

1. Activate the Parking Assist system The shift lever should be placed in D (Drive).

2. Select parking mode

- If the parking mode is selected with the shift lever in N (Neutral) after starting the engine, the exit mode will be selected automatically and after driving, the parking mode will be selected.

1. Search for parking space (slowly move forward.)

2. Search complete (automatic search by sensor.)

3. Steering wheel control

(1) Shift according to the instruction on the LCD display. (2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal applied.

1. Parking complete

2. If necessary, manually adjust position of vehicle.

CAUTION

- Before activating the system check if the conditions are possible to use the system.

- For your safety, always apply the brake pedal except for when driving.

1. Activate Parking Assist system

- Press the Parking Assist system button (the button indicator will illuminate).

• The Parking Assist System will be activated (the button indicator will illuminate).
  A warning sound will be heard if an obstacle is detected.
• Press the Parking Assist system button again for more than 2 seconds to turn off the system.
• The Parking Assist system defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

2. Select Parking Mode

- Select parallel mode or reverse mode by pressing the Parking Assist system button with the shift lever in D (Drive) and the brake pedal depressed.

• The right side parallel mode is selected automatically when the Parking Assist system is activated.
• The mode changes from parallel mode (left > right) to reverse mode (left > right) whenever the Parking Assist system button is pressed.
• If the button is pressed again, the system will turn off.

3. Search for parking space

OTM048137R/OTM048138R

OTM048139R/OTM048140R

- Slowly drive forward maintaining the distance of approximately 50cm \~ 150cm (19.6in.-59.0in.) with the parked vehicles. The side sensors will search for a parking space.

• If the vehicle speed is over 12 mph (20 km/h), a message will appear to notify you to reduce speed.
• If vehicle speed is over 19 mph (30 km/h), the system will be cancelled.

CAUTION

• Turn on the hazard warning flasher if it is crowded with other vehicles.
• If the parking lot is small, slowly drive more nearer to the parking space.
• The search for a parking space will be completed only when there is enough space for the vehicle to move to park.

CAUTION

• When searching for a parking space, the system may not be able to find a parking space if there is no vehicle parked, a parking space is available after driving by or a parking space is available before driving by.
• The system may not operate normally in the following conditions:

(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
(5) Parked vehicle is abnormally parked

In above cases, the system may not search the parking space although the parking space exists. And the system may search the parking space although the parking space is not proper to park.

CAUTION

Slowly drive forward maintaining the distance of approximately 100 cm (40 in.) with the parked vehicles. If the distance is below 50 cm (20 in.) or over 150 cm (59 in.), the system may not be able to search for a parking space.

CAUTION

After searching for a parking space is completed, continue using the system after checking the surrounding area.

Especially, check the distance of the outside rearview mirror and objects whilst using the system to prevent careless accidents.

4. Recognizing parking space

When a parking space is found, a blank box will appear like the above picture. Drive forward slowly, then the "Shift to R" message will appear.

5. Search complete

Whilst driving forward to search for a parking space, the above message will appear with a beep sound if the search is complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to the R (Reverse) position.

NOTICE

• Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied.
- If the parking space is to small the system may be cancelled at the Steering wheel control stage. Do not park your vehicle if the space is too small.

6. Steering wheel control

- The above message will appear if the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The steering wheel will be controlled automatically.

• The system will be cancelled if you firmly hold the steering wheel whilst it is controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle speed is over 4.3 mph (7 km/h).

WARNING

Do not put your hands between the steering wheel whilst it is being automatically controlled.

i Information

Do not install any cover on the steering wheel. This may cause the system to cancel.

NOTICE

• Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied.
• Always check for objects around your vehicle before driving.
- If the vehicle does not move even though the brake pedal is not depressed, check the surrounding before depressing the accelerator pedal. Be sure not to speed over 4.3 mph (7 km/h).

CAUTION

• If you do not follow the instructions provided, you may fail to park your vehicle.
  However, if the Parking Distance Warning system warning sound (distance from object is within 30cm: continuous beep) occurs, slowly drive the vehicle to the reverse direction of the detected object after checking the surrounding.
• Always check the surrounding before driving your vehicle if the Parking Distance Warning system warning sound (distance from object is within 30cm: continuous beep) is heard for the object is close to your vehicle. If the vehicle gets too close to the object, the warning will not sound.
• Never drive too fast when parking the vehicle. Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

To cancel the system whilst parking

• Press the Parking Assist system button and hold until the system is cancelled.
• Press the Parking Assist system button or Parking Distance Warning system button whilst the steering wheel is controlled.

Gear shift whilst steering wheel control

When the above message appears with a beep sound, shift the gear and drive the vehicle with the brake pedal depressed.

NOTICE

Always check the surrounding before releasing the brake pedal.

WARNING

Always be careful whilst parking for other vehicles or pedestrians.

1. Parking Assist system completed
   

OTM048146L

Complete parking your vehicle according to the instructions on the LCD display. If required, manually control the steering wheel and complete parking your vehicle.

Information

The brake pedal must be depressed by the driver whilst parking your vehicle.

Additional instructions (messages)

OTM048160R

OTM048149R

OTM048148L

When the Parking Assist system is operating, a message may appear regardless of the parking order.

The messages will appear according to the circumstances. Follow the instructions provided whilst parking your vehicle with the Parking Assist system.

CAUTION

• In the below conditions the system will be cancelled. Park your vehicle manually.
• When the ABS is activated
• When the TCS/ESC is turned off
• When vehicle speed is above 12mph (20km/h) whilst searching for a parking space a message "Reduce speed" will appear.
  • In the below condition the system will not activate
• When the TCS/ESC is turned off

System malfunction

OTM048161R

- If there is a problem with the system, when the system is turned on, the above message will appear. Also, the indicator on the button will not light up and a beep sound will be heard. - If there is a problem with only the Parking Assist system, the Parking Distance Warning system will operate.

If you notice any problem, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

How the system works (Exit mode)

1. Activate the Parking Assist system With manual transmission The shift lever should be placed in P (Park).
2. If the parking mode is selected with the shift lever in N (Neutral) after starting the engine, the exit mode will be selected automatically and after driving, the parking mode will be selected.
3. Select Exit Mode
4. Check surroundings
5. Steering wheel control

(1) Shift according to the instruction on the LCD display.

(2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal applied.

1. Exiting complete If necessary, manually adjust position of vehicle.

CAUTION

• Before activating the system check if the conditions are possible to use the system.
• For your safety, always apply the brake pedal except for when driving.

1. Activate Parking Assist system

• Press the Parking Assist system button (the button indicator will illuminate).
• The Parking Distance Warning system will be activated (the button indicator will illuminate).
  A warning sound will be heard if an obstacle is detected.
• Press the Parking Assist system button again for more than 2 seconds to turn off the system.
• The Parking Assist system defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

2. Select Exit Mode

• Select the mode by pressing the Parking Assist system button.
  With manual transmission
  The shift lever should be placed in N (Neutral) and the brake pedal depressed.
  With automatic transmission
  The shift lever should be placed in P (Park) and the brake pedal depressed.
• The left side parallel mode is selected automatically when the Parking Assist system is activated.
  • To select the right side parallel mode press the Parking Assist system button once more.
• If the button is pressed again, the system will turn off.

3. Check surroundings

OTM048147R OTM048173R cause an accident, the system may

The Parking Assist system checks the front and rear space to exit the vehicle from the parking space.

i Information

• When checking surroundings, if the front or rear vehicle (or object) is too near, the system may not work properly.
• The system may not operate normally in the following conditions:

(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty

(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
(5) Parked vehicle is abnormally parked

In above cases, the system may not search the parking space although the parking space exists. And the system may search the parking space although the parking space is not proper to park.

• When exiting the parking space if an obstacle is detected that may cause an accident, the system may cancel.
• If the space is too small to exit the system may cancel.

NOTICE

• If searching surroundings is completed, continue using the system after checking the surrounding area.
• The Exit mode may be activated unintentionally, when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the Parking Assist system button is pressed.

4. Steering wheel control

OTM048150R

OTM048151R

• The above message will appear if the shift lever is in D (Drive), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral, manual transmission only) according to the distance of the front and rear object from the sensor.
  The steering wheel will be controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if you firmly hold the steering wheel whilst it is controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle speed is over 4.3 mph (7 km/h).

WARNING

Do not put your hands between the steering wheel whilst it is being automatically controlled.

To cancel the system whilst exiting

Press the Parking Assist system button or Parking Distance Warning system button whilst the steering wheel is controlled.

NOTICE

Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied.

1. Exiting Complete
   

OTM048154R

When assisting the driver exit the parking space is completed the above message will appear.

Turn the steering wheel to the direction you are leaving and manually control the steering wheel whilst leaving the parking space.

NOTICE

- When leaving the parking space turn the steering wheel as much as you can to the direction you are leaving, and then drive the vehicle slowly by depressing the brake pedal.

• Always check the surrounding before driving your vehicle if the Parking Assist system warning sound (distance from object is within 30cm: continuous beep) is heard for the object is close to your vehicle. If the vehicle gets too close to the object, the warning will not sound.
• The system will be cancelled for safety reasons if the vehicle is parked at a small space near a wall.

Additional instructions (messages)

When the Parking Assist system is operating, a message may appear regardless of the exiting order.

The messages will appear according to the circumstances. Follow the instructions provided whilst parking your vehicle with the Parking Assist system.

i Information

• In the below conditions the system will be cancelled. Park your vehicle manually.

• When the ABS is activated
• When the TCS/ESC is turned off

• In the below condition the system will not activate

- When the TCS/ESC is turned off

System malfunction

• If there is a problem with the system, when the system is turned on, the above message will appear.
  Also, the indicator on the button will not light up and a beep sound will be heard.
• If there is a problem with only the Parking Assist System, the Parking Distance Warning system will operate.

If you notice any problem, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The system may not work properly by providing incorrect messages when the sensors are interfered by other vehicle sensors and noise, or it is on a road that interferes with receiving signals.

DEFROSTER

NOTICEN

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

i Information

If you want to defrost and defog the front windscreen, refer to "Windscreen Defrosting and Defogging" in this chapter.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, whilst the engine is running.

- To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the centre facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

- To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

i Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with outside mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ 3rd row air conditioning control (for Type B climate control)

Front view of a car air conditioner unit with grille and control knob (no text or symbols on the device itself)

1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection button
4. Front windscreen defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air conditioning button*
7. Air intake control button
8. 3rd row seat Air conditioning ON/OFF button*
9. 3rd row seat Air conditioning fan speed control knob*

*: if equipped

OTM048300L/OTM048301/OTM048302

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling, select:

- Heating: √

- Cooling:

1. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

4. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Mode selection (3)

OTM048330R

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

* 3rd row outlet vents (G, H) (if equipped)

- The air flow of 3rd row outlet vents (G) is controlled by the front climate control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor.

- The air flow of the 3rd row outlet vents (G) may be weaker than the instrument panel vents for the long air duct.

- The air flow of 3rd row side vents (H) is controlled by the 3rd row seat air conditioning button and knob.

Face-Level (B, D, E)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windscreen and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windscreen with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Front defroster (4) (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windscreen with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Circular industrial control knob with blue gradient and 'MAX A/C' label, no readable text or symbols beyond branding

A/C MAX-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

To operate the A/C MAX, turn the temperature control knob to extreme left. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

After the interior has cooled sufficiently, whenever possible, move the temperature knob away from A/C MAX and press the A/C button.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the vent control lever. If you move the vent control lever to the left end, the outlet vents can be closed.

Temperature control (2)

The temperature will increase by turning the knob to the right. The temperature will decrease by turning the knob to the left.

Air intake control (7)

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A

■ Type B

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i Information

Using the system in the fresh air position is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) can cause fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible whilst driving.

Fan speed control (1)

Turn the knob to the right to increase the fan speed and airflow. Turn the knob to the left to decrease fan speed and airflow.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the "0" position turns off the fan.

NOTICE

Operating the fan speed when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the fan speed when the engine is running.

Air conditioning (A/C) (6) (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

3rd row air conditioning (if equipped)

A: Front, B: Rear left, [C]: Rear right

To turn on the 3rd row air conditioning control system

1. Press the 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button (8) located on the front climate control panel and set the fan speed to the desired speed with the 3rd row fan speed knob (9). (indicator light on the ON/OFF button will illuminate).

2. To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system, press the 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button once more located on the front climate control panel or set the fan speed to the OFF position with the 3rd row fan speed switch (indicator light on the ON/OFF button is not illuminated).

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode to the position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• To prevent interior fog on the windscreen, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

i Information

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labelled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

NOTICE

- When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely whilst driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

- When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.

• Use the air conditioning system every month for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• If you operate the air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windscreen could cause the outer surface of the windscreen to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob to the position and set the fan speed control knob to the lowest speed setting.

System maintenance Climate control air filter

A : Outside air, B : Recirculated air

[C]: Climate control air filter, [D]: Blower

[E] : Evaporator core, [F] : Heater core

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system.

We recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the maintenance schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent climate control filter inspections and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend the system be checked at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also reduces the performance of the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should

only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important

that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

We recommend the air conditioning system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Air conditioning refrigerant label

Example

- Type A

ODH044365R

- Type B

ODH043366

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A

Type B

■ 3rd row air conditioning control (for Type B climate control)

Front view of a car air conditioner unit with ventilation grille and control knob (no text or symbols on main body)

1. Passenger's temperature control knob
2. Driver's temperature control knob
3. SYNC button
4. AUTO (automatic control) button
5. OFF button
6. Air conditioning button
7. Front windscreen defroster button
8. Fan speed control button
9. Mode selection button
10. Rear window defroster button
11. Air intake control button
12. 3rd row seat Air conditioning ON/OFF button*
13. 3rd row seat Air conditioning fan speed control knob*
14. Climate control information screen

*: if equipped

OTM048313R/OTM048314R/OUM046445L

Automatic heating and air con- ditioning

The Automatic Climate Control System is controlled by setting the desired temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button (4).

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by the temperature setting you select.

1. Turn the temperature control knob (1, 2) to the desired temperature. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously. After the interior has cooled sufficiently, adjust the knob to a higher temperature set point whenever possible.

To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

• Mode selection button
• Front windscreen defroster button (Press the button one more time to deselect the front windscreen defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be controlled manually whilst other functions operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 23^ C ( 73^ F).

Exterior view of a modern car with a highlighted blue-lit component (no visible text or symbols)

i Information

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button whilst using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling, select:

• Heating: √

• Cooling:

• Set the temperature control to the desired position.

• Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
• Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
• If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
• Press the AUTO button to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Mode selection (9)

OTM048330R

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

* 3rd row outlet vents (G, H) (if equipped)

• The air flow of 3rd row outlet vents (G) is controlled by the front climate control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor.
• The air flow of the 3rd row outlet vents (G) may be weaker than the instrument panel vents for the long air duct.
• The air flow of 3rd row side vents (H) is controlled by the 3rd row seat air conditioning button and knob.

Face-Level (B, D, E)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windscreen and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windscreen with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (7) (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windscreen with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the vent control lever. If you move the vent control lever to the left end, the outlet vents can be closed.

Temperature control (1, 2)

The temperature will increase by turning the knob to the right. The temperature will decrease by turning the knob to the left.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally

• Press the "SYNC" button (3) to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature equally.
  The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature control knob. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted equally.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually

Press the "SYNC" button again to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature individually. The button indicator will turn off.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

To change the temperature unit from °C to °F or °F to °C :

• Automatic climate control system Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds whilst pressing the OFF button.
• Instrument cluster Go to User Settings → Other features → Temperature unit.

The temperature unit on both the cluster LCD display and the climate control screen will change.

Air intake control (11)

This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i Information

Using the system in the fresh air position is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) can cause fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible whilst driving.

Fan speed control (8)

The fan speed can be set as desired by pushing the fan speed control button.

More air is delivered with higher fan speeds.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

NOTICE

Operating the fan when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the fan when the engine is running.

Air conditioning (6)

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OFF mode (5)

Push the OFF button to turn the climate control system off. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

3rd row air conditioning (if equipped)

A: Front, B: Rear left, [C]: Rear right

To turn on the 3rd row air conditioning control system

1. Press the 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button (12) located on the front climate control panel and set the fan speed to the desired speed with the 3rd row fan speed knob (13) (indicator light on the ON/OFF button will illuminate).

2. To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system, press the 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button once more located on the front climate control panel or set the fan speed to the OFF position with the 3rd row fan speed switch (indicator light on the ON/OFF button is not illuminated).

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

6. If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode to the position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
- To prevent interior fog on the wind-screen, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

i Information

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labelled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

NOTICE

- When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely whilst driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

- When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system every month for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

- If you operate the air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windscreen could cause the outer surface of the windscreen to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection button to the position and set the fan speed control knob to the lowest speed setting.

System maintenance Climate control air filter

A : Outside air, B : Recirculated air

[C]: Climate control air filter, [D]: Blower

[E] : Evaporator core, [F] : Heater core

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system.

We recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent climate control filter inspections and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend the system be checked at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also reduces the performance of the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system

should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the cor-

rect type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

We recommend the air conditioning system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label

Example
- Type A

ODH044365R

- Type B

ODH043366

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet.

Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING

Windscreen heating

Do not use the position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windscreen could cause the outer surface of the windscreen to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to lower speed.

• For maximum windscreen defrosting, set the temperature control knob to the highest temperature setting and the fan control knob to the highest fan speed. Select the front defrost button on the climate control display. After the engine warm-up period, warm air will be directed to the front windscreen.
• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windscreen, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windscreen.

i Information

If the engine temperature is still cold after starting, then a brief engine warm up period may be required for the vented air flow to become warm or hot.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select any fan speed except "0" position.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( )
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air conditioning (if equipped) will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Press the defroster button (###)
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning (if equipped) will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select the desired fan speed.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( )
4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( )
4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

Auto defogging system (only for automatic climate control system, if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windscreen by automatically sensing the moisture on inside the windscreen.

The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

i Information

The auto defogging system may not operate normally, when the outside temperature is below -10 °C.

To cancel or set the Auto Defogging System, keep the front defroster button pressed for 3 seconds. The "ADS OFF" symbol will be shown in the climate display to inform you that the system is deactivated. To re-activate the auto defogging system, follow the procedure mentioned above and the "ADS OFF" symbol will disappear.

If the battery has been disconnected or discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.

i Information

For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position whilst the Auto defogging system is operating.

NOTICE

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the top of the wind-screen glass.

Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Automatic ventilation (if equipped)

To increase cabin air quality and reduce windscreen misting, air recirculation mode switches off automatically after about 5 to 30 minutes, depending on outside temperature, and the air intake will change to outside (fresh) mode.

To cancel or set the automatic ventilation feature, select Face level mode

and whilst pressing toe air conditioning button (A/C), press the air recirculation mode button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

When the automatic ventilation is set, the air recirculation indicator will blink 6 times. When cancelled, the indicator will blink 3 times.

Sunroof inside air recirculation (if equipped)

When the heater or air conditioning system is on with the sunroof opened, the outside (fresh) air position will be automatically selected. At this time, if you press the recirculated air position button, the recirculated air position will be selected but will change back to the outside (fresh) air position after 3 minutes.

When the sunroof is closed, the air intake position will return to the original position that was selected.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely whilst driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Centre console storage

Interior view of a car seatbelt with blue directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

To open :

Pull the lever.

Glove box

The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key (1). To open:

Pull the lever (2).

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use.

An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

Cool box (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing a blue gear shift lever and a small inset image of the gear (no text or symbols visible)

OTM048435R OT

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with blue liquid and airflow direction indicator (no text or symbols)

You can keep beverage cans or other items cool in the glove box.

1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever (1) of the vent installed in the glove box to the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide the lever (1) to the closed position.

To open:

Press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

NOTICE

If some items in the cool box block the vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool box is reduced.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglasses holder is closed whilst driving.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglasses holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder whilst the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not attempt to force sunglasses into the sunglass holder. If the sunglasses become jammed and you try to open it forcibly, personal injury may occur.

Tray Luggage tray (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing a blue stripe on the side and an arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

Do not place the heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the tray. Such objects can be thrown from the tray in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

Top-down view of a car backseat showing internal compartments with blue arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Top-down view of a car showing internal compartments and a blue directional arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle (front tray), tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

Grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it.

INTERIOR FEATURES

Ashtray (if equipped)

3D rendered mechanical component with blue and gray parts, no visible text or symbols

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean the ashtray:

The plastic receptacle should be removed by lifting the plastic ashtray receptacle upward after turning the cover counterclockwise and pulling it out.

WARNING

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

Cup holder

Front

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with two internal compartments and directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with two blue-labeled buttons and a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the main components)

Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the armrest down to use the cup holders.

WARNING

• Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid whilst the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed whilst driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

Sunvisor

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor forward or rearward (4) as needed. Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets.

i Information

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

3-190

WARNING

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvisor.

NOTICE

Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180 W(Watt) with the engine running.

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180 W(Watt) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and cause system malfunction.

USB charger (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with front panel and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing rear control buttons and a close-up of a device with a blue circular icon (no text or symbols visible)

The USB charger is designed to recharge batteries of small size electrical devices using a USB cable.

The electrical devices can be recharged when the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC, ON or START position.

The battery charging state may be monitored on the electrical device.

Disconnect the USB cable from the USB port after use.

• A smart phone or a tablet PC may get warmer during the re-charging process. It does not indicate any malfunction with the charging system.
• A smart phone or a tablet PC, which adopts a different re-charging method, may not be properly re-charged. In this case, use an exclusive charger of your device.
• The charging terminal is only to recharge a device. Do not use the charging terminal either to turn ON an audio or to play media on the AVN.

AC inverter (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing a blue control panel with buttons and a magnified inset highlighting the function (no text or symbols on the main components)

The AC inverter supplies 220V/200W electric power to operate electric accessories or equipments.

i Information

• Rated voltage : AC 220V
• Maximum electric power : 200W
- In order to avoid an electrical system failure, electric shock, etc., be sure to read owner's manual before use.
- Be sure to close the cover except the time of use.

WARNING

To reduce a risk of serious or fatal injuries:

• Do not use a heated electric device such as a coffeepot, toaster, heater, iron, etc.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the outlet and do not touch the outlet as you may get shocked.
• Do not let children touch the AC inverter.

NOTICE

• To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the AC inverter whilst the engine is not running.
- When not using the AC inverter, make sure to close the AC inverter cover.
• After using an electric accessory or equipment, pull the plug out. Leaving the accessory or equipment plugged in for a long time may cause battery discharge.

• Do not use an electric accessory or equipment the power consumption of which is greater than 200W(220V).
• Some electric accessories or equipments can cause electronic interference. It may cause excessive audio noise and malfunctions in other electric systems or devices in the vehicle.
• Do not use broken electric accessories or equipments, which may damage the AC inverter and electrical systems of the vehicle.
• Do not use two or more electric accessories or equipments at the same time. It may cause damage to the electrical systems of the vehicle.
• When the input voltage is lower, outlet LED will blink and the AC inverter will turn off automatically. If the input voltage goes up to normal, the AC inverter will turn on again.

Wireless mobile phone charging system (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the left and right side of the dashboard with control buttons and gear shift (no readable text or symbols)

A: Indicator, B: Charging pad

There is a wireless mobile phone charger inside the front console.

The system is available when all doors are closed, and when the ignition switch is in the ACC/ON position.

To charge a mobile phone

The wireless mobile phone charging system charges only the Qi-enabled mobile phones (Q) Read the label on the mobile phone accessory cover or visit your mobile phone manufacturer's website to check whether your mobile phone supports the Qi technology.

The wireless charging process starts when you put a Qi-enabled mobile phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the smart key, from the wireless charging unit. If not, the wireless charging process may be interrupted. Place the mobile phone on the centre of charging pad.
2. The indicator light is orange when the mobile phone is charging. The indicator light turns green when phone charging is complete.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wireless charging function in the User Settings mode on the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in this chapter.

If your mobile phone is not charging:

• Slightly change the position of the mobile phone on the charging pad.
• Make sure the indicator light is orange.

The indicator light will blink orange for 10 seconds if there is a malfunction in the wireless charging system. In this case, temporarily stop the charging process, and re-attempt to wirelessly charge your mobile phone again.

The system warns you with a message on the LCD display if the mobile phone is still on the wireless charging unit after the engine is turned OFF and the front door is opened.

For certain mobile phone, the message may not be displayed.

(This is due to the characteristic of the certain mobile phone and the wireless mobile phone charging system is normal.)

NOTICE

• The wireless mobile phone charging system may not support certain mobile phones, which are not verified for the Qi specification (Qi)
• Locate your mobile phone in the middle of the wireless mobile phone charging system. Even when your mobile phone locates slightly to one side, the charging speed may decrease and the phone may heat when charging.
• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when a smart key function operates (i.e. starting the engine, opening the doors, closing the doors).

• For certain mobile phone, the indicator colour may not change to green, even when the wireless charging process is properly completed.

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when temperature abnormally increases inside the wireless mobile phone charging system. The wireless charging process restarts, when temperature falls to a certain level.

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop when there is any metallic item, such as a coin, between the wireless mobile phone charging system and a mobile phone.
• For certain mobile phones with their own protection, the wireless charging speed may decrease and the wireless charging may stop.
• If the mobile phone has a thick cover, the wireless charging may not be possible.
• If the mobile phone is not fully in contact with the wireless charging pad, the wireless charging may not be possible.
• Some magnetic items (credit cards, phone cards, passbook and tickets) may be damaged whilst using the wireless charging process.

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock whilst driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

Vehicles with Audio system

Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button on the audio system → Select [Date/Time].

• Set time: Set the time displayed on the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12-hour and 24-hour time formats.

Vehicles with Navigation system

Select the Settings menu on the Navigation system Select [Date/Time].

• GPS time: Displays time according to the received GNSS time.

• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24 hour.

For more details, please refer to the separate manual that was supplied with your vehicle.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

Close-up of a car door handle with a small icon and arrow pointing to the interior area (no text or symbols on the main subject)

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

WARNING

Close-up of a car door handle with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothes pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends that the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Luggage net (holder)

Top-down view of a car backrest with visible structural grid and seat compartments (no text or symbols)

Top-down view of a car showing the backrest area with blue textured floor and gray seats (no visible text or symbols)

To keep items from shifting in the luggage compartment, you can use the four holders located in the luggage compartment, to attach the luggage net.

If necessary, we recommend that you contact your a HYUNDAI authorised repairer to obtain a luggage net.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

To avoid eye injury, DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net's recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

Cargo security screen (if equipped)

Top-down view of a car showing the rear trunk, rear seats, and internal canopy cover (no text or symbols visible)

Use the cargo security screen to hide items stored in the cargo area.

To use the cargo security screen

1. Pull the cargo security screen towards the rear of the vehicle by the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin (2) into the guide (3).

i Information

Pull out the cargo security screen with the handle in the centre to prevent the guide pin from falling out of the guide.

When the cargo security screen is not in use:

1. Pull the cargo security screen backward and up to release it from the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will automatically slide back in.

i Information

The cargo security screen may not automatically slide back in if the cargo security screen is not fully pulled out. Fully pull it out and then let go.

To remove the cargo security screen

1. Push in the guide pin.
2. Whilst pushing the guide pin, pull out the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the cargo security screen in the tray.

To remove the cargo security screen from the luggage tray

1. Pull up the screen board.
2. Push in the guide pin.
3. Whilst pushing the guide pin, pull out the cargo security screen.

WARNING

• Do not place objects on the cargo security screen. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as forward as possible.

NOTICE

Since the cargo security screen may be damaged or malformed, do not put luggage on it when it is used.

Side curtain (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

To use the side curtain:

1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of the hook.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

Roof rack (if equipped)

Exterior view of a silver SUV with two black arrows pointing to the roof section (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load cargo on top of your vehicle.

NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof rack in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

NOTICE

• When carrying cargo on the roof rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on the roof rack, make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width.

WARNING

- The following specification is the maximum weight that can be loaded onto the roof rack. Distribute the load as evenly as possible onto the roof rack and secure the load firmly.

ROOF	100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK	EVENLY	DISTRIBUTED

Loading cargo or luggage in excess of the specified weight limit on the roof rack may damage your vehicle.

• The vehicle centre of gravity will be higher when items are loaded onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden starts, braking, sharp turns, abrupt manoeuvres or high speeds that may result in loss of vehicle control or rollover resulting in an accident.
  • Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack. Severe wind updrafts, caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden upward pressure on items loaded on the roof rack. This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off the roof rack and cause damage to your vehicle or others around you.
  • To prevent damage or loss of cargo whilst driving, check frequently before or whilst driving to make sure the items on the roof rack are securely fastened.

Multimedia System

Multimedia system....4-2

AUX, USB and iPod® port 4-2

Antenna 4-2

Steering wheel audio controls 4-3

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free .....4-4

Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVΠ) ......4-4

How vehicle radio works....4-5

Audio (Without Touch Screen) 4-8

Radio....4-15

Media player 4-17

Bluetooth....4-24

Setup 4-33

System status icons....4-35

Audio system specifications....4-36

Trademarks 4-37

Declaration of Conformity....4-38

CE RED for EU 4-38

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

i Information

• If you install an aftermarket HID headlamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discolouration.

AUX, USB and iPod® port

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and touchscreen display (no readable text or symbols)

You can use an AUX port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and an iPod® port.

i Information

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Antenna

Roof antenna

Side view of a car's front window with a black arrow pointing to the top section (no visible text or symbols)

The roof antenna receives both AM and FM broadcast signals.

Rotate the roof antenna in a counterclockwise direction to remove it.

Rotate it in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.

NOTICE

• Do not clean the inside of the rear window glass with a cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These can degrade the received AM and FM broadcast signals.

Shark fin antenna

Side view of a car's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to the top edge (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

The shark fin antenna receives transmitted data. (for example: AM/FM, DAB, GPS)

Steering wheel audio controls (if equipped)

The steering wheel audio control switches are installed for your convenience.

NOTICE

Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Move the VOLUME toggle switch up to increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME toggle switch down to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET (/A) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch is moved up or down and held for 0.8 seconds or more, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select switch. It will SEEK until you release the switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW switch. If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch is moved up or down, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION UP/DOWN switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN switch.

MODE (1)(3)

Press the MODE button to select Radio or AUX.

MUTE (4)

• Press the button to mute the sound.
• Press the button again to activate the sound.

i Information

Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in the following pages in this chapter.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

You can use the phone wirelessly by using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone

- Audio : For detailed information, refer to "AUDIO" in this chapter.

- AVN: Detailed information for the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the manual supplied separately.

Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) (if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN system is described in a separately supplied manual.

How vehicle radio works FM reception

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM (MW, LW) reception

OJF045309L

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere.

In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Airport"]
    C["Road"] --> B
    D["Building"] --> B
    E["Truckhouse"] --> B
    F["Bus"] --> B
    B --> G["Transportation Station"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio.

The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble :

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

Using a mobile phone or a two-way radio

When a mobile phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the mobile phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

NOTICE

When using a communication system such as a mobile phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a mobile phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a mobile phone whilst driving. Stop at a safe location to use a mobile phone.

iPod®

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth ^® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phone is

required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Bluetooth®

AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)

System layout – control panel

(With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)

(1) SEEK/TRACK button

• Change the station/track/file (except for the AUX mode).
• Whilst listening to the radio, press and hold to search for a station.
• Whilst playing media, press and hold to rewind or fast forward (except for the AUX and Bluetooth audio modes).

(2) RADIO button

- Press to turn on the radio. Whilst listening to the radio, press to change the radio mode.

(3) MEDIA button

• Press to play content from a media storage device. Press repeatedly to switch modes between USB (iPod), Bluetooth audio, and AUX.
• If you have multiple media storage devices, select one from the media selection window.

(4) PHONE button

• Press to start connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth.
  • After a Bluetooth phone connection is made, press to access the Bluetooth phone menu.

(5) POWER button/VOL knob

• Press to turn the system on or off.
• Turn to the left or right to adjust the system sound volume.

(6) Reset button

* The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)

(7) PRESET button

- Whilst listening to the radio, press to move to previous or next page of the preset list.

(8) SETUP button/CLOCK button

- Press to access the setup screen. - Press and hold to access the time setup screen.

(9) MENU button

- Press to access the menu screen for the current mode.

(10) BACK button

- Press to return to the previous screen.

(11) Number buttons (1–6)

• Whilst listening to the radio, press to listen to a saved radio station.
• Whilst listening to the radio, press and hold to save the current radio station to the preset.
• Press the corresponding number button to select an item.

(12) TUNE knob/FILE knob/ENTER button

• Whilst listening to the radio, turn to adjust the frequency.
• Whilst playing media, turn to search for a track/file (except for the AUX and Bluetooth audio modes).
• During a search, press to select the current track/file.

System layout – steering wheel remote control (Bluetooth® equipped model)

* The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) MUTE button

• Press to mute or unmute the system.
• During a call, press to mute or unmute the microphone.

(2) MODE button

• Press to switch between radio and media modes.
• Press and hold to turn the system on or off. (if equipped)

(3) Volume lever

- Push up or down to adjust the volume.

(4) Up/Down lever

• Change the station/track/file (except for the AUX mode).
• Whilst listening to the radio, push to listen to the previous/next saved radio station.
• Whilst listening to the radio, push and hold to search for a station.
• Whilst playing media, push and hold to rewind or fast forward (except for the AUX and Bluetooth audio modes).

(5) Call/Answer button

• Press to start connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth.
  • After a Bluetooth phone connection is made, access the Bluetooth phone screen. Press and hold to dial the most recent phone number. When a call comes in, press to answer the call.
• During a call, press to switch between the active call and the held call. Press and hold to switch the call between the system and the mobile phone.

(6) Call end button

WARNING

- About driving

- Do not operate the system whilst driving. Driving whilst distracted may result in a loss of vehicle control, potentially leading to an accident, severe personal injury, or death. The driver's primary responsibility is the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and any handheld devices, equipment, or vehicle systems which divert the driver's attention from this responsibility should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

• Avoid watching the screen whilst driving. Driving whilst distracted may lead to a traffic accident. Stop your vehicle in a safe location before using functions that require multiple operations.
• Stop your vehicle first before using your mobile phone. Using a mobile phone whilst driving may lead to a traffic accident. If necessary, use the Bluetooth Handsfree feature to make calls and keep the call as short as possible.
• Keep the volume low enough to hear external sounds. Driving without the ability to hear external sounds may lead to a traffic accident. Listening to a loud volume for a long time may cause hearing damage.

WARNING

- About handling the system

• Do not disassemble or modify the system. Doing so may result in an accident, fire, or electric shock.
• Do not allow liquids or foreign substances to enter the system. Liquids or foreign substances may cause noxious fumes, a fire, or a system malfunction.
• Stop using the system if it malfunctions, such as no audio output or display. If you continue using the system when it is malfunctioning, it may lead to a fire, electric shock, or system failure.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightning because such an act may cause electric shock.

i Information

- About operating the system

• Use the system with the engine running. Using the system for a long time when the engine is stopped may discharge the battery.
• Do not install unapproved products. Using unapproved products may cause an error whilst using the system. System errors caused by installing unapproved products are not covered under the warranty.

i Information

- About handling the system

• Do not apply excessive force to the system. Excessive pressure on the screen may damage the LCD panel or the touch panel.
• When cleaning the screen or button panel, make sure to stop the engine and use a soft, dry cloth. Wiping the screen or buttons with a rough cloth or using solvents (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) may scratch or chemically damage the surface.
• If you attach a liquid-type air freshener to the fan louvre, the surface of the louvre may become deformed due to the flowing air.
• If you want to change the position of the installed device, please inquire with your place of purchase or service maintenance centre. Technical expertise is required to install or disassemble the device.

NOTICE

• If you experience any problems with the system, contact your place of purchase or dealer.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

Turning the system on or off

To turn on the system, start the engine.

- If you do not want to use the system whilst driving, you can turn off the system by pressing the [POWER] button on the control panel. To use the system again, press the [POWER] button again.

The system turns off when you stop the engine (ACC Off).

- When you turn back on the system, the previous mode and settings will remain intact.

WARNING

• Some functions may be disabled for safety reasons whilst the vehicle is moving. They work only when the vehicle stops. Park your vehicle in a safe location before using any of them.
• Stop using the system if it malfunctions, such as no audio output or display. If you continue using the system when it is malfunctioning, it may lead to a fire, electric shock, or system failure.

i Information

You can turn on the system when the key ignition switch is placed in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Using the system for an extended period without the engine running drains the battery. If you plan on using the system for a long time, start the engine.

Turning the display on or off

To prevent glare, you can turn off the screen. The screen can be turned off only whilst the system is on.

1. On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button.
2. On the control panel, press the [6] button to select Display Off.
   • To turn the screen back on, press any of the control panel buttons.

Getting to know the basic operations

You can select an item or adjust the settings by using the number buttons and the [TUNE] knob on the control panel.

Selecting an item

Numbered items

Press the corresponding number button.

Close-up of a hand pressing a button on a digital device (no visible text or symbols)

Numberless items

Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired item, and then press the knob.

Hand pressing a button on a device control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Adjusting the settings

Turn the [TUNE] knob to adjust the value, and then press the knob to save changes.

Turn the [TUNE] knob to the right to increase the value and turn the [TUNE] knob to the left to decrease the value.

RADIO

Turning on the radio

On the control panel, press the [RADIO] button.

FM/AM Mode

(1) Current radio mode
(2) Radio station information
(3) Preset list

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• List: Display all available radio stations.
• Scan: The system searches for radio stations with strong radio signals and plays each option for about five seconds.
• Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

FM/AM Mode (With RDS)

(1) Current radio mode
(2) Radio station information
(3) Preset list

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• List: Display all available radio stations.
• Traffic Announcement (TA) (if equipped): Activate or deactivate traffic announcements. Announcements and programmes will be received automatically if available.
• Scan: The system searches for radio stations with strong radio signals and plays each option for about five seconds

- Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

DAB/FM Mode (With DAB)

(1) Current radio mode
(2) Radio station information
(3) Preset list

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• List: Display all available radio stations.
• Traffic Announcement (TA): Activate or deactivate traffic announcements. Announcements and programmes will be received automatically if available.

• Region: Enable or disable automatic switching between regional stations.

• Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

• Scan: The system searches for radio stations with strong radio signals and plays each option for about five seconds.
• Manual tune FM: Tune the radio frequency manually.

Changing the radio mode

Alternatively, press the [RADIO] button on the control panel or the [MODE] button on the steering wheel. Each time you press the button, the radio mode switches.

Scanning for available radio stations

You can listen to each radio station for a few seconds to test the reception and select the one you want.

1. From the radio screen, press the [MENU] button on the control panel.
2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select Scan, and then press the knob.

- The system searches for radio stations with strong radio signals and plays each option for about 5 seconds.

1. When you find the radio station you want to listen to, press the [TUNE] knob.
2. You can continue listening to the selected station.

Searching for radio stations

To search for the previous or next available radio station, press the [√ SEEK ^] button on the control panel.

- You can also press and hold the [√SEEK^] button to search for frequencies quickly. When you release the button, a radio station with a strong signal is selected automatically.

If you know the exact frequency of the radio station you want to listen to, turn the [TUNE] knob on the control panel to change the frequency.

Saving radio stations

You can save your favourite radio stations and listen to them by selecting them from the preset list.

Whilst listening to the radio, press the number button for an empty pre-set slot on the radio screen.

- The radio station you are listening to will be added to the selected number.

NOTICE

• You can save up to 36 radio stations.
• If the preset list is full, you can replace one of your favourite stations with the station you are listening to. On the control panel, press and hold the desired number button.

Listening to saved radio stations

1. Confirm the preset number for the radio station you want to listen to.
2. On the control panel, press the desired number button.
   • Alternatively, push the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel to change the station.

MEDIA PLAYER

Using the media player

You can play music stored in various media storage devices, such as USB storage devices, smartphones, and iPods.

1. Connect a device to the USB port or the AUX port in your vehicle.
2. Playback may start immediately depending on the device that you connect to the system.
3. On the control panel, press the [MEDIA] button.
4. If you have multiple media storage devices, Press the [MEDIA] button again and press the corresponding number button to select the desired mode.

NOTICE

• When you connect an Apple device, playback does not start automatically. To start the media player in the iPod mode, press the [MEDIA] button on the control panel.

• You can also change the mode by press the [MODE] button repeatedly on the steering wheel.

• Make sure to connect or disconnect external USB devices with the system power turned off.

• Depending on vehicle models and specifications, available buttons or the appearance and layout of the USB/AUX ports in your vehicle may vary.
• Do not connect a smartphone or an MP3 device to the system via multiple methods such as USB, Bluetooth, and AUX, simultaneously. Doing so may cause a distorted noise or a system malfunction.
• When the equaliser function of the connected device and Equaliser (Tone) settings of the system are both activated, the effects may interfere with each other and may lead to sound degradation or distortion. Deactivate the device's equaliser function if possible.
• Noise may occur when an Apple device or AUX device is connected. When such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage.

- When the Apple device or AUX device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may result in noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.

Using the USB mode

You can play media files stored in portable devices, such as USB storage devices and MP3 players. Check compatible USB storage devices and file specifications before using the USB mode.

Connect your USB device to the USB port in the vehicle.

- Playback starts immediately.

- If a USB device is already connected to the system, press the [MEDIA] button rand press the [1] button to select USB from the media selection window.

(1) Repeat play mode
(2) Current file number and total number of files
(3) Information about the song currently playing
(4) Playback time and playback position

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• Information: Display information about the song currently playing.
- Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

Rewinding/Fast forwarding

On the control panel, press and hold the [√ TRACK ∧] button.

- You can also push and hold the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel.

Restarting the current playback

On the control panel, press the [v TRACK] button.

- You can also push the Down lever on the steering wheel.

Playing the previous or next song

To play the previous song, press the [√ TRACK] button twice on the control panel. To play the next song, press the [TRACK ^] button on the control panel.

- You can also use the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel.

NOTICE

• On the control panel, turn the [FILE] knob to find the desired song and press the knob within five seconds to play the file.
• If no control is detected within five seconds, the search is cancelled and the screen displays information about the song currently playing.

Playing repeatedly

On the control panel, press the [1] button. Each time you press the button, the repeat play mode switches between repeating all ▶repeating song ▶not repeating. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

Playing in random order

On the control panel, press the [2] button. Each time you press the button, the shuffle play mode switches between shuffle folder ▶ shuffle all ▶shuffle off. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

Searching for music files on a file list

1. On the control panel, press the [3] button to select List.
2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired category and file, and then press the knob to play the music file.

i Information

• Start the engine of your vehicle before connecting a USB device to your system. Starting the engine with a USB device connected to the system may damage the USB device.
• Be careful of static electricity when connecting or disconnecting a USB device. A static discharge may cause a system malfunction.
• Be careful not to let your body or external objects contact the USB port. Doing so may cause an accident or a system malfunction.
• Do not connect and disconnect a USB connector repeatedly in a short time. Doing so may cause an error in the device or a system malfunction.
• Do not use a USB device for purposes other than playing files. Using USB accessories for charging or heating may cause poor performance or a system malfunction.

NOTICE

• When connecting a USB storage device, do not use an extension cable. Connect it directly to the USB port. If you use a USB hub or an extension cable, the device may not be recognised.
• Fully insert a USB connector into the USB port. Failure to do so may cause a communication error.
• When you disconnect a USB storage device, a distorted noise may occur.
• The system can play only files encoded in a standard format.
• The following types of USB devices may not be recognised or work correctly:
• Encrypted MP3 players
• USB devices not recognised as removable disks

• A USB device may not be recognised depending on its condition.

• Some USB devices may be incompatible with your system.

• Depending on the USB device's type, capacity, or the format of files, USB recognition time may be longer.
• Depending on the specification, some USB devices may not support charging via a USB connection.
• Image and video playback are not supported.

Using the iPod mode

You can listen to music stored on your Apple devices, such as an iPod or an iPhone.

1. Connect your Apple device to the USB port in your vehicle using the cable supplied with the Apple device.

- When connected, the device will begin charging. Music playback will not start automatically.

1. On the control panel, press the [MEDIA] button.

- If multiple devices are connected to the system, press the [MEDIA] button and press the [1] button to select iPod from the media selection window.

(1) Repeat play mode
(2) Current file number and total number of files
(3) Information about the song currently playing
(4) Playback time and playback position

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• Information: Display information about the song currently playing.
- Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

Rewinding/Fast forwarding

On the control panel, press and hold the [v TRACK ∧] button.

- You can also push and hold the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel.

Restarting the current playback

On the control panel, press the [v TRACK] button.

- You can also push the Down lever on the steering wheel.

Playing the previous or next song

To play the previous song, press the [√TRACK] button twice on the control panel. To play the next song, press the [TRACK^] button on the control panel.

- You can also use the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel.

NOTICE

• On the control panel, turn the [FILE] knob to find the desired song and press the knob within five seconds to play the file.
• If no control is detected within five seconds, the search is cancelled and the screen displays information about the song currently playing.

Playing repeatedly

On the control panel, press the [1] button. Each time you press the button, the repeat play mode switches between repeating category ▶ repeating song. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

Playing in random order

On the control panel, press the [2] button. Each time you press the button, the shuffle play mode switches between shuffle category ▶shuffle off. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

Searching for music files on a file list

1. On the control panel, press the [3] button to select List.
2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired category and file, and then press the knob to play the music file.

i Information

• Be sure to start the engine before you connect devices to the system. The device may be damaged if the engine is started whilst the device connected.
• Do not connect and disconnect a USB connector repeatedly in a short time. Doing so may cause an error in the device or a system malfunction.

Notes on connecting Apple devices

• Ensure that the iOS and firmware of your device is up-to-date before connecting it to your system. Outdated devices may cause a system error.
• If your device's battery is low, the device may not be recognised. Check the battery level and, if necessary, charge the battery before connecting the device to your system.
• Use an Apple-approved cable. Using an unapproved cable may cause a distorted noise or an error during playback.
• Use a cable shorter than 1 metre in length, such as the one originally supplied with a new Apple device. Longer cables may lead to the audio system not recognising the Apple device.

• Fully insert a USB connector into the USB port. Failure to do so may cause a communication error.

• When your device is connected to the USB port and the AUX port simultaneously, it is recognised in the AUX mode. The device stays in the AUX mode even if the AUX cable is not connected to the system. To play music in iPod mode, disconnect the AUX cable from the device or change audio output of the device to "Dock."

• If you connect your device to the system whilst playback is in progress on the device, you may hear a high pitch sound just after the connection. Connect the device after stopping or pausing playback.
• Connecting your device during a download or synchronizing with iTunes may cause an error. Connect the device after the download or synchronization is complete.
• If you connect an iPod nano (except for the 6th generation) or an iPod classic, the brand logo will be displayed on the device screen. For an iPhone and an iPod touch, the logo will not be displayed.

Notes on playing Apple devices

• Depending on the model, your device may not be recognised due to unsupported communication protocols.
• The order of the songs displayed or played on the system may differ from the order of the songs stored in your device.
• Depending on the music player application you are using, information displayed on the system may differ.
• In an iPhone, the audio streaming function and iPod mode control may conflict. If an error occurs, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
• When using an iPhone or an iPod touch, do not control the device whilst it is connected to your system. An error may occur.

• If you make or receive a call during playback via an iPhone, the music may remain paused after you end the call. If you do not hear the music after ending a call, check the device to see if the music is paused.

• Do not duplicate a song in multiple folders. One song saved in multiple folders may cause an error with search and playback functions.

• If you perform a media control function, such as stop or repeat, just before a song ends, the song information displayed on the screen may not match the song currently playing. This is not a system error. Restart the iPod mode on the system or pause and resume playback on your device.
• Skipping or improper operations may occur depending on the characteristics of your Apple device.
• If the Apple device malfunctions due to an Apple device defect, reset the Apple device and try again. (To learn more, refer to your Apple device manual.)

Using the AUX mode

You can listen to audio from your vehicle's speakers by connecting external devices, such as smartphones and MP3 players.

Connect an external device to the AUX port in your vehicle using an AUX cable.

• The AUX mode starts automatically and the sound is heard via your vehicle's speakers.
• If an external device is already connected to the system, press the [MEDIA] button and press the [3] button to select AUX from the media selection window.

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

- Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

NOTICE

• Because the system works as an output device of the connected external device in the AUX mode, you cannot use controls other than the volume control. Use controls on the external device to control playback.
• The sound volume for the AUX mode is adjusted separately from the other modes.
• Depending on the device type, using an external device with the power cable plugged into the power jack may cause a distorted noise.
• If the AUX cable is plugged into the system without an external device, a distorted noise may occur. Remove the AUX cable from the AUX port when an external device is not connected.

BLUETOOTH

Connecting Bluetooth devices

Bluetooth is a short-range wireless networking technology. Via Bluetooth, you can connect nearby mobile devices wirelessly to send and receive data between connected devices. This enables you to use your devices effectively.

To use Bluetooth, you must first connect a Bluetooth-enabled device to your system, such as a mobile phone or an MP3 player. Ensure that the device you want to connect supports Bluetooth.

WARNING

Park your vehicle in a safe location before connecting Bluetooth devices. Distracted driving can cause a traffic accident and lead to personal injury or death.

NOTICE

• On your system, you can use only Bluetooth Handsfree and Audio features. Connect a mobile device that supports both features.
• Some Bluetooth devices may cause malfunctions to the audio system or make interference noises. In this case, storing the device in a different location may resolve the problem.
• Depending on the connected Bluetooth device or mobile phone, some functions may not be supported.
• If the system is not stable due to a vehicle-Bluetooth device communication error, delete the paired devices and connect the Bluetooth devices again.

• If Bluetooth connection is not stable, follow these steps to try again.

• Deactivate Bluetooth and reactivate it on the device. Then, reconnect the device.

• Turn the device off and on. Then, reconnect it.

• Remove the battery from the device and reinstall it. Then, turn the device on and reconnect it.

• Unregister the Bluetooth pairing on both the system and the device and then re-register and connect them.

Pairing devices with your sys-tem

For Bluetooth connections, first pair your device with your system to add it to the system's list of Bluetooth devices. You can register up to five devices.

1. From the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button, and then select Bluetooth ▶ Connections.

2. If you are pairing a device with your system for the first time, you can also press the [PHONE] button on the control panel or the Call/Answer button on the steering wheel.

3. On the Bluetooth device you want to connect, activate Bluetooth, search for your vehicle's system, and then select it.
4. Check the system's Bluetooth name, which is displayed in the new registration pop-up window on the system screen.

1. Enter or confirm the passkey to confirm the connection.

- If the passkey input screen is displayed on the Bluetooth device screen, enter the passkey '0000' which is displayed on the system screen.

• If the 6-digit passkey is displayed on the Bluetooth device screen, ensure that the Bluetooth passkey displayed on the Bluetooth device is the same as the passkey on the system screen and confirm the connection from the device.
• Choose whether or not to connect the Bluetooth device to your system prior to other devices.
• If you grant priority to the Bluetooth device, it will be connected automatically to the system when you turn on the system.

NOTICE

• The screen image in this manual is an example. Check your system screen for the exact vehicle name and Bluetooth device name.
  • The default passkey is '0000'.

• It may take a whilst for the system to connect with the device after you permit the system to access the device. When a connection is made, the Bluetooth status icon appears at the top of the screen.

• You can change the permission settings via the mobile phone's Bluetooth settings menu. For more information, refer to your mobile phone's user guide.
  • To register a new device, repeat steps 1 to 4.

• When a device is connected to the system via Bluetooth, you cannot pair another device.
• If you use the automatic Bluetooth connection function, a call may be switched to the vehicle's Handsfree when you are taking on the phone near the vehicle whilst the vehicle's engine is on. If you do not want the system to connect with the device automatically, deactivate Bluetooth on your device.
• When a device is connected to the system via Bluetooth, the device's battery may discharge faster.

Connecting a paired device

To use a Bluetooth device on your system, connect the paired device to the system. Your system can connect with only one device at a time.

1. From the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button, and then select Bluetooth ▶ Connections.
2. If there is no connected device, press the [PHONE] button on the control panel or the Call/Answer button on the steering wheel.
3. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the device to connect, and then press the knob.
4. If another device is already connected to your system, disconnect it. Select the connected device to disconnect.
5. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select Connect, and then press the knob.

NOTICE

• If a connection ends because a device is out of the connection range or a device error occurs, the connection will be restored automatically when the device enters the connection range or when the error is cleared.
• The Bluetooth connection is unavailable when the device's Bluetooth function is turned off. Be sure to turn on the device's Bluetooth function.
• Depending on auto connection priority, connection to a device may take time.

Disconnecting a device

If you want to stop using a Bluetooth device or connect another device, disconnect your currently connected device.

1. From the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button, and then select Bluetooth ▶ Connections.

2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the device to disconnect, and then press the knob.

3. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select Disconnect, and then press the knob.

Deleting paired devices

If you no longer want a Bluetooth device paired or if you want to connect a new device when the Bluetooth device list is full, delete paired devices.

1. From the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button, and then select Bluetooth ▶ Connections.
2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the device to delete, and then press the knob.
3. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select Delete, and then press the knob.

NOTICE

• When you delete a paired device, the Call history and Contacts stored in the system are also deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

Using a Bluetooth audio device

You can listen to music stored in the connected Bluetooth audio device via your vehicle's speakers.

On the control panel, press the [MEDIA] button.

- If you have multiple media storage devices, press the [MEDIA] button and press the [2] button to select BT Audio from the media selection window.

(1) Repeat play mode
(2) Information about the song currently playing

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• Connections: Set up the Bluetooth connection.
• Sound Settings: Customise the system sound settings.

Pausing/Resuming playback

To pause playback, press the [3] button on the control panel. To resume playback, press the [3] button again.

Restarting the current playback

On the control panel, press the [v TRACK] button.

- You can also push the Down lever on the steering wheel.

Playing the previous or next song

To play the previous song, press the [√ TRACK] button twice on the control panel. To play the next song, press the [TRACK ∧] button on the control panel.

- You can also use the Up/Down lever on the steering wheel.

NOTICE

Depending on the connected Bluetooth device or mobile phone, playing the previous/next song may not be supported.

Playing repeatedly

On the control panel, press the [1] button. Each time you press the button, the repeat play mode switches between repeating all ▶repeating song ▶repeating category ▶not repeating. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

Playing in random order

On the control panel, press the [2] button. Each time you press the button, the shuffle play mode switches between shuffle all ▶shuffle category ▶shuffle off. The corresponding mode icon will be displayed on the screen.

NOTICE

• Depending on the connected Bluetooth device, mobile phone, or the music player you are using, playback controls may differ.
• Depending on the music player you are using, streaming may not be supported.
• Depending on the connected Bluetooth device or mobile phone, some functions may not be supported.
• If you connect a Bluetooth device or mobile phone to your system via USB and Bluetooth simultaneously the Bluetooth mode is deactivated and music plays in the USB or iPod mode. To listen to music streamed via Bluetooth, remove the USB device.

• If a Bluetooth enabled phone is being used to play music and it receives or makes a phone call, the music will stop.

• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call whilst playing Bluetooth audio may result in audio interference.

• If you use the Bluetooth phone mode whilst using Bluetooth audio, playback may not automatically resume after you end the call depending on the connected mobile phone.
• Moving the track up/down whilst playing Bluetooth audio mode may result in pop noises with some mobile phones.
• The Rewinding/Fast forwarding function is not supported in the Bluetooth audio mode.
• The playlist feature is not supported in the Bluetooth audio mode.
• If the Bluetooth device is disconnected, Bluetooth audio mode will end.

Using a Bluetooth phone

You can use Bluetooth to talk on the phone hands free. View call information on the system screen, and make or receive calls safely and conveniently via the vehicle's built-in microphone and speakers.

WARNING

• Park your vehicle in a safe location before connecting Bluetooth devices. Distracted driving can cause a traffic accident and lead to personal injury or death.
• Never dial a phone number or pick up your mobile phone whilst driving. Use of a mobile phone may distract your attention, making it difficult to recognise external conditions and reducing the ability to cope with unexpected situations, which may lead to an accident. If necessary, use the Bluetooth Handsfree feature to make calls and keep the call as short as possible.

NOTICE

• You cannot access the Phone screen if there is no connected mobile phone. To use the Bluetooth phone function, connect a mobile phone to the system.
• The Bluetooth Handsfree function may not work when you are passing out of the mobile service coverage area, such as when you are in a tunnel, underground, or in a mountainous area.
• Call quality may be degraded in the following environments:
• The reception of the mobile phone is poor
• The inside of the vehicle is noisy
• The mobile phone is placed near metallic objects, such as a beverage can.
• Depending on the connected mobile phone, the volume and sound quality of the Bluetooth Handsfree may vary.

Making a call

If your mobile phone is connected to the system, you can make a call by selecting a name from your call history or contacts list.

1. On the control panel, press the [PHONE] button.
   • Alternatively, press the Call/Answer button on the steering wheel.
2. If you have multiple paired mobile devices, select a mobile phone from your list of paired devices.

1. Select a phone number.
   • To select a phone number from your favourites list, select Favourites.

2. To select a phone number from your call history, select Call history.
   • To select a phone number from your contacts list that downloaded from the connected mobile phone, select Contacts.

3. To end the call, press the [2] button on the control panel to select End.

• Alternatively, press the Call end button on the steering wheel.

Using the favourites list

1 From the Phone screen, press the [1] button to select Favourites.

1. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired contact, and then press the knob to make a phone call.

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

- Delete: Delete favourites items.

NOTICE

• You can register up to 20 favourites for each device.
• You must first download the contacts to the system to register favourites.
• The favourites list saved on the mobile phone is not downloaded to the system.
• Even if the contact information on the mobile phone is edited, the favourites on the system are not automatically edited. Delete and add the item to favourites again.
• When you connect a new mobile phone, your favourites set for the previous mobile phone will not be displayed, but they will remain in your system until you delete the previous phone from the device list.

Using your call history

1. From the Phone screen, press the [2] button to select Call history.
2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired entry, and then press the knob to make a phone call.

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

• All calls: View all call records.
• Missed calls: View only missed calls.
• Dialled calls: View only dialled calls.
• Received calls: View only received calls.
• Download: Download your call history.

NOTICE

• Some mobile phones may not support the download function.
• The call history is accessed only when the mobile phone is connected to the system.
• Calls from restricted IDs are not saved on the call history list.
• Up to 50 call records will be downloaded per individual list.
• Call duration and time information will not be displayed on the system screen.
• Permission is required to download your call history from the mobile phone. When you attempt to download data, you may need to permit the download on the mobile phone. If the download fails, check the mobile phone screen for any notification or the mobile phone's permission setting.
• When you download your call history, any old data will be deleted.

Using the contacts list

1. From the Phone screen, press the [3] button to select Contacts.

2. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired group of alphanumeric characters, and then press the knob.

3. Turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired contact, and then press the knob to make a phone call.

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

- Download: Download your mobile phone contacts.

NOTICE

• Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected Bluetooth device.

• Contacts can be viewed only when the Bluetooth device is connected.

• Only contacts in the supported format can be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth device. Contacts from some applications will not be included.

• Up to 2,000 contacts can be downloaded from your device.
• Some mobile phones may not support the download function.
• Depending on the system's specifications, some of the downloaded contacts may be lost.
• Contacts stored both in the phone and in the SIM card are downloaded. With some mobile phones, contacts in the SIM card may not be downloaded.
• Special characters and figures used in the contact name may not be displayed properly.

• Permission is required to download contacts from the mobile phone. When you attempt to download data, you may need to permit the download on the mobile phone. If the download fails, check the mobile phone screen for any notification or the mobile phone's permission setting.

• Depending on the mobile phone type or status, downloading may take longer.

• When you download your contacts, any old data will be deleted.
• You cannot edit or delete your contacts on the system.
• When you connect a new mobile phone, your contacts downloaded from the previous mobile phone will not be displayed, but they will remain in your system until you delete the previous phone from the device list.

Answering calls

When a call comes in, a notification pop-up window of the incoming call appears on the system screen.

To answer the call, press the [1] button on the control panel to select Accept.

• Alternatively, press the Call/Answer button on the steering wheel.
  To reject the call, press the [2] button on the control panel to select Reject.
  • Alternatively, press the Call end button on the steering wheel.

NOTICE

• Depending on the mobile phone type, call rejection may not be supported.
• Once your mobile phone is connected to the system, the call sound may be output through the vehicle's speakers even after you exit the vehicle if the phone is within the connection range. To end the connection, disconnect the device from the system or deactivate Bluetooth on the device.

Using options during a call

During a call, you will see the call screen shown below. Press a button to perform the function you want.

To switch the call to your mobile phone, press the [1] button on the control panel to select Private.

• Alternatively, press and hold the Call/Answer button on the steering wheel.
  To end the call, press the [2] button on the control panel to select End.
• Alternatively, press the Call end button on the steering wheel.

Press the [MENU] button on the control panel to access the following menu options:

- Microphone Volume (Outgoing Volume): Adjust the microphone volume or turn off the microphone so the other party cannot hear you.

NOTICE

• If the caller information is saved in your contacts list, the caller's name and phone number will be displayed. If the caller information is not saved in your contacts list, only the caller's phone number will be displayed.
• You cannot switch to any other screen, such as the audio screen or the settings screen, during a Bluetooth call.
• Depending on the mobile phone type, call quality may vary. On some phones, your voice may be less audible to the other party.
• Depending on the mobile phone type, the phone number may not be displayed.
• Depending on the mobile phone type, the call switching function may not be supported.

SETUP

Display

You can change the settings related to the system display.

On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] ▶ [1] buttons to select Display.

• Dimming mode (Mode): Set the screen brightness to be adjusted automatically according to the headlight use or set the screen to stay bright or dark continuously.
• Brightness (Illumination): Adjust the brightness for the day or night mode according to your setting in the Dimming mode (Mode) option.
• Screensaver: Select a screen saver option to be displayed when the system is turned off.
• Scroll text (Text Scroll) (if equipped): Set to scroll text when information text is too long to display all on the screen.

NOTICE

The text scroll function (if equipped) is only available in the following situation:

- When displaying titles in the USB/iPod/Bluetooth audio modes

Sound

You can change the settings related to sounds, such as location where sound will be concentrated and the output level for each range.

On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] ▶ [2] buttons to select Sound.

• Position: Select a location where sound will be concentrated in the vehicle. Select Fade (Fader) or Balance, turn the [TUNE] knob to select the desired position, and then press the knob. To set sound to be centred in the vehicle, select Centre.

• Equaliser (Tone): Adjust the output level for each sound tone mode.

• Speed dependent volume control (Speed Dependent Volume): Set the volume to be adjusted automatically according to your driving speed.

• Rear parking sensors prioritised (Back-up Warning Priority): Set to decrease the audio volume to hear a reverse warning prior to other sounds whilst reversing your vehicle.

NOTICE

• Depending on vehicle models or specifications, available options may vary.
• Depending on the system or amplifier specifications applied to your vehicle, available options may vary.

Date/Time

You can change the date and time that are shown on the system display.

On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] ▶ [3] buttons to select Date/Time.

• Set date: Set date to display on the system display.
• Set time: Set time to display on the system display.
• Time format: Select to display time in the 12 hour format or the 24 hour format.

Bluetooth

You can change the settings for Bluetooth connections.

On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] ▶ [4] buttons to select Bluetooth.

• Connections: Pair new Bluetooth devices with your system, or connect or disconnect a paired device. You can also delete paired devices.
• Auto connection priority: Select a paired device to connect to your system automatically when it turns on.
• Update contacts (Download Contacts): Download the contacts list from the connected mobile phone.
• Bluetooth voice guidance (if equipped): Turn on or off the voice guidance for Bluetooth pairing, connection, and errors.

NOTICE

• If no Bluetooth device is connected, the Update contacts (Download Contacts) menu is disabled.
• If the system language is selected to Slovakian or Hungarian, Bluetooth voice guidance menu is disabled.

System

You can change the display language or initialise system settings.

On the control panel, press the [SETUP/CLOCK] ▶ [5] buttons to select System.

- Language: Change the display language.

- Default: Reset your system settings to the default values. All user data stored in the system will also be deleted.

SYSTEM STATUS ICONS

Status icons appear at the top of the screen to display the current system status.

Familiarise yourself with the status icons that appear when you perform certain actions or functions and their meanings.

Mute

Icon Description
	Audio muted

Bluetooth Signal strength

Icon	Description
	Battery level of connected Bluetooth device
	Mobile phone connected via Bluetooth
	Audio device connected via Bluetooth
	Mobile phone and audio device connected via Bluetooth
	Bluetooth call in progress
	Microphone turned off during Bluetooth call
	Downloading call history from a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth to the system
	Downloading contacts from a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth to the system

Icon Description
	Signal strength of the mobile phone connected via Bluetooth

NOTICE

• The battery level displayed on the screen may differ from the battery level displayed on the connected device.
• The signal strength displayed on the screen may differ from the signal strength displayed on the connected mobile phone.
• Depending on vehicle models and specifications, some status icons may not be displayed.

AUDIO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

USB

Supported audio formats

• Audio file specification

- WAVeform audio format

- MPEG1/2/2.5 Audio Layer3

- Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X/8.X

- Bit rates

- MPEG1 (Layer3): 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/1 60/192/224/256/320 kbps

- MPEG2 (Layer3): 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/11 2/128/144/160 kbps

- MPEG2.5 (Layer3): 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/11 2/128/144/160 kbps

- WMA (High Range): 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

- Bits Per Sample

- WAV (PCM(Stereo)): 24 bit

- WAV (IMA ADPCM): 4 bit

- WAV (MS ADPCM): 4 bit

- Sampling frequency

- MPEG1: 44100/48000/32000 Hz

- MPEG2: 22050/24000/16000 Hz

- MPEG2.5: 11025/12000/8000 Hz

- WMA: 32000/44100/48000 Hz

- WAV: 44100/48000 Hz

• Maximum number of directory layers: No limitation

• Maximum length of folder names (Based on Unicode): 31 English or Korean characters

• Maximum length of file names (Based on Unicode): 63 English or Korean characters

- Supported characters for folder/file names (Unicode support): 2,604 Korean characters, 94 alphanumeric characters, 4,888 Chinese characters in common use, 986 special characters

• Maximum number of folders: 2,000

• Maximum number of files: 6,000

NOTICE

- Files that are not in a supported format may not be recognised or played, or information about them, such as the file name, may not be displayed properly.

- Only files with .mp3/.wma/.wav extensions can be recognised by the system. If the file is not in supported format, change the file format by using the latest encoding software.

- The device will not support files locked by DRM (Digital Rights Management).

- For MP3/WMA compression files and WAV file, differences in sound quality will occur depending on the bitrate. (Music files with a higher bitrate have a better sound quality.)

- Japanese or Simplified Chinese characters in folder or file names may not be displayed properly.

Supported USB storage devices

• Byte/Sector: 64 kbyte or less
• Format system: FAT12/16/32 (recommended)
  • Maximum device size: 32 GB

NOTICE

• Operation is guaranteed only for a metal cover type USB storage device with a plug type connector.
• USB storage devices with a plastic plug may not be recognised.
• USB storage devices in memory card types, such as CF card or SD cards, may not be recognised.
• USB hard disk drives may not be recognised.
• When you use a large capacity USB storage device with multiple logical drives, only files stored on the first drive will be recognised.
• If an application program is loaded on a USB storage device, the corresponding media files may not play.

- Use USB 2.0 devices for better compatibility.

Bluetooth

• Bluetooth Power Class 2: -6 to 4 dBm
  • Aerial power: Max 3 mW
  • Frequency range: 2400 to 2483.5 MHz
• Bluetooth patch RAM software version: 1

TRADEMARKS

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

- The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under licence.

Bluetooth®

- Apple®, iPad®, iPad mini™, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod classic®, iPod nano®, iPod touch®, and iTunes® are a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

CE RED for EU

EU Declaration of Conformity

Product details
Product	CAIR AUDIO SYSTEM
Model	ACB051EE, ACR1051RE, ACR1151UG, ACR1051EE, ACR1051UG, ACR1051UGL, ACR1051UGL, ACR1051MAG
We hereby declare, that the product above is in compliance with the essential requirements of the Directive 2014/5.5/EU by application of
Applied Standards
Article 3.2 Radio	EN 300 328 V2.1.1 / Final Draft EN 303 345 V1.1.7
Article 3.1b EMC	Draft EN 301 489-1 V2.2.0, Final Draft EN 301 489-3 V2.1.1, Draft EN 301 489-17 V3.2.0, EN 55032-2015
Article 3.1a Safety, Health	EN 60065-2014, EN 62311-2008

Manufacturer

Hyundai MOBIS Co., Ltd.

2015, Teheran-nu, Gangnam-gu.

Seoul, 06141, Korea

Tel: [phone]

Representative in the EU

MOBIS Parts Europe N.V.

Frankfurt Main, 65598, Germany

Tel: [phone]

Signed By

16/31/2017

This declaration of conformity is issued under the sale

responsibility of the manufacturer.

Serunghoon Choe

Representative

1. 2017年

Hyundai MOBIS Co., Ltd.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving....5-5

Before entering the vehicle 5-5

Before starting....5-5

Key ignition switch....5-7

Ignition switch 5-7

Engine Start/Stop button....5-12

Manual transmission....5-20

Manual transmission operation 5-20

Good driving practices....5-22

Automatic transmission....5-23

Automatic transmission operation 5-23

Parking....5-28

Good driving practices....5-28

Braking system....5-31

Power brakes 5-31

Disc brakes wear indicator 5-32

Parking brake....5-32

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)....5-34

AUTO HOLD 5-40

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 5-44

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)....5-46

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)....5-49

Trailer stability assist (TSA)....5-50

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) 5-51

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) 5-51

Downhill Brake Control (DBC)....5-52

Good braking practices....5-54

Four wheel drive (4WD)....5-55

4WD operation....5-57

Emergency precautions....5-60

Reducing the risk of a rollover 5-61

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system....5-63

To activate the ISG system....5-63

To deactivate the ISG system 5-67

ISG system malfunction....5-67

The battery sensor deactivation....5-68

Flex steering wheel 5-69

Drive mode integrated control system .....5-71

SMART mode....5-71

SPORT mode....5-74

ECO mode....574

Forward collision-avoidance assist (FCA)

system-camera type....5-76

System setting and activation....5-76

FCA warning message and system control .....5-78

FCA sensor....5-80

System malfunction....5-82

Limitations of the system 5-83

Forward collision-avoidance assist (FCA)

system- sensor fusion type

(front radar + front camera)......5-88

System setting and activation....5-88

FCA warning message and system control .....5-90

FCA sensor....5-92

System malfunction....5-95

Limitations of the system 5-96

Blind-spot collision warning (BCW)....5-102

System description 5-102

System setting and activation 5-103

Warning message and system control 5-105

Rear cross-traffic collision warning (RCCW)

system....5-113

System description 5-113

System setting and activation 5-113

Warning message and system control 5-115

Blind-spot collision warning (BCW)/

Blind-spot collision-avoidance assist (BCA) .5-122

System description 5-122

System setting and activation 5-123

Warning message and system control 5-126

Rear cross-traffic collision warning (RCCW)

system / Rear cross-traffic

collision-avoidance assist (RCCA) system.....5-135

System description 5-135

System setting and activation 5-136

Warning message and system control 5-137

Lane keeping assist (LKA) system ....5-145

LKA operation....5-146

Warning light and message 5-151

Limitations of the System....5-152

LKA system function change....5-153

Driver attention warning (DAW) system .....5-154

System setting and activation 5-154

Resetting the system 5-155

System standby....5-156

System malfunction....5-156

Speed limit control system 5-158

Speed Limit Control operation....5-158

Intelligent speed limit warning (ISLW)

system....5-160

System setting and activation 5-161

Display 5-161

Limitations of the system 5-165

Driver's attention 5-166

Cruise control 5-167

Cruise Control operation....5-167

Smart cruise control with stop & go system.5-173

Smart Cruise Control Switch 5-173

Smart Cruise Control speed....5-174

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance....5-180

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead...5-183

To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise

Control 5-184

To convert to Cruise Control mode....5-185

Limitations of the system 5-186

Leading vehicle departure alert 5-190

System setting and operating conditions....5-190

Special driving conditions....5-192

Hazardous driving conditions 5-192

Rocking the vehicle 5-192

Smooth cornering 5-193

Driving at night....5-193

Driving in the rain....5-193

Driving in flooded areas....5-194

Highway driving....5-194

Reducing the risk of a rollover....5-195

Winter driving....5-196

Snow or icy conditions....5-196

Winter Precautions....5-198

Trailer towing 5-200

If you decide to pull a trailer?......5-201

Trailer towing equipment 5-204

Driving with a trailer 5-205

Maintenance when towing a trailer....5-208

Vehicle weight 5-209

Overloading 5-209

WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the tailgate open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tyres for uneven wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Before starting

• Make sure the bonnet, the tailgate, and the doors are securely closed and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seat belt. Check that all passengers have fastened their seat belt.
• Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt. All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
  • Always drive defensively. Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each additional drink.

Driving whilst under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the ignition switch, or any other control, whilst the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Key ignition switch (if equipped)

Whenever the front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed (if equipped).

WARNING

- NEVER turn the ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC position whilst the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency.

This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

- Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in 1st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) position, apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

NOTICE

Never use aftermarket keyhole covers. This may generate start-up failure due to communication failure.

Key ignition switch positions

Switch Position	Action Notes
LOCK	To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key in at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.(if equipped)
ACC	Some electrical accessories are usable.The steering wheel unlocks.	If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key whilst turning the steering wheel right and left to release.
ON	This is the normal key position when the engine has started.All features and accessories are usable.The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition switch from ACC to ON.	Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
START	To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.	The engine will crank until you release the key.

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and clutch pedals.
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move which can lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

Starting the petrol engine

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

Vehicle with automatic transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

i Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm up whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
  Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator whilst starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine whilst warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in the START position for more than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10 seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position with the engine running. It may damage the starter.
• If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position whilst the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-ed before starting the engine and then have to be warmed up before starting to drive.

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. The glow indicator light ( _0 ) will illuminate.
5. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, turn the key ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

Vehicle with automatic transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. The glow indicator light ( ) will illuminate.
5. When the glow indicator light ( 100 ) goes out, turn the key ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

NOTICE

If the engine does not start within 10 seconds after preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once more to the LOCK position and wait for 10 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch to the ON position in order to preheat the engine again.

Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting the engine.

If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbo charger unit.

1. After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning the engine off.

This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbo charger unit.

NOTICEN

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in the START position for more than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10 seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position with the engine running. It may damage the starter.
• If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position whilst the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

Engine Start/Stop button (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue circular button labeled 'OTM058004R' (no other text or symbols visible)

Whenever the front door is opened, the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed.

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an emergency:

Press and hold the Engine Start/Stop button for more than two seconds OR Rapidly press and release the Engine Start/Stop button three times (within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

- NEVER press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

- Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

Engine Stop/Start button positions

- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position	Action Notes
OFF	To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and then press the Engine Start/Stop button. The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft (if equipped).	If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound.
ACC	Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal. Some electrical accessories are usable. The steering wheel unlocks.	If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the Engine Start/Stop button will not work. Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst turning the steering wheel right and left to release.

• Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position	Action Notes
ON	Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst it is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.	Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
START	To start the engine, depress the clutch and brake pedals and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.	If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:OFF → ACC → ON → OFF or ACC

Engine Stop/Start button positions

- Vehicle with automatic transmission

Button Position	Action Notes
OFF	To turn off the engine, press the Engine Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft (if equipped).	If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound.
ACC	Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.Some electrical accessories are usable.The steering wheel unlocks.	If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the Engine Start/Stop button will not work. Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

• Vehicle with automatic transmission

Button Position	Action Notes
ON	Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.	Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
START	To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N (Neutral) position.For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.	If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:OFF → ACC → ON → OFF or ACC

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and clutch pedals.
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move which can lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

i Information

• The engine will start by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver, the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the "Indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when using the ACC position or if the vehicle engine is ON.

Starting the petrol engine

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Vehicle with automatic transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm up whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
  Start driving at moderate engine speeds. Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.
  • Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator whilst starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine whilst warming it up.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-ed before starting the engine and then have to be warmed up before starting to drive.

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake pedal.

5-18

1. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
2. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the glow indicator light (does out.
3. When the glow indicator light (100 goes out, the engine will start.

Vehicle with automatic transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
6. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the glow indicator light (→) goes out.
7. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, the engine will start.

NOTICE

If the Engine Start/Stop button is pressed whilst the engine is preheating, the engine may start.

Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting the engine.
   If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbo charger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning the engine off. This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

NOTICE

Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbo charger unit.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

- If the engine stalls whilst you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position whilst the vehicle is still moving and press the Engine Start/Stop button in an attempt to restart the engine.

- Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

NOTICEN

To prevent damage to the vehicle: Do not press the Engine Start/Stop button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the engine by pressing and holding the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position.

For your safety always depress the brake and/or clutch pedal before starting the engine.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and air vent with a blue arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

i Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

The shift lever can be moved without pressing the button (1).

The button (1) must be pressed whilst moving the shift lever.

OTM058129R

Manual transmission operation

The manual transmission has 6 forward gears. The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

WARNING

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a uphill and in R (Reverse) on a downhill, set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

To shift to R (Reverse), make sure the vehicle has completely stopped, and then move the shift lever to neutral before moving into R (Reverse).

When you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear or R (Reverse):

1. Put the shift lever in neutral and release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and then shift into first or R (Reverse) gear.

i Information

During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up.

Using the clutch

The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way to the floor before:

• Starting the engine
  The engine will not start without depressing the clutch pedal.
• Shifting into gear, up shifting to the next higher gear, or down shifting to the next lower gear.
• Stopping the engine
  Stop the vehicle safely and depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. Then shift into N(Neutral) gear and turn off the engine.

When releasing the clutch pedal, release it slowly. The clutch pedal should always be released whilst driving.

To prevent unnecessary wear or damage to the clutch:

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with the clutch on an incline, whilst waiting for the traffic light, etc.
  • Always depress the clutch pedal down fully to prevent noise or damage.
• Do not start with the 2nd (second) gear engaged except when you start on a slippery road.
• Do not drive with cargo loaded more than required loading capacity.
  • Make sure to depress the clutch pedal until the engine starts completely. If you release the clutch pedal before the engine starts completely, the engine may stop.

WARNING

• In case that there is not equipped with an ignition lock switch, if starting engine in below conditions, the vehicle suddenly may move.

• the parking brake is released.
• the shift lever is not in N(neutral) position.
• clutch pedal is not depressed fully.

Downshifting

Downshift when you must slow down in heavy traffic or drive up a steep hill, to prevent engine load.

Also, downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and helps to accelerate when you need to increase your speed again.

When the vehicle is going downhill, downshifting helps maintain safe speed by providing brake power from the engine and results in less wear on the brakes.

NOTICEN

To prevent damage to the engine, clutch and transmission:

• When downshifting from 5th gear to 4th gear, be careful not to inadvertently push the shift lever sideways engaging the 2nd gear. A drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point the tachometer will enter the red-zone.
• Do not downshift more than two gears at a time or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transmission.

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause the brakes and related parts to overheat and malfunction.
  When you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. Engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you shift into R (Reverse) to prevent damage to the transmission.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears.

On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use aggressive engine braking (shifting from a higher gear to a lower gear) on slippery roads. This could cause the tyres to slip and may result in an accident.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt. In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
  • HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button whilst moving the shift lever. Press the shift button whilst moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can freely operate.

OTM058006L

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has six forward speeds (eight forward speeds, if equipped) and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
- Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.
- Do not use the engine brake (shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must depress firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in this chapter.

The shift lever must be in P (Park) before turning the engine off.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
  • After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R (Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop with the engine ON. Shift into P (Park) if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N (Neutral) to another gear.

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting into gear when the engine is running at high speed can cause the vehicle to move very rapidly. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit people or objects.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position. The transmission will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress the accelerator fully. The transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear (or gears, as appropriate).

The DRIVE MODE switch, located on the shift lever console, allows the driver to switch from NORMAL mode to SPORT or ECO mode (if equipped).

For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" later in this chapter.

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In Sports Mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions.

• (Up) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.
• (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

i Information

• Only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1^st gear is automatically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to + (Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.

• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the + (Up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2^nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the - (Down) side to shift back to the 1^st gear.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following:

Mechanical gear shift lever mechanism in a car, showing keyway and mode dial (no text or symbols)

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-driver) into the access hole and press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever whilst holding down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock release access hole then install the cap.
7. Depress the brake pedal, and then restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift-lock release, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

When you stay in the vehicle with the engine running, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. The engine or exhaust system may overheat and start a fire.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep away from the exhaust system components.

Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry grass, paper or leaves. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
  Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N (Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident because of a loss of engine braking and the transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.
• When driving in sports mode, slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged if the engine rpms are outside of the allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
- Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident
- Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
  • The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard with two side seats and a central brand logo (no visible text or symbols)

The paddle shifter is available when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or the sport mode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter will operate when the vehicle speed is more than 6 mph (10 km/h).

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear and the system changes from automatic mode to sport mode.

When the vehicle speed is lower than 6 mph (10 km/h), if you depress the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds or if you move the shift lever from D (Drive) to sport mode and move it from sport mode to D (Drive) again, the system changes from sport mode to automatic mode.

With the shift lever in the sports mode

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear.

i Information

If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are pulled at the same time, gear shift may not occur.

BRAKING SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is turned off whilst driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

- Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

- When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

- Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes whilst maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

i Information

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

Parking brake

Interior view of a car showing a hand inserting a blue belt into the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Hand type

Always set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to apply:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever as far as possible.

Foot type

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake whilst the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with blue arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

OTM058131R OTM058015R

Hand type

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Slightly pull up the parking brake lever.

Whilst pressing the release button (1), lower the parking brake (2).

Foot type

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal down and it will release automatically.

If the parking brake does not release or does not release all the way, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

- Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the 1st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk of moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.

• When parking on an incline, block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from rolling down.
• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

- Only release the parking brake when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal whilst the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, a warning will sound. Damage to the parking brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

Check the Parking Brake Warning Light by placing the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).

This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light remains on after the parking brake is released whilst the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) (if equipped)

Applying the parking brake

To apply the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.

Make sure the Parking Brake Warning Light comes on.

Also, the EPB is applied automatically if the [AUTO HOLD] switch is on when the engine is turned off. However, if you press the EPB switch within one second after the engine is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the EPB whilst the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

Releasing the parking brake

Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue directional arrow and control panel (no text or symbols on the main subject)

To release the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake), press the EPB switch in the following condition:

- Place the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

• Depress the brake pedal.

Make sure the Parking Brake Warning Light goes off.

To release EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) automatically:

- Shift lever in P (Park)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).

- Shift lever in N (Neutral)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).

• Automatic transmission vehicle

1. Start the engine.

2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.

3. Close the driver's door, engine bonnet and tailgate.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal whilst the shift lever is in R (Rear), D (Drive) or Sports mode.

Make sure the Parking Brake Warning light goes off.

i Information

• For your safety, you can engage the EPB even though the Engine Stop/Start button is in the OFF position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle.

NOTICE

• If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the EPB has been released, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) does not release:

We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may be automatically applied when:

• The EPB is overheated
- It is requested by other systems
- The engine is turned off with the EPB applied

i Information

If the driver turns the engine off whilst Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied. However, if you press the EPB switch within one second after the engine is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

Warning messages

OTM058132L

Release parking brake

• When you try to drive with the EPB applied, a warning will sound and a message will appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is unfastened and the engine bonnet or tailgate is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear.
• When there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a message may appear.
  If the situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.
  Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, press the EPB switch, and press the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position. Take the Smart Key with you when exiting the vehicle.
  Vehicles not fully engaged in P (Park) with the parking brake set are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the EPB switch. If the EPB is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
• Only release the EPB when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal whilst the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the EPB engaged, a warning will sound and a message will appear. Damage to the parking brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the EPB is released and the Parking Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

i Information

• A clicking sound may be heard whilst operating or releasing the EPB. These conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a parking attendant or assistant, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.

OTM058152R OTM058153R

Deactivating AUTO HOLD.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

Parking brake automatically applied

If the EPB is applied whilst Auto Hold is activated, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

EPB malfunction indicator (if equipped)

If the EPB malfunction indicator remains on, comes on whilst driving, or does not come on when the Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the ON position, this indicates that the EPB may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The EPB malfunction indicator may illuminate when the ESC indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

NOTICE

• If the EPB warning light is still on, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB may not be applied.
• If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch, and then pull it up. Repeat this one more time. If the EPB warning does not go off, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake pedal whilst driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only whilst you are holding the EPB switch.

WARNING

Do not operate the parking brake whilst the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to a severe accident.

i Information

During emergency braking, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating.

NOTICE

If you continuously notice a noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normally, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.

AUTO HOLD (if equipped)

This feature keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D (Drive), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or Sports Mode with the feature enabled and when the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle.

To apply :

1. With the driver's door, engine bonnet and tailgate closed, fasten the driver's seat belt or depress the brake pedal and then press the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The white AUTO HOLD indicator will come on and the system will be in the standby position.

1. When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from white to green.
2. The vehicle will remain stationary even if you release the brake pedal.
3. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released.

To release :

If you press the accelerator pedal with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D (Drive) or sports mode, the Auto Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move. The indicator changes from green to white.

WARNING

When the AUTO HOLD is automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal, always take a look around your vehicle. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

To cancel :

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.
   The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn off.

WARNING

To prevent, unexpected and sudden vehicle movement, ALWAYS press your foot on the brake pedal to cancel the Auto Hold before you:

• Drive downhill.
• Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).
• Park the vehicle.

i Information

• The Auto Hold does not operate when:
• The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened
• The engine bonnet is opened
• The tailgate is opened
• The shift lever is in P (Park)
• The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold automatically switches to EPB when:
• The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened
• The engine bonnet is opened with the shift lever is in D (Drive)
• The tailgate is opened with the shift lever is in R (Reverse)
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes
• The vehicle stands on a steep slope
• The vehicle moves several times

In these cases, the brake warning light comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white, and a warning sound and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving off again, press foot brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release parking brake manually with the EPB switch.

• If the AUTO HOLD indicator changes to yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Whilst operating Auto Hold, you may hear mechanical noise. However, it is normal operating noise.

WARNING

• Press the accelerator pedal slowly when you start the vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the Auto Hold when you drive downhill, back up the vehicle or park the vehicle.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the driver's door, engine bonnet or boot open detection system, the Auto Hold may not work properly. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Warning messages

Parking brake automatically applied

When the EPB is applied from Auto Hold, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OTM058152R OIK057080L

Deactivating AUTO HOLD.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

Press brake pedal to deactivate AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal when you release the Auto Hold by pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

NOTICE

When this message is displayed, the Auto Hold and EPB may not operate. For your safety, depress the brake pedal.

OTM058159L

AUTO HOLD conditions not met. Close door and hood

When you press the [AUTO HOLD] switch, if the driver's door, engine bonnet and tailgate are not closed or the driver's seat belt is unfastened, a warning will sound and a message will appear on the LCD display. At this moment, press the [AUTO HOLD] button after closing the driver's door, engine bonnet and tailgate and fastening the seat belt.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) or an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving manoeuvres. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for vehicles equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.

Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions:

- Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.
• Tyre chains are installed on your vehicle. Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the above conditions.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps to prevent a braking skid. ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed depending on the road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the Ignition switch is placed in the ON position. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, we recommend that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

i Information

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light (may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (if equipped)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system helps to stabilise the vehicle during cornering manoeuvres.

ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt manoeuvres, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds and goes off, then the ESC is turned on.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks:

- When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

• When the ESC activates, the engine may not respond to the accelerator as it does under routine conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise Control automatically disengages. The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter (if equipped).
• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) may not increase even if you press the accelerator pedal deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

- State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction Control disabled" will illuminate. In this state, the traction control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC (braking management) still operates.

- State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction & Stability Control disabled" illuminates and a warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of ESC (engine management) and the brake control function of ESC (braking management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the vehicle, the ESC will automatically turn on again. 5-47

Indicator lights

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.

If the ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the ESC off whilst the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tyres with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tyres, make sure all four tyres and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tyres installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC, to maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off whilst driving, press the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively whilst the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively whilst these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

i Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or standard brake system operation.

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) (if equipped)

The Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) is a function of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tyres can suddenly become uneven.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad weather, on slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

i Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as gradient or incline.
• Driving in reverse.
  • The ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• The EPS (Electric power steering) warning light (On or blinks.

WARNING

If the ESC indicator light (for EPS warning light (stays illuminated or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tyres with different sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. Before replacing tyres, make sure all four tyres and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tyres and wheels installed.

Trailer stability assist (TSA) (if equipped)

Trailer stability assist is operated as vehicle stability control system. Trailer stability assist system has an effort to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer sways or oscillates. There are various reasons making vehicle sway and oscillate. Almost case it happens at high speed however, if the trailer is affected by crosswinds, buffeting, and improper overloading, it may be a risk of swaying.

Factors of swaying such as:

• High speed
• Strong crosswinds
• Improper overloading
• Sudden controlling of steering wheel
• Uneven road

Trailer stability assist system continuously analyzes the vehicle and trailer instability. When the Trailer stability assist system detects some sway, the brakes are applied automatically to stabilize the vehicle on the front wheel. However, if it is not enough to stabilize, the brakes are applied on all wheels automatically and engine power is properly reduced. When the vehicle is stable from swaying, trailer stability assist system does not operate.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) (if equipped)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline. The HAC activates only for approximately 2 seconds.

i Information

• The HAC does not operate when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
• The HAC activates even when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off. However, it does not activate, when the ESC does not operate normally.

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) (if equipped)

The Emergency Stop Signal system alerts the driver behind by blinking the stop lights, whilst sharply and severely braking.

The system is activated when:

• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The deceleration power exceeds 7m / s^2 , and the driving speed exceeds 34 mph (55 km/h)).
• The ABS is activated and the driving speed exceeds 34 mph (55 km/h).

The hazard warning flasher automatically turns ON after blinking the stop lights:

• When the driving speed is under 25 mph (40 km/h),
• When the ABS is deactivated, and
• When the sudden braking situation is over.

The hazard warning flasher turns OFF:

- When the vehicle drives at a low speed for a certain period of time.

The driver can manually turn OFF the hazard warning flasher by pressing the button.

i Information

The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) system will not activate, when the hazard warning flashers are already on.

Downhill Brake Control (DBC) (if equipped)

The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) supports the driver come down a steep hill without depressing the brake pedal.

It slows down the vehicle under 5 mph (8 km/h) (for automatic transmission vehicles) or 5 mph (8 km/h) (for manual transmission vehicles) and lets the driver concentrate on steering the vehicle.

WARNING

Always turn off the DBC on normal roads. The DBC might activate inadvertently from the standby mode when driving through speed bumps or making sharp curves.

NOTICE

• The DBC defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
• Noise or vibration may occur from the brakes when the DBC is activated.
  • The rear stop light comes on when DBC is activated.

DBC operation

Mode Indicator light Description
Standby	illuminated	Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under 25mph (40km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode.The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over 25mph (40km/h).
Activated	blinks	In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 22mph (35km/h) whilst driving down a steep hill, the DBC will activate automatically.
Temporarily deactivated	illuminated	In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:The hill is not steep enough.The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
OFF	notilluminated	The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:The DBC button is pressed again.Vehicle speed is over 38mph (60km/h).

WARNING

If the DBC red indicator light illuminates, the system may have overheated or have malfunctioned. When the warning light illuminates even though the DBC system has cooled off, we recommend that the vehicle be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• The DBC may not deactivate on steep inclines even though the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed.

• Do not turn on the DBC when driving with shift lever in 3rd gear (and above) for vehicles with manual transmission. The engine may stop if the DBC system is activated.
  • The DBC does not operate when:

• The shift lever is in P (Park).

• The ESC is activated.

Good braking practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so. We recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure.

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)

The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) System delivers engine power to all front and rear wheels for maximum traction. 4WD is useful when extra traction is required on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered roads.

Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is always important that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Do not drive in conditions that exceed the vehicles intended design such as challenging off-road conditions.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of a rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.
  • In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

NOTICE

• Do not drive in water if the level is higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once you are out of mud or water. Depress the brake pedal several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in off-road conditions such as sand, mud or water.
  • Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off road use, especially the bottom of the vehicle.
• Be sure to equip the vehicle with four tyres of the same size and type.
• Make sure that a full time 4WD vehicle is towed by a flat bed tow truck.

4WD operation

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
4WD AUTO(4WD LOCK is deactivated)		(not illuminated)	In the 4WD AUTO mode, under normal operating conditions, the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles. If the system determines there is a need for four wheel drive, the engine's driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically.Use this mode when driving on normal roads.If you select the "Driving force distribution" in the cluster, Driving force distribution (4WD) state is displayed.
4WD LOCK		(illuminated)	In the 4WD LOCK mode, the system is deactivated when vehicle speed is over 37 mph (60 km/h) and the mode is shifted to 4WD AUTO mode. If the vehicle speed slows down to 37 mph (60 km/h), the mode shifts back to the 4WD LOCK mode.If 4WD Lock is activated, the driving force distribution in the cluster is not displayed.Use this mode when driving up or down steep inclines, driving off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximise traction

WARNING

If 4WD warning light ( ) stays on the instrument cluster, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the 4WD system. When the 4WD warning light ( ) illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

When driving on normal roads, deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button (4WD LOCK indicator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with the 4WD LOCK mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated. Prolonged driving with the noise and vibration may damage some parts of the power train.

NOTICE

When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated, a sensation may be felt as the driving power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.

For safe 4WD operation

Before driving

• Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
• Sit upright and closer to the steering wheel than usual. Adjust the steering wheel to a position comfortable for you to drive.

Driving on snow-covered or icy roads

• Start off slowly by applying the accelerator pedal gently.
• Use snow tyres or tyre chains.
• Keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
• Use engine braking during deceleration.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns to prevent skids.

Driving in sand or mud

• Maintain slow and constant speed.
• Use tyre chains driving in mud if necessary.
• Keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
• Reduce vehicle speed and always check the road condition.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns to prevent getting stuck.

CAUTION

When the vehicle is stuck in snow, sand or mud, place a non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction OR slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions which causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle. However, avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm, doing so may damage the 4WD system.

Diagram showing a tree with upward and downward arrows, no text or symbols present

Driving up or down hills

- Driving uphill

• Before starting off, check if it is possible to drive uphill.
• Drive as straight as possible.

- Driving downhill

• Do not change gear whilst driving downhill. Select gear before driving downhill.
• Drive slowly using engine braking whilst driving downhill.
• Drive straight as possible.

WARNING

Exercise extreme caution driving up or down steep hills. The vehicle may flip depending on the grade, terrain and water/mud conditions.

WARNING

Do not drive across the contour of steep hills. A slight change in the wheel angle can destabilize the vehicle, or a stable vehicle may lose stability if the vehicle stops its forward motion. Your vehicle may roll over and lead to a serious injury or death.

Driving through water

• Try to avoid driving in deep standing water. It may stall your engine and clog your exhaust pipes.
• If you need to drive in water, stop your vehicle, set the vehicle in 4WD LOCK mode and drive under 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Do not change gear whilst driving in water.

CAUTION

Always drive slowly in water. If you drive too fast, water may get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system causing your vehicle to suddenly stop.

Additional driving conditions

• Become familiar with the off-road conditions before driving.
  • Always pay attention when driving off-road and avoid dangerous areas.
• Drive slowly when driving in heavy wind.
• Reduce vehicle speed when cornering. The centre of gravity of 4WD vehicles is higher than conventional 2WD vehicles, making them more likely to roll over when you rapidly turn corners.
  • Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving off-road.

WARNING

Do not grab the inside of the steering wheel when you are driving off-road. You may hurt your arm by a sudden steering manoeuvre or from steering wheel rebound due to an impact with objects on the ground. You could lose control of the steering wheel which may lead to serious injury or death.

Emergency precautions

Tyres

Do not use tyre and wheel with different size and type from the one originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover causing serious injury.

When replacing the tyres, be sure to equip all four tyres with the tyre and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you equip your vehicle with any tyre/wheel combination not recommended by HYUNDAI for off-road driving, you should not use these tyres for highway driving.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine whilst a full-time 4WD vehicle is raised on a jack. The vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby.

Towing

4WD vehicles must be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. For more information, refer to "Towing" in chapter 6.

Dynamometer testing

A full-time 4WD vehicle must be tested on a special four wheel chassis dynamometer.

Side profile of a modern SUV on a platform, labeled 'Temporary Free Roller' (no other text or symbols visible)

Roll Tester (Speedometer)

Temporary Free Roller

OTM058013

A full-time 4WD vehicle should not be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WD roll tester must be used, perform the following procedure:

1. Check the tyre pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll tester for a speedometer test as shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

• Never engage the parking brake whilst performing the test.
• When the vehicle is lifted up, do not operate the front and rear wheel separately. All four wheels should be operated.

WARNING

Keep away from the front of the vehicle whilst the vehicle is in gear on the dynamometer. The vehicle can jump forward and cause serious injury or death.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV). SUV's have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher centre of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehicles, any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres, do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING

Rollover

As with other Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
- Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher centre of gravity than ordinary vehicles.
- A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional vehicles.
- Avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres.
- In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure everyone in the vehicle is properly buckled up.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with tyres designed to provide safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tyre and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tyres, be sure to equip all four tyres with the tyre and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tyre/wheel combination not recommended by HYUNDAI for off road driving, you should not use these tyres for highway driving.

WARNING

Jacked vehicle

Whilst a full-time 4WD vehicle is being raised on a jack, never start the engine or cause the tyres to rotate.

There is a danger that rotating tyres touching the ground could cause the vehicle to fall off the jack and to jump forward or rearward.

IDLE STOP AND GO (ISG) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The ISG system is to reduce the fuel consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill (i.e. red stop light, stop sign, and traffic jam).

The engine is automatically started upon satisfying the starting conditions.

The ISG system is always active, when the engine is running.

i Information

When the engine is automatically started by the ISG system, some warning lights (i.e. ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS, and parking brake warning light) may illuminate for a few seconds due to the low battery voltage. However, it does not indicate a malfunction with the ISG system.

To activate the ISG system

Prerequisite for activation

The ISG system operates in the following situations.

• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
• The driver's door and the bonnet are closed.
• The brake vacuum pressure is adequate.

- The battery is sufficiently charged.

- The outside temperature is between -10 °C and 35 °C (14 °F and 95 °F).

- The engine coolant temperature is not too low.

- The system is not in the diagnostic mode.

- The steering wheel is not steered excessively. (for automatic transmission vehicle)

- The vehicle is driven on a steep incline. (for automatic transmission vehicle)

i Information

WTF-444

- The ISG system is not activated, when the prerequisites to activate the ISG system are unsatisfied. In this case, the ISG OFF button indicator illuminates, and the auto stop indicator (Aluminates in yellow on the instrument cluster.

- When the above indicator remains illuminated on the instrument cluster, we recommend that you have the ISG system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode Manual transmission vehicle

1. Decrease the vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Set the gear in N (Neutral).
3. Release the clutch pedal.
   The auto stop indicator (A) illuminates in green on the instrument cluster, when the engine stops.

i Information

The driving speed must reach at least 6 mph (10 km/h) after an idle stop to stop the engine in idle stop mode again.

Automatic transmission vehicle

1. Decrease the vehicle speed to 0 km/h.
2. Depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in D (Drive) or N (Neutral).

The auto stop indicator (A)luminates in green on the instrument cluster, when the engine stops.

i Information

The driving speed must reach at least 5 mph (8 km/h) after an idle stop to stop the engine in idle stop mode again.

In auto stop mode, when the driver opens the bonnet, the ISG system will be deactivated.

When the system is deactivated:

The ISG OFF button indicator illuminates.

OTLE055036

The message, "Auto Stop deactivated. Start manually", appears on the LCD display with a beep sound.

At this time, restart the vehicle manually by:

Manual transmission vehicle

Depressing the clutch and brake pedal with the gear in neutral.

Automatic transmission vehicle

Depressing the brake pedal with the shift lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral). But for your safety, restart the vehicle in the P (Park) position.

Auto start

To restart the engine in the auto stop mode

Manual transmission vehicle

- Depress the clutch pedal with the gear in N (Neutral).

The auto stop indicator (A) goes OFF on the instrument cluster, when the engine is restarted.

Automatic transmission vehicle

- Release the brake pedal.

- When Auto Hold is activated, if you release the brake pedal, the engine will be in the auto stop state. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine will start again.

The auto stop indicator (A) goes OFF on the instrument cluster, when the engine is restarted.

The engine is automatically restarted in the following situations.

• The fan speed of the manual climate control system is set above the 3rd position, with the air condition ON.
• The fan speed of the automatic climate control system is set above the 6th position, with the air condition ON.
• A certain period of time has elapsed with the air condition ON.
• The defroster is activated.
• The brake vacuum pressure is low.
• The battery is weak.
• The driving speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) (for manual transmission vehicle).
• The driving speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) (for automatic transmission vehicle).
• The vehicle is shifted to P (Park) or R (Reverse) when the brake pedal is depressed.

- The door is opened or seat belt is unfastened when the brake pedal is depressed.

The auto stop indicator (A) links in green for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster and a message "Auto Start" will appear on the LCD display.

The auto start is temporarily deactivated in the following situations.

OOS057092R

Manual transmission vehicle

When the gear is shifted without the clutch pedal depressed. A message "Press clutch pedal before driving on" will appear on the LCD display. To activate auto start, shift to neutral and depress the clutch pedal.

OOS057093R

Automatic transmission vehicle

When the shift lever is shifted from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode without the brake pedal depressed. A message "Press brake pedal before driving on" will appear on the LCD display. To activate auto start, depress the brake pedal.

To deactivate the ISG system

• Press the ISG OFF button to deactivate the ISG system. Then, the ISG OFF button indicator illuminates, and the message "Auto Stop System Off" appears on the LCD display.
• Press the ISG OFF button again to reactivate the ISG system. Then, the ISG OFF button indicator turns OFF.

ISG system malfunction

The ISG system may not operate: When there is a malfunction with the ISG sensors or the ISG system.

The followings occur, when there is a malfunction with the ISG system:

• The auto stop indicator (A) will blink in yellow on the instrument cluster.
• The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.

i Information

• When you cannot turn OFF the ISG OFF button indicator by pressing the ISG OFF button, or when the malfunction with the ISG system persists, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• You can turn off the ISG OFF button indicator by driving over 50 mph (80 km/h) for up to 2 hours with the fan speed below the 2nd position. If the ISG OFF button indicator remains ON, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

When the engine is in auto stop mode, the engine may restart. Before leaving the vehicle or checking the engine compartment, stop the engine by placing the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position or removing the ignition key.

The battery sensor deactivation

A: Battery sensor

The battery sensor is deactivated, when the battery is disconnected from the negative pole for maintenance purpose.

In this case, the ISG system is limitedly operated due to the battery sensor deactivation. Thus, the driver needs to take the following procedures to reactivate the battery sensor after disconnecting the battery.

Prerequisites to reactivate the battery sensor

Keep the engine in the OFF status for 4 hours, and attempt to restart the engine 3 to 4 times for the battery-sensor reactivation.

Pay extreme caution not to connect any accessories (i.e. navigation and black box) to the vehicle with the engine in the OFF status. If not, the battery sensor may not be reactivated.

i Information

The ISG system may not operate in the following situations.

- There is a malfunction with the ISG system.

- The battery is weak.

- The brake vacuum pressure is low.

In those cases, we recommend that you have the ISG system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

- Use only the genuine HYUNDAI ISG battery for replacement. If not, the ISG system may not normally operate.

- Do not recharge the ISG battery with a general battery charger. If not, it may damage or explode the ISG battery.

- Do not remove the battery cap. If not, the battery electrolyte, which is harmful to the human body, may leak out.

FLEX STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)

graph TD
    A["Normal"] --> B["Sport"]
    B --> A

The flex steering wheel controls steering effort as driver's preference or road condition.

You can select the desired steering mode by pressing the steering mode button.

When the steering mode button is pressed, the selected steering mode will appear on the LCD display.

If the steering mode button is pressed within 4 seconds, the steering mode will change as above pictures.

If the steering wheel mode button is not pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD display will change to the previous screen.

Normal mode

The normal mode offers medium steering effort.

Sport mode

OTM058138L

The steering wheel becomes heavier. The sport mode is usually used when driving in highway.

CAUTION

• For your safety, if you press the steering mode button whilst operating the steering wheel, the LCD display will change, but the steering effort will not change immediately. After operating the steering wheel, the steering effort will change automatically to the selected mode.
• Be careful when changing the steering mode whilst driving.
• When the electronic power steering is not working properly, the flex steering wheel will not work.

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver's preference or road condition.

The mode changes whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

• SMART mode : SMART mode automatically adjusts the driving mode (ECO ↔ COMFORT ↔ SPORT) in accordance with the driver's driving habits.
  • COMFORT mode : COMFORT mode provides soft driving and comfortable riding.
• SPORT mode : SPORT mode provides sporty but firm riding.
  • ECO mode : ECO mode improves fuel efficiency for eco-friendly driving.

The driving mode will be set to COMFORT or ECO mode when the engine is restarted. if it is in SMART/COMFORT/SPORT mode. COMFORT mode will be set, when the engine is restarted.

If it is in Eco mode, Eco mode will be set when the engine is restarted.

SMART mode

OTM058139L

OTM058140L

OTM058141L

SMART

SMART mode selects the proper driving mode among ECO, COMFORT and SPORT by judging

the driver's driving habits (i.e. mild or dynamic) from the brake pedal depression or the steering wheel operation.

• Press the DRIVE MODE button to activate SMART mode. When SMART mode is activated, the indicator illuminates on the instrument cluster.
• The vehicle starts in SMART mode, when the engine was turned OFF in SMART mode.
• SMART mode automatically controls the vehicle driving, such as gear shifting patterns, engine torque, riding quality (if equipped with the electronic suspension system), and power distribution (if equipped with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system), in accordance with the driver's driving habits.

i Information

• When you mildly drive the vehicle in SMART mode, the driving mode changes to ECO mode to improve fuel efficiency. However, the actual fuel efficiency may differ in accordance with your driving situations (i.e. upward/downward slope, vehicle deceleration/acceleration).
• When you dynamically drive the vehicle in SMART mode by abruptly decelerating or sharply curving, the driving mode changes to SPORT mode. However, it may adversely affect fuel economy.

Various driving situations, which you may encounter in SMART mode

• The driving mode automatically changes to ECO mode after a certain period of time, when you gently depress the accelerator pedal (Your driving is categorised to be mild.).
• The driving mode automatically changes from SMART ECO mode to SMART COMFORT mode after a certain period of time, when you sharply or repetitively depress the accelerator pedal.

• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART COMFORT mode with the same driving patterns, when the vehicle starts to drive on an upward slope of a certain angle. The driving mode automatically returns to SMART ECO mode, when the vehicle enters a levelled road.

• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART SPORT, when you abruptly accelerate the vehicle or repetitively operate the steering wheel (Your driving is categorized to be sporty.). In this mode, your vehicle drives in a lower gear for abrupt accelerating/decelerating and increases the engine brake performance.

• You may still sense the engine brake performance, even when you release the accelerator pedal in SMART SPORT mode. It is because your vehicle remains to be in a lower gear over a certain period of time for next acceleration. Thus, it is a normal driving situation, not indicating any malfunction.
• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART SPORT mode only in harsh driving situations. In most of the normal driving situations, the driving mode sets to be either in SMART ECO mode or in SMART COMFORT mode.

Limitation of SMART mode

The SMART mode may be limited in following situations. (The OFF indicator illuminates in those situations.)

• The driver manually moves the shift lever: It deactivates SMART mode. The vehicle drives, as the driver manually moves the shift lever.
• The cruise control is activated: The cruise system may deactivate the SMART mode. When a higher system is set by the cruise system, it starts to control vehicle speed and deactivates SMART mode. (SMART mode is not deactivated just by activating the cruise system.)
• The transmission oil temperature is either extremely low or extremely high : The SMART mode can be active in most of the normal driving situations. However, an extremely high/ low transmission oil temperature may temporarily deactivate the SMART mode, because the transmission condition is out of normal operation condition.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode manages the driving dynamics by automatically adjusting the steering effort, and

the engine and transmission control logic for enhanced driver performance.

• When SPORT mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the SPORT indicator (orange colour) will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted, the Drive Mode will revert back to COMFORT mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button.

- When SPORT mode is activated:

• The engine rpm will tend to remain raised over a certain length of time even after releasing the accelerator
• Upshifts are delayed when accelerating

i Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.

ECO mode

ECO

When the Drive Mode is set to ECO mode, the engine and transmission control logic are changed

to maximise fuel efficiency.

• When ECO mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the ECO indicator (green colour) will illuminate.
• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode, when the engine is turned OFF and restarted the Drive Mode setting will remain in ECO mode.

i Information

Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

When ECO mode is activated:

• The acceleration response may be slightly reduced if the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder. The above situations are normal conditions when ECO mode is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of ECO mode operation:

If the following conditions occur whilst ECO mode is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low:
  The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because engine torque is restricted.
• When driving the vehicle with the automatic transmission gear shift lever in manual mode.
  The system will be limited according to the shift location.

FORWARD COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (FCA) SYSTEM - CAMERA TYPE (IF EQUIPPED)

The Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead in the roadway through camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

The camera type FCA system detects the vehicle ahead in the roadway through camera.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system:

• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or whilst cornering.
  • Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. FCA does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the FCA by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting:
  "User Settings → Driver assistance → Forward safety"
• If you select "Active assist", the FCA system activates. The FCA produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.
• If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.
• If you select "Off", the FCA system deactivates.

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the FCA system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is turned off. If the warning light remains ON when the FCA is activated, we recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.

Go to the "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing → Normal/Later".

The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated sensitively. If you feel the warning activates too early, set the Forward Collision Warning to 'Later'.

Even though, 'Normal' is selected if the front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not seem fast.

- Later:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Select 'Later' when traffic is light and when driving speed is slow.

* If you change the warning timing, the warning timing of other systems may change.

Always be aware of warning timing before changing the warning timing.

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA gets ready to be activated, when the FCA is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied.

- The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is on.

- Vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h). (The FCA is only activated within a certain speed range.)

(However the FCA brake control is only activated when vehicle speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h)).

- The system detects a vehicle in front, which may collide with your vehicle (The FCA may not be activated or may sound a warning alarm in accordance with the driving situation or vehicle condition. If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels.).

WARNING

• Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate/deactivate the FCA system.
• The FCA automatically activates upon placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position. The driver can deactivate the FCA by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.
• The FCA automatically deactivates upon canceling the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). When the ESC is cancelled, the FCA cannot be activated on the LCD display. The FCA warning light will illuminate which is normal.

FCA warning message and system control

The FCA produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehicle in front, insufficient braking distance detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include Normal or Late initial warning time.

If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Collision Warning (First warning)

OTM058047R

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

- If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Emergency braking (Second warning)

OTM058048R

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision. The brake control is maximised just before a collision.

- If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver's depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.
• The FCA brake control is automatically cancelled, when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION

• The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the FCA system.
  • The warning of the FCA system may not sound whilst other system's warning sounds.

WARNING

The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the FCA system.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive dangerously to activate the system.

FCA sensor

Illustration of a silver SUV on a road with two other cars in the background (no visible text or symbols)

In order for the FCA system to operate properly, always make sure the sensor is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris.

Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

NOTICE

- NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windscreen, nor tint the front windscreen.

• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.
  • Always keep the sensors clean.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the sensor. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

We recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer when:

• The windscreen glass is replaced.

Warning message and warning light

OTM058142R

FCA disabled (Forward Collision Avoidance Assist). Camera obscured When the camera is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA system operation may stop temporarily.

If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the front camera before operating the FCA system.

The system will operate normally when such dirt, snow or debris is removed.

However the FCA may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected or the camera is blocked with dirt, snow or debris after turning ON the engine. Although a warning message will not appear on the LCD display, the FCA may not properly operate.

System malfunction

OIK058091R

Check FCA

(Forward Collision Avoidance Asst.)

• When the FCA is not working properly, the FCA warning light (✗) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light (✗) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• The FCA warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light.

WARNING

• The FCA is only a supplemental system for the driver's convenience. The driver should hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the FCA system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.
  • In certain instances and under certain driving conditions, the FCA system may produce a warning alarm and control the brake system unnecessarily. And, the FCA system may not produce a warning alarm and control the brake system due to detecting limitation of sensor.
  Also, in certain instances the front camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle ahead. The FCA system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

• Even if there is any problem with the brake control function of the FCA system, the vehicle's basic braking performance will operate normally. However, brake control function for avoiding collision will not activate.
- If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system. Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
- The FCA system may activate during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the passengers. Always keep loose objects secured.
- The FCA system may not activate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a collision.
• The brake control may be insufficient, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.

• The FCA system may not activate according to the road conditions, inclement weather, driving conditions or traffic conditions.
  • Occupants may get injured, if the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated FCA system. Pay extreme caution.
  • The FCA system operates only to detect vehicles in front of the vehicle.

WARNING

• The FCA system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.
• The FCA system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.
• The FCA system does not detect pedestrians in front of the vehicle.
• The FCA system does not detect vehicles in the opposite lane.
• The FCA system does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.
- The FCA system cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead end street.)
In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Limitations of the system

The Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system is designed to monitor the vehicle ahead in the roadway through camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

In certain situations, the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle ahead. In these cases, the FCA system may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris
• The camera lens is contaminated due to tinted, filmed or coated windscreen, damaged glass, or stuck of foreign matter (sticker, bug, etc.) on the glass

• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the camera

• There is interference by electromagnetic waves
  • The camera recognition is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motor cycle or bicycle etc.)
• The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)
• The camera's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)
• The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights or their rear lights does not turned ON or their rear lights are located unusually.
• The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare or head light of oncoming vehicle.

• The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed
• The vehicle in front is driving erratically
• The vehicle is on unpaved or uneven rough surfaces, or road with sudden gradient changes.
• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances as a construction zone, railroad, etc.
• The vehicle drives inside a building, such as a basement parking lot
• The camera does not recognise the entire vehicle in front.
  • The camera is damaged.
• The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel.
• The shadow is on the road by a median strip, trees, etc.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-gate.

• The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed.

• The rear part of the vehicle in front is not normally visible. (the vehicle turns in other direction or the vehicle is overturned.)
• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations whilst driving
• The sensor recognition changes suddenly when passing over a speed bump
• The vehicle in front is moving vertically to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped vertically
• The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing
• You are on a roundabout and the vehicle in front circles

Top-down view of a curved road with two cars, one highlighted with blue bounding box (no text or symbols)

In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system may be limited when driving on a curved road.

On curved roads, the other vehicle on the same lane is not recognised and the FCA system's performance may be degraded. This may result in unnecessary alarm or braking or no alarm or braking when necessary.

Also, in certain instances the front camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle travelling on a curved road.

Illustration of a car being towed from a curved road, with two cars ahead (no text or symbols)

The FCA system may recognise a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnecessarily alarm the driver and apply the brake.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the system from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle.

Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of FCA.

Two cars on a hillside, one white and one blue, with a blue triangular object above them (no text or symbols)

OTM058002R OTM058074R OTM058119R

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars, one moving toward a ramp and the other on the road (no text or symbols)

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreases whilst driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognising the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognises the vehicle in front whilst passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward whilst driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the FCA system may not immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a blue car, showing directional arrows (no text or symbols)

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the FCA system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Two illustrations of a truck with a car on top and a separate view of a car on the side, showing airflow or spray effects (no text or symbols)

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required. The FCA system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

WARNING

• Do not use the Forward Collision avoidance Assist (FCA) system when towing a vehicle. Application of the FCA system whilst towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead in the roadway through camera recognition. It is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.

• Never try to test the operation of the FCA system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.

• If the front glass or camera have been replaced or repaired, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

In some instances, the FCA system may be cancelled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

FORWARD COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (FCA) SYSTEM - SENSOR FUSION TYPE (FRONT RADAR + FRONT CAMERA) (IF EQUIPPED)

The Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian or cyclists (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system:

• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or whilst cornering.
  • Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. FCA does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the FCA by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting:
  "User Settings → Driver assistance → Forward safety"
• If you select "Active assist", the FCA system activates. The FCA produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.
• If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.
• If you select "Off", the FCA system deactivates,

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the FCA system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is turned off. If the warning light remains ON when the FCA is activated, we recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.

Go to the "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing → Normal/Later".

The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated sensitively. If you feel the warning activates too early, set the Forward Collision Warning to 'Later'.

Even though, 'Normal' is selected if the front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not seem fast.

- Later:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Select 'Later' when traffic is light and when driving speed is slow.

* If you change the warning timing, the warning timing of other systems may change.

Always be aware of warning timing before changing the warning timing.

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA gets ready to be activated, when the FCA is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied.

• The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is on.
• Vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) (The FCA is only activated within a certain speed range.).
• The system detects a pedestrian, cyclist (if equipped) or a vehicle in front, which may collide with your vehicle (The FCA may not be activated or may sound a warning alarm in accordance with the driving situation or vehicle condition. If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels.).
  * The FCA may not operate properly according to the frontal situation, the direction of pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) and speed.

WARNING

• Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate/deactivate the FCA system.
• The FCA automatically activates upon placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position. The driver can deactivate the FCA by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.
• The FCA automatically deactivates upon canceling the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). When the ESC is cancelled, the FCA cannot be activated on the LCD display. The FCA warning light will illuminate which is normal.

FCA warning message and system control

The FCA produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehicle in front, insufficient braking distance, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include Normal or Late initial warning time.

If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Collision Warning (First warning)

OTM058047R

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

• Your vehicle speed may decelerate moderately.
• The FCA system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision.

- If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Emergency braking (Second warning)

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision. The brake control is maximised just before a collision.

- If you select "Warning only", the FCA system activates and produces only warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels. You should control the brake directly because the FCA system do not control the brake.

Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver's depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.
• The FCA brake control is automatically cancelled, when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION

The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the FCA system.

WARNING

The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the FCA system.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive dangerously to activate the system.

FCA sensor

Front view of a modern electric car with visible grille and headlights (no text or symbols)

Front view of a silver SUV on a road with two other vehicles in the background (no visible text or symbols)

In order for the FCA system to operate properly, always make sure the sensor cover or sensor is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris.

Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

NOTICE

• Do not apply license plate molding or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.
  • Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the FCA system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the FCA system may not operate properly. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Use only genuine parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

NOTICE

• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windscreen, nor tint the front windscreen.
• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

i Information

We recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer when:

• The windscreen glass is replaced.
- The radar sensor or cover gets damaged or replaced.

Warning message and warning light

OTM058143R

FCA disabled (Forward Collision Avoidance Assist). Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating the FCA system.

The system will operate normally when such dirt, snow or debris is removed.

The FCA may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the engine.

WARNING

The FCA system may not activate according to the road conditions, inclement weather, driving conditions of traffic conditions.

OTM058142R

FCA disabled (Forward Collision Avoidance Assist). Camera obscured When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the front camera before operating the FCA system.

The system will operate normally when such dirt, snow or debris is removed.

The FCA may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the engine.

System malfunction

OIK058091R

Check FCA (Check Forward Collision Avoidance Asst.)

• When the FCA is not working properly, the FCA warning light (✗) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light (✗) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• The FCA warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light.

WARNING

• The FCA is only a supplemental system for the driver's convenience. The driver should hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the FCA system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.
• In certain instances and under certain driving conditions, the FCA system may activate unintentionally. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.
  Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) ahead. The FCA system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

• Even if there is any problem with the brake control function of the FCA system, the vehicle's basic braking performance will operate normally. However, brake control function for avoiding collision will not activate.
- If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system. Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
- The FCA system may activate during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the passengers. Always keep loose objects secured.
- The FCA system may not activate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a collision.
• The brake control may be insufficient, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.

• Occupants may get injured, if the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated FCA system. Pay extreme caution.
• The FCA system operates only to detect vehicles, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) in front of the vehicle.

WARNING

• The FCA system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.
• The FCA system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.
• The FCA system does not detect vehicles in the opposite lane.

• The FCA system does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.

• The FCA system cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead end street.)

• The FCA system cannot detect the cross traffic cyclist that are approaching.
  In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Limitations of the system

The Forward Collision Avoidance Assist (FCA) system is designed to monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sensor or the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) ahead. In these cases, the FCA system may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris
• The camera lens is contaminated due to tinted, filmed or coated windscreen, damaged glass, or stuck of foreign matter (sticker, bug, etc.) on the glass
• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electromagnetic waves
• There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor
• The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motorcycle etc.)

• The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)

• The camera's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)
• The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights or their rear lights does not turned ON or their rear lights are located unusually.
• The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel
• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare or head light of oncoming vehicle.

• The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

• The vehicle in front is driving erratically
• The vehicle is on unpaved or uneven rough surfaces, or road with sudden gradient changes.
• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances as a construction zone, railroad, etc.
• The vehicle drives inside a building, such as a basement parking lot
• The camera does not recognise the entire vehicle in front.
  • The camera is damaged.
• The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel.

• The shadow is on the road by a median strip, trees, etc.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-gate.

• The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed.
• The rear part of the vehicle in front is not normally visible. (the vehicle turns in other direction or the vehicle is overturned.)
• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations whilst driving
• The sensor recognition changes suddenly when passing over a speed bump
• The vehicle in front is moving vertically to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped vertically
• The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing
• You are on a roundabout and the vehicle in front circles

Top-down view of a curved road with two cars, one highlighted by blue bounding boxes (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system may be limited when driving on a curved road.

On curved roads, the other vehicle on the same lane is not recognised and the FCA system's performance may be degraded. This may result in unnecessary alarm or braking or no alarm or braking when necessary.

Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle travelling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down illustration of a car being towed from a curved road, with no visible text or symbols

OTM058073R OTM058002R OTM058074R

Two cars on a hillside, one white and one blue, with a triangular light source above them (no text or symbols on the cars or background)

The FCA system may recognise a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnecessarily alarm the driver and apply the brake.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the system from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle.

Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of FCA.

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreases whilst driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognising the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognises the vehicle in front whilst passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward whilst driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

Top-down diagram of a road with two cars, one moving toward a lane marked with an arrow (no text or symbols)

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the FCA system may not immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the FCA system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Two grayscale illustrations of a truck with a car, showing airflow or spray effects (no text or symbols)

• Detecting the vehicle in front of you If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required. The FCA system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians or cyclists (if equipped)

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian or cyclist is not fully detected by the camera recognition system, for example, if the pedestrian is leaning over or is not fully walking upright
• The pedestrian or cyclist is moving very quickly or appears abruptly in the camera detection area
- The pedestrian or cyclist is wearing clothing that easily blends into the background, making it difficult to be detected by the camera recognition system
- The outside lighting is too bright (e.g. when driving in bright sunlight or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g. when driving on a dark rural road at night)
- It is difficult to detect and distinguish the pedestrian or cyclist from other objects in the surroundings, for example, when there is a group of pedestrians, cyclists or a large crowd
• There is an item similar to a person's body structure

• The pedestrian or cyclist is small
- The pedestrian has impaired mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
- The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris
- Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera
- When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road
- The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare
- The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed
- The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations whilst driving
- When the pedestrian or cyclist suddenly interrupts in front of the vehicle
- When the cyclist in front is riding intersected with the driving direction

• When there is any other electromagnetic interference
• When the construction area, rail or other metal object is near the cyclist
• If the bicycle material is not reflected well on the radar

WARNING

• Do not use the Forward Collision avoidance Assist (FCA) system when towing a vehicle. Application of the FCA system whilst towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.

• Never try to test the operation of the FCA system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.
• If the front bumper, front glass, radar or camera have been replaced or repaired, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

In some instances, the FCA system may be cancelled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

BLIND-SPOT COLLISION WARNING (BCW) (IF EQUIPPED)

System description

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area.

1) Blind-Spot Area

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars, one marked with a blue dot (no text or symbols visible)

OTM058120R

The blind spot detection range varies relative to vehicle speed.

Note that if your vehicle is travelling much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.

2) Closing at high speed

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with two cars, one highlighted by a blue arrow (no text or symbols on the cars themselves)

The Lane Change Assist feature will alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert.

WARNING

• Always be aware of road conditions whilst driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System is operating.
- The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) is supplemental systems to assist you. Do not entirely rely on the systems. Always pay attention, whilst driving, for your safety.
- The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) is not substitutes for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehicle.

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

System setting and activation

System setting

- The driver can activate the system by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety"

- The BCW turns on and gets ready to be activated when 'Warning only' is selected. Then, if a vehicle approaches the driver's blind spot area a warning sounds.

- The system is deactivated and the indicator on the BCW button is extinguished when 'Off' is selected.

- If you press BCW button whilst 'Warning only' is selected the indicator on the button extinguishes and the system deactivates.

- If you press BCW button whilst the system is cancelled the indicator on the button illuminates and the system activates. In this case, the system returns to the state before the engine turned off.

When the system is initially turned on and when the engine is turned off then on again whilst the system is in activation, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.

- If the engine is turned off then on again, the system maintains the previous state.

- The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing"

- The options for the initial Blind-Spot Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Blind-Spot Collision Warning is activated normally. If this setting feels too sensitive change the option to 'later'.

The warning activation time may feel late if the side/rear vehicle abruptly accelerates.

- Later:

Select this warning activation time when the traffic is light and you are driving in a low speed. However, if you change the warning activation time, the warning activation time of vehicle's other system may also change. Check the warning activation time before changing it.

- The driver can select the warning volume of Blind-Spot Collision Warning in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning volume → High/Medium/Low" the warning volume of vehicle's other system may also change.

For more information refer to "LCD Display" in chapter 3.

Operating Conditions

The system enters the ready status, when following conditions are satisfied :

The vehicle speed is above about 20 mph (30 km/h).

Warning message and system control

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror and the head up display (if equipped).

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.

A: Warning sound

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system AND.
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror and the head up display (if equipped) will also blink. And a warning chime will sound.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert will be deactivated.

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.

WARNING

• The warning light on the outside rearview mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system.
  To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up.
• The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surroundings whilst driving.

CAUTION

• The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not the warning light on the outside rearview mirror illuminates or there is a warning alarm.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System warning sounds.
  • The warning of the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System may not sound whilst other system's warning sounds.

Detecting Sensor

Front view of a silver SUV with visible rear radar grille and headlights (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

Rear radar

The rear radars are the sensors inside the rear bumper for detecting the side/rear areas. Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

CAUTION

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.
  • Always keep the sensors clean.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the sensor component nor apply any impact on the sensor component.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Do not apply foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor or apply paint to the sensor area. Doing so may adversely affect the performance of the sensor.

OIK058092R

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) system disabled. Radar blocked

• This warning message may appear when :
• One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
• When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BCW switch and the system will turn off automatically.

Turn off the BCW and RCCW system (if equipped) when a trailer or carrier is installed.

• Press the BCW button (the indicator on the button extinguish)
• Deactivate the RCCW system by deselecting

"User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning)" (if equipped)

If you use BCW system, remove a trailer or carrier.

When the BCW cancelled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the BCW should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OIK058094R

Check BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning) system

If there is a problem with the BCW system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.
• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in a boot, abnormal tyre pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear bumper is high.

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-gate.
• The road pavement (or the peripheral ground) abnormally contains metallic components (i.e. possibly due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• Whilst going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.
• Driving on a narrow road where trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle or structure for an extended period of time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the guardrail or wall is in double structure.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.

• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• Whilst changing lanes.
• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is activated.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) malfunctions.
• The tyre pressure is low or a tyre is damaged.
  • The brake is reworked.

• The vehicle abruptly changes driving direction.
- The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.
• The vehicle sharply stops.
• Temperature is extremely low around the vehicle.
- The vehicle severely vibrates whilst driving over a bumpy road, uneven/bumpy road, or concrete patch.
- The vehicle drives on a slippery surface due to snow, water puddle, or ice.

Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with a blue lane overlay (no text or symbols)

• Driving on a curve

The BCW system may not operate properly when driving on a curved road. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with a blue lane overlay (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The BCW system may not operate properly when driving on a curved road. In certain instances the system may recognise a vehicle in the same lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Top-down view of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

- Driving where the road is merging/dividing

The BCW system may not operate properly when driving where the road is merging/dividing. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Two grayscale illustrations of cars on a hillside, one with a blue triangular light source and the other with a blue rectangular light source (no text or symbols)

- Driving on a slope

The may not operate properly when driving on a slope. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Also, in certain instances the system may wrongly recognise the ground or structures.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Two cars viewed from the side, one with a blue arrow pointing to the other (no visible text or symbols)

OTM058113OTM058112

- Driving where the heights of the lanes are different

The may not operate properly when driving where the heights of the lanes are different.

In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle on a road with different lane heights (underpass joining section, grade separated intersections, etc.).

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Illustration of a car at an electric vehicle charging station, showing front view and ground level (no text or symbols)

- Driving where there is a structure beside the road

The may not operate properly when driving where there is structure beside the road.

In certain instances, the system may wrongly recognise the structures (noise barriers, guardrail, double guardrail, median strip, bollard, street light, road sign, tunnel wall, etc.) beside the road.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

REAR CROSS-TRAFFIC COLLISION WARNING (RCCW) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

System description

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System

Top-down view of a car layout with blue circular design overlay, no text or symbols present

OTM058092

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System uses radar sensors to monitor the approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.

The blind spot detection range varies relative to the approaching vehicle speed.

WARNING

• Always be aware of road conditions whilst driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is operating.
- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is supplemental systems to assist you. Do not entirely rely on the systems. Always pay attention, whilst driving, for your safety.
- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is not substitutes for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when backing up the vehicle.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the systems by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → Rear cross-traffic safety'. The RCCW turns on and get ready to be activated when 'Rear cross-traffic safety' is selected.
• When the engine is turned off then on again, the systems always get ready to be activated.
• When the system is initially turned on and when the engine is turned off then on again, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing". The options for the initial Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning is activated normally. If this setting feels too sensitive change the option to 'late'.

The warning activation time may feel late if the side/rear vehicle abruptly accelerates.

- Later:

Select this warning activation time when the traffic is light and you are driving in a low speed. However, if you change the warning activation time, the warning activation time of vehicle's other system may also change. Check the warning activation time before changing it.

The driver can select the warning volume of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning volume → High/Medium/Low". However, if you change the warning volume, the warning volume of vehicle's other system may also change.

For more information refer to "LCD Display" in chapter 3.

Operating conditions

To operate:

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → Rear cross-traffic safety' on the LCD display. The system will turn on and standby to activate.

The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 7 mph (10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R (Reverse).

* The system will not activate when the vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (10 km/h). The system will activate again when the speed is below 7 mph (10 km/h).

The system's detecting range is approximately 0.5 m \~ 20 m (1 ft \~ 65 ft). An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 5 \~ 22.5 mph (8 \~ 36 km/h).

Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.

Warning message and system control

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System

If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches from the rear left/right side of your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display. If the rear view monitor system is in activation, a message will also appear on the audio or AVN screen.

The warning will stop when:

• The vehicle moving at the rear left/right side of your vehicle is not in the detection range.
• The vehicle is right behind your vehicle.
• The vehicle is not driving towards your vehicle.
• The vehicle's approaching speed is decreased.

CAUTION

• When the operation condition of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is satisfied the warning will occur every time a vehicle approaches the side/rear of your stopped (0 km/h vehicle speed) vehicle.
• The system's warning or brake may not operate properly if the left/right of your vehicle's rear bumper is blocked by a vehicle or obstacle.
• The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not the warning light on the outside rearview mirror illuminates or there is a warning alarm.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system's warning sounds.

• The warning of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System may not sound whilst other system's warning sounds.

WARNING

• Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System. Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding when backing the vehicle up.
• The driver is responsible for accurate brake control.
  • Always pay extreme caution whilst driving. The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System may not operate properly or unnecessarily operate in accordance with your driving situations.

- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

Detecting Sensor

Front view of a silver SUV with visible headlights and grille, no text or symbols on the vehicle itself

The rear radars are the sensors inside the rear bumper for detecting the side/rear areas. Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

CAUTION

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.
  • The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

• Always keep the sensors clean.
- NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the sensor component nor apply any impact on the sensor component.
- Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- Do not apply foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor or apply paint to the sensor area. Doing so may adversely affect the performance of the sensor.

OIK058092R

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) system disabled. Radar blocked

• This warning message may appear when:
- One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
- When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BCW switch and the system will turn off automatically.

When the BCW cancelled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the RCCW system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OIK058094R

Check BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning) system

If there is a problem with the BCW system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. RCCW will not operate also if the BCW system turns off due to malfunction. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.
• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.
  • The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in a boot, abnormal tyre pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear bumper is high.

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road.

• The road pavement (or the peripheral ground) abnormally contains metallic components (i.e. possibly due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• Whilst going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.
• Driving on a narrow road where trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the guardrail or wall is in double structure.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.
• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• Whilst changing lanes.

• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is activated.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) malfunctions.

• The tyre pressure is low or a tyre is damaged.
  • The brake is reworked.
  • The vehicle sharply stops.
  • Temperature is extremely low around the vehicle.

• The vehicle severely vibrates whilst driving over a bumpy road, uneven/bumpy road, or concrete patch.

• The vehicle drives on a slippery surface due to snow, water puddle, or ice.

graph TD
    A["Top Left Car"] --> B["Top Right Car"]
    B --> C["Bottom Left Car"]
    B --> D["Bottom Right Car"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["Top Left Car"] --> B["Top Right Car"]
    B --> C["Bottom Left Car"]
    C --> D["Bottom Right Car"]
    D --> E["Bottom Left Car"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

- Driving where there is a vehicle or structure near

The system may not operate properly when driving where there is a vehicle or structure near.

In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from behind and the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

- When the vehicle is in a complex parking environment

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is in a complex parking environment.

In certain instances, the system may not be able to exactly determine the risk of collision for the vehicles which are parking or pulling out near your vehicle (e.g. a vehicle escaping beside your vehicle, a vehicle parking or pulling out in the rear area, a vehicle approaching your vehicle making a turn, etc.).

In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Top-down view of a car parking lot with blue arrows indicating movement or flow, no text or symbols present.

- When the vehicle is parked diagonally

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is parked diagonally.

In certain instances, when the diagonally parked vehicle is pulled out of the parking space, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from the rear left/right of your vehicle. In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

Two cars on a slope with one emitting a blue light beam, no visible text or symbols

• When the vehicle is on/near a slope

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is on/near a slope.

In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from the rear left/right and the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

- Pulling into the parking space where there is a structure

The system may not operate properly when pulling in the vehicle to the parking space where there is a structure at the back or side of your vehicle.

In certain instances, when backing into the parking space, the system may not detect the vehicle moving in front of your vehicle. In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to the parking space whilst driving.

Top-down diagram showing a car with blue and white segments, indicating navigation or perspective (no text or symbols)

• When the vehicle is parked rearward

If the vehicle is parked rearward and the sensor detects the another vehicle in the rear area of the parking space, the system can warn or control braking. Always pay attention to the parking space whilst driving.

BLIND-SPOT COLLISION WARNING (BCW)/BLIND-SPOT COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (BCA) (IF EQUIPPED)

System description

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area.

1) Blind-Spot Area

Top-down view of a multi-lane road intersection with two cars, one marked with a blue dot (no text or symbols on the vehicles)

The blind spot detection range varies relative to vehicle speed.

Note that if your vehicle is travelling much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.

2) Closing at high speed

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with two cars, one highlighted by a blue arrow (no text or symbols on the cars themselves)

The Lane Change Assist feature will alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert.

Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist (BCA)

The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) detects the front lane through the camera installed on the upper front wind-screen and detects the side/rear areas through radar sensors.

The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System may activate the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in accordance with a colliding possibility with an approaching vehicle whilst changing lanes. It is to lower the colliding risk or mitigate the colliding damage.

WARNING

• Always be aware of road conditions whilst driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System and Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System are operating.
- The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) and Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) are supplemental systems to assist you. Do not entirely rely on the systems. Always pay attention, whilst driving, for your safety.
- The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) and Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) are not substitutes for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehicle.

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW) and Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the system by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety"
• The BCA and BCW turn on and get ready to be activated when 'Active assist' is selected. Then, if a vehicle approaches the driver's blind spot area a warning sounds or braking power is applied.
• The BCW turns on and gets ready to be activated when 'Warning only' is selected. Then, if a vehicle approaches the driver's blind spot area a warning sounds.
• The system is deactivated and the indicator on the BCW/BCA button is extinguished when 'Off' is selected.

- If you press BCW/BCA button whilst 'Active assist' or 'Warning only' is selected the indicator on the button extinguishes and the system deactivates.

• If you press BCW/BCA button whilst the system is cancelled the indicator on the button illuminates and the system activates. In this case, the system returns to the state before the engine turned off. When the system is initially turned on and when the engine is turned off then on again whilst the system is in activation, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.
• If the engine is turned off then on again, the system maintains the previous state.
• The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing"

- The options for the initial Blind-Spot Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Blind-Spot Collision Warning is activated normally. If this setting feels too sensitive change the option to 'later'.

The warning activation time may feel late if the side/rear vehicle abruptly accelerates.

- Later:

Select this warning activation time when the traffic is light and you are driving in a low speed. However, if you change the warning activation time, the warning activation time of vehicle's other system may also change. Check the warning activation time before changing it.

- The driver can select the warning volume of Blind-Spot Collision Warning in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning volume → High/Medium/Low" the warning volume of vehicle's other system may also change.

For more information refer to "LCD Display" in chapter 3.

Operating Conditions

The system enters the ready status, when the 'Active assist' or 'Warning only' is selected and following conditions are satisfied:

- Select the "Active assist"

1) The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System will activate when

- Vehicle speed is between 37 mph and 112 mph (60 km/h \~ 180 km/h).

- The system detects both of the lane lines.

- An approaching vehicle is detected next to/behind your vehicle.

2) The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System will activate when The vehicle speed is above about 20 mph (30 km/h).

- Select the "Warning only"

1) The Blind-Spot Collision Warning System will activate when

- The vehicle speed is above about 20 mph (30 km/h)

* The Blind-Spot Collision- Avoidance Assist System is not activated.

Warning message and system control

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror and the head up display (if equipped).

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.

A: Warning sound

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system AND.
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror and the head up display (if equipped) will also blink. And a warning chime will sound.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert will be deactivated.

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.

WARNING

• The warning light on the outside rearview mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system.
  To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Blind-Spot Collision Warning System (BCW). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up.
• The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surroundings whilst driving.

CAUTION

• The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not the warning light on the outside rearview mirror illuminates or there is a warning alarm.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System warning sounds.
• The warning of the Blind-Spot Collision Warning System may not sound whilst other system's warning sounds.

Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist (BCA) system

OTM058084R/OTM058083R

The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) may apply braking power, when an approaching vehicle is detected within a certain distance next to/behind your vehicle. It gently applies braking power on the tyre, which is located in the opposite side of the possibly-colliding point. The instrument cluster will inform the driver of the system activation.

Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System (BCA) is automatically deactivated when:

• The vehicle drives a certain distance away
• The vehicle direction is changed against the possible-colliding point
• The steering wheel is abruptly moved

- The brake pedal is depressed

- After a certain period of time

The driver should drive the vehicle in the middle of the vehicle lanes to keep the system in the ready status.

When the vehicle drives too close to one side of the vehicle lanes, the system may not properly operate.

In addition, the system may not properly control your vehicle in accordance with driving situations. Thus, always pay close attention to road situations.

WARNING

• The driver is responsible for accurate steering.
- Do not unnecessarily operate the steering wheel, when the Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System is in operation.
• Always pay extreme caution whilst driving. The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System may not operate or unnecessarily operate in accordance with your driving situations.
• The Blind-Spot Collision-Avoidance Assist System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

Detecting Sensor (Camera and Radar)

Front view of a silver SUV on a road with visible sensor or camera overlay (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

Front view of a silver SUV with visible rear radar grille and headlights (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

Front camera

The front camera is a sensor detecting the lane. If the sensor is covered with snow, rain or foreign substance, the system may temporarily be cancelled and not work properly until the cancellation due to the degradation of the sensor's detection performance. Always keep the sensor clean.

* Refer to Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System for cautions for the front camera sensor.

Rear radar

The rear radars are the sensors inside the rear bumper for detecting the side/rear areas. Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

CAUTION

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.
  • Always keep the sensors clean.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the sensor component nor apply any impact on the sensor component.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Do not apply foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor or apply paint to the sensor area. Doing so may adversely affect the performance of the sensor.
• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windscreen, nor tint the front windscreen.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera sensor out of water.
• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the crash pad. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.

OIK058092R

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) system disabled. Radar blocked

- This warning message may appear when :

• One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
• When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BCW switch and the system will turn off automatically.

Turn off the BCW, BCA and RCCW system (if equipped) when a trailer or carrier is installed.

• Press the BCW/BCA button (the indicator on the button extinguish)
• Deactivate the RCCW system by deselecting
  "User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning)" (if equipped)
  If you use BCW and BCA system, remove a trailer or carrier.

When the BCW cancelled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the BCA should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OIK058094R

Check BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning) system

If there is a problem with the BCW system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. BCA will not operate also if the BCW system turns off due to malfunction. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OTM058087R

Check BCA (Blind-Spot Collision) system

If there is a problem with the BCA system, a warning message will appear. The system will turn off automatically. BCW will still operate even if the BCA system turns off due to malfunction. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer to use BCA system.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.
• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in a boot, abnormal tyre pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear bumper is high.

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-gate.
• The road pavement (or the peripheral ground) abnormally contains metallic components (i.e. possibly due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• Whilst going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.
• Driving on a narrow road where trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle or structure for an extended period of time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the guardrail or wall is in double structure.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.

• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• Whilst changing lanes.
• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you.
  • A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
  • ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is activated.
  • ESC (Electronic Stability Control) malfunctions.
• The tyre pressure is low or a tyre is damaged.
  • The brake is reworked.

• The vehicle abruptly changes driving direction.
• The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.
• The vehicle sharply stops.
• Temperature is extremely low around the vehicle.
- The vehicle severely vibrates whilst driving over a bumpy road, uneven/bumpy road, or concrete patch.
- The vehicle drives on a slippery surface due to snow, water puddle, or ice.
- The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) or Lane Departure Warning (LDW) do not operate normally. (if equipped) For more information refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in this chapter.

Top-down view of a car on a curved road with two blue cars, one partially covered by a blue rectangular obstacle (no text or symbols)

• Driving on a curve

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving on a curved road. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with a blue sensor or sensor overlay (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Top-down view of two cars on a road with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving on a curved road. In certain instances the system may recognise a vehicle in the same lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

- Driving where the road is merging/dividing

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving where the road is merging/dividing. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Two grayscale illustrations of cars with a blue light beam projecting onto their surfaces, no text or symbols present.

- Driving on a slope

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving on a slope. In certain instances the system may not detect the vehicle in the next lane.

Also, in certain instances the system may wrongly recognise the ground or structures.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

Two silver SUVs on a gray background, one with a blue arrow pointing to the other (no visible text or symbols)

OTM058113 OTM058114L

Illustration of a car at an electric vehicle charging station, showing front and side views (no text or symbols)

- Driving where the heights of the lanes are different

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving where the heights of the lanes are different. In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle on a road with different lane heights (underpass joining section, grade separated intersections, etc.).

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

- Driving where there is a structure beside the road

The BCW and BCA systems may not operate properly when driving where there is structure beside the road.

In certain instances, the system may wrongly recognise the structures (noise barriers, guardrail, double guardrail, median strip, bollard, street light, road sign, tunnel wall, etc.) beside the road.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, whilst driving.

REAR CROSS-TRAFFIC COLLISION WARNING (RCCW) SYSTEM / REAR CROSS-TRAFFIC COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST(RCCA) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

System description

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System

Top-down view of a car layout with blue overlay shapes, no text or symbols present

OTM058092

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System uses radar sensors to monitor the approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.

The blind spot detection range varies relative to the approaching vehicle speed.

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist (RCCA) System

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist (RCCA) System monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is approaching.

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist (RCCA) System may activate the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in accordance with a colliding possibility with an approaching vehicle. It is to lower the colliding risk or mitigate the colliding damage.

WARNING

• Always be aware of road conditions whilst driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System and Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System are operating.
- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System and Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System are supplemental systems to assist you. Do not entirely rely on the systems. Always pay attention, whilst driving, for your safety.
- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System and Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System are not substitutes for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when backing up the vehicle.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the systems by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → Rear Cross-traffic safety'. The RCCA and RCCW turn on and get ready to be activated when Rear cross-traffic safety is selected.
• When the engine is turned off then on again, the systems always get ready to be activated.
• When the system is initially turned on and when the engine is turned off then on again, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning timing". The options for the initial Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning includes the following:

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning is activated normally. If this setting feels too sensitive change the option to 'late'.

The warning activation time may feel late if the side/rear vehicle abruptly accelerates.

- Later:

Select this warning activation time when the traffic is light and you are driving in a low speed. However, if you change the warning activation time, the warning activation time of vehicle's other system may also change. Check the warning activation time before changing it.

The driver can select the warning volume of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning by selecting "User Settings → Driver assistance → Warning volume → High/Medium/Low". However, if you change the warning volume, the warning volume of vehicle's other system may also change.

For more information refer to "LCD Display" in chapter 3.

Operating conditions

To operate:

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Blind-spot safety → Rear cross-traffic safety' on the LCD display. The system will turn on and standby to activate.

The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 7 mph (10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R (Reverse).

* The system will not activate when the vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (10 km/h). The system will activate again when the speed is below 7 mph (10 km/h).

The system's detecting range is approximately 0.5 m \~ 20 m (1 ft \~ 65 ft). An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 5 \~ 22.5 mph (8 \~ 36 km/h).

Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.

Warning message and system control

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW) System

If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches from the rear left/right side of your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display. If the rear view monitor system is in activation, a message will also appear on the audio or AVN screen.

The warning will stop when:

• The vehicle moving at the rear left/right side of your vehicle is not in the detection range.
• The vehicle is right behind your vehicle.
• The vehicle is not driving towards your vehicle.
• The vehicle's approaching speed is decreased.

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance (RCCA) System

If the risk of collision is detected whilst the RCCW is generated, brake is controlled. The instrument cluster will inform the driver of the brake control. If the rear view monitor system is in activation, a message will also appear on the audio or AVN screen.

After the brake control the driver must immediately depress the brake pedal and check the surroundings.

- The brake activation by the system lasts for about 2 seconds only.

The driver must pay attention as the brake is disengaged after the time.

- The brake control by the system is cancelled if the driver depresses the pedal with sufficient power.

- Brake control is activated once for each right/left approach after shifting the shift lever to R (Reverse).

The brake control may not operate properly according to the status of the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). The same warning message is displayed on the instrument cluster for this case also.

• When the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light is on.
• When the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is engaged in a different function.

CAUTION

• When the operation condition of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System is satisfied the warning will occur every time a vehicle approaches the side/rear of your stopped (0 km/h vehicle speed) vehicle.

• The system's warning or brake may not operate properly if the left/right of your vehicle's rear bumper is blocked by a vehicle or obstacle.

• The driver should always use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle, whether or not the warning light on the outside rearview mirror illuminates or there is a warning alarm.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system's warning sounds.
• The warning of the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System may not sound whilst other system's warning sounds.

WARNING

• Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System and Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System. Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding when backing the vehicle up.

• The driver is responsible for accurate brake control.
• Always pay extreme caution whilst driving. The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning System and Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System may not operate properly or unnecessarily operate in accordance with your driving situations.
- The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision-Avoidance Assist System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

Detecting Sensor

Front view of a silver SUV with visible headlights and grille, no text or symbols on the car body

The rear radars are the sensors inside the rear bumper for detecting the side/rear areas. Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

CAUTION

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.
• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

• Always keep the sensors clean.
- NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the sensor component nor apply any impact on the sensor component.
- Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- Do not apply foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor or apply paint to the sensor area. Doing so may adversely affect the performance of the sensor.

OIK058092R

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) system disabled.

Radar blocked

• This warning message may appear when:
• One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
• When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BCW switch and the system will turn off automatically.

When the BCW cancelled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the RCCA system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OIK058094R

Check BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning) system

If there is a problem with the BCW system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. RCCW and RCCA will not operate also if the BCW system turns off due to malfunction. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.
• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in a boot, abnormal tyre pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear bumper is high.

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road.

• The road pavement (or the peripheral ground) abnormally contains metallic components (i.e. possibly due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• Whilst going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.
• Driving on a narrow road where trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the guardrail or wall is in double structure.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.
• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• Whilst changing lanes.

• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is activated.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) malfunctions.

• The tyre pressure is low or a tyre is damaged.
  • The brake is reworked.
  • The vehicle sharply stops.
  • Temperature is extremely low around the vehicle.

• The vehicle severely vibrates whilst driving over a bumpy road, uneven/bumpy road, or concrete patch.

• The vehicle drives on a slippery surface due to snow, water puddle, or ice.

graph TD
    A["Top Left Car"] --> B["Top Right Car"]
    B --> C["Bottom Left Car"]
    C --> D["Bottom Right Car"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f96,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#9cf,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["Top Lane"] --> B["Left Car"]
    B --> C["Right Car"]
    C --> D["Bottom Lane"]
    D --> E["Left Car"]
    E --> F["Right Car"]
    F --> G["Bottom Lane"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#bfb,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffb,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fbb,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fbb,stroke:#333

- Driving where there is a vehicle or structure near

The system may not operate properly when driving where there is a vehicle or structure near.

In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from behind and the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

- When the vehicle is in a complex parking environment

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is in a complex parking environment.

In certain instances, the system may not be able to exactly determine the risk of collision for the vehicles which are parking or pulling out near your vehicle (e.g. a vehicle escaping beside your vehicle, a vehicle parking or pulling out in the rear area, a vehicle approaching your vehicle making a turn, etc.).

In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Top-down view of a car parking lot with blue and white vehicles, showing directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

- When the vehicle is parked diagonally

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is parked diagonally.

In certain instances, when the diagonally parked vehicle is pulled out of the parking space, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from the rear left/right of your vehicle. In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

Two cars on a slope with one emitting a blue light beam, no visible text or symbols

- When the vehicle is on/near a slope

The system may not operate properly when the vehicle is on/near a slope.

In certain instances, the system may not detect the vehicle approaching from the rear left/right and the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to your surrounding whilst driving.

- Pulling into the parking space where there is a structure

The system may not operate properly when pulling in the vehicle to the parking space where there is a structure at the back or side of your vehicle.

In certain instances, when backing into the parking space, the system may not detect the vehicle moving in front of your vehicle. In this case, the warning or brake may not operate properly.

Always pay attention to the parking space whilst driving.

Top-down diagram showing a blue car approaching a parking lot with two cars, one moving right and one moving down (no text or symbols)

- When the vehicle is parked rearward

If the vehicle is parked rearward and the sensor detects the another vehicle in the rear area of the parking space, the system can warn or control braking. Always pay attention to the parking space whilst driving.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Illustration of a silver SUV on a road with a white car in the background (no visible text or symbols)

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system with a camera at the front windscreen, helps detect lane markers and road edge on the road, and assists the driver's steering to help keep the vehicle between lanes.

When the system detects the vehicle straying from its land (or road), it alerts the driver with a visual and audible warning, whilst applying a counter-steering torque, trying to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its land (or road).

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the surrounding and steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system:

• Do not steer the steering wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assisted by the system.

• LKA system helps to prevent the driver from moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.

• The operation of the LKA system can be cancelled or not work properly according to road condition and surroundings. Always be cautious when driving.

• Do not disassemble the LKA system camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked for calibration.

• When you replace the wind-screen glass, LKA system camera or related parts of the steering wheel, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked for calibration.

• The system detects lane markers (or road edge) and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane markers (or road edge) are hard to detect, the system may not work properly.
  Please refer to "Limitations of the system".

• Do not remove or damage the related parts of LKA system.
• You may not hear a warning sound of LKA system because of excessive audio sound.
• Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if the sunlight is reflected.

• Always have your hands on the steering wheel whilst the LKA system is activated. If you continue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Keep hands on steering wheel" warning message appears, the system will stop control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel is not continuously controlled so if the vehicle speed is at a higher rate when leaving a lane (or road edge) the vehicle may not be controlled by the system. The driver must always follow the speed limit when using the system.

• If you attach objects to the steering wheel, the system may not assist steering or the hands off alarm may not work properly.
• When you tow a trailer, make sure that you turn off the LKA system.

LKA operation

To activate/deactivate the LKA system:

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the LKA system button located on the instrument panel at the lower right hand side of the driver.

The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LKA system is in the READY but NOT ENABLED state.

Note that the vehicle speed must be at least approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) to ENABLE the

LKA system. The indicator in the cluster display will illuminate green.

The colour of indicator will change depending on the condition of LKA system.

• White: Sensor does not detect lane markers or vehicle speed is under 37 mph (60 km/h).
• Green : Sensor detects lane markers and the system is able to control vehicle steering.

i Information

The LKA automatically activates upon placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position. The switch indicator will be on and the indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. The driver can deactivate the LKA by pushing LKA switch located on the instrument panel on the lower right hand side of the driver or LDW selecting from the User Settings Mode on the LCD display.

LKA activation

OTM058064R

• To see the LKA system screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode (A) For more details, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
• After LKA is activated, if lane marker is detected, vehicle speed is over 37 mph (60 km/h) and all the activation conditions are satisfied, a green LKA indicator will change to green and the steering wheel will be controlled.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane (or road edge). However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road conditions when driving.

■ Lane marker undetected

■ Lane marker detected

OTM058064R/OTM058065R

• If vehicle speed is over 37 mph (60 km/h) and the system detects lane markers, the colour changes from gray to white.
• If the system detects the left lane marker, the left lane marker colour will change from gray to white.
• If the system detects the right lane marker, the right lane marker colour will change from gray to white.
• If your vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h) and the LKA system button is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the projected lane in front of you, the LKA system operates as follows:

■ Left lane marker

■ Right lane marker

OTM058066R/OTM058067R

A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane marker or the right lane marker in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering.

■ Lane Keeping Assist is enabled

OTM058065R

• The LKA system will control the vehicle's steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane maker in below conditions.
• Vehicle speed is over 37 mph (60 km/h)
• The system detects both lanes (or road edge)
• When driving, the vehicle is located between both lanes normally.
• The steering wheel is not turned suddenly.

When lanes (or road edge) are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKA system are satisfied, a LKA system indicator light will change from white to green. This indicates that the LKA system is in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will be able to be controlled.

OIK057119L

Keep hands on steering wheel If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for several seconds whilst the LKA system is activated, the system will warn the driver.

i Information

If the steering wheel is held very lightly the message may still appear because the LKA system may not recognise that the driver has their hands on the wheel.

WARNING

The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel whilst driving.

OIK058120R

Driver's hands not detected. LKA system is disabled temporarily

If the driver still does not have their hands on the steering wheel after the message "Keep hands on steering wheel", the system will not control the steering wheel and warn the driver only when the driver crosses the lane marker (or road edge).

However, if the driver has their hands on the steering wheel again, the system will start controlling the steering wheel.

WARNING

• The driver is responsible for accurate steering.
- Turn off the system and drive the vehicle in following situations.
- In bad weather
- In poor road condition
- When the steering wheel needs to be controlled by the driver frequently.

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted by the system, the driver may control the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is assisted by the system than when it is not.

Warning light and message Check LKA system

OIK058121R

If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LKA system failure indicator will illuminate.

LKA system failure indicator

The LKA system failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate if the LKA system is not working properly. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When there is a problem with the system do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning the engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The LKA system will not be in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will not be assisted when:

• The turn signal is turned on before changing a lane. If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steering wheel might be controlled.
• The vehicle is not driven in the middle of the lane when the system is turned on or right after changing a lane.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or VSM (Vehicle Stability Management) is activated.
• The vehicle is driven on a sharp curve.
• Vehicle speed is below 34 mph (55 km/h) and over 112 mph (180 km/h).
• The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.
• The steering will not be assisted when you across the lane (or road edge) fast.
• The steering will not be assisted when you brake suddenly.
  • The vehicle brakes suddenly.
• Only one lane marker is detected.

5-151

• The steering will not be assisted when the lane (or road width) is very wide or narrow.
• There are more than two lane markers such as a construction area.
• The vehicle is driven on a steep incline.
• The steering wheel is turned suddenly.

Limitations of the System

The LKA system may operate prematurely even if the vehicle does not depart from the intended lane, OR, the LKA system may not assist your steering or warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under the following circumstances:

When the lane and road conditions are poor

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane marker (or road edge) from the road surface or the lane marker (or road edge) is faded or not clearly marked.

• It is difficult to distinguish the colour of the lane marker from the road.

• There are markings on the road surface that look like a lane marker that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

• The lane marker is indistinct or damaged.
• The lane marker (or road edge) is merged or divided. (e.g. tollgate)
• The lane number increases or decreases or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly.
  • There are more than two lane markers on the road in front of you.
• The lane marker is very thick or thin.
• The lane (or road width) is very wide or narrow.
• The lane marker (or road edge) ahead are not visible due to rain, snow, water on the road, damaged or stained road surface, or other factors.
• The shadow is on the lane marker (or road edge) by a median strip, trees, etc.

• The lanes are incomplete or the area is in a construction zone.

• There are crosswalk signs or other symbols on the road.

• The lane marker (or road edge) in a tunnel is stained with oil, etc.
• The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.

When external condition is intervened

• The brightness outside changes suddenly such as when entering or exiting a tunnel, or when passing under a bridge.
• The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel.
• There is a boundary structure in the roadway such as a concrete barrier, guardrail and reflector post that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.
• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road.

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare.

• There is not enough distance between you and the vehicle in front to be able to detect the lane marker (or road edge) or the vehicle ahead is driving on the lane marker (or road edge).

• Road surface is not evenness.
• Driving on a steep grade, over a hill, or when driving on a curved road.
• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations whilst driving.
• The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct sunlight, etc.

When front visibility is poor

• The windscreen or the LKA camera lens is blocked with dirt or debris.
• The windscreen glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed.
• Placing objects on the dashboard, etc.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane (or road edge) because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

LKA system function change

The driver can change LKA to the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system or change the LKA system mode from the LCD display. Go to the "User Settings → Driver assistance → Lane safety → LKA (Lane keeping assist)/LDW (Lane departure warning)/Off".

The system is automatically set to Lane Keeping Assist(LKA) if a function is not selected.

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

This mode guides the driver to help keep the vehicle within the lanes. It rarely controls the steering wheel, when the vehicle drives well inside the lanes. However, it starts to control the steering wheel, when the vehicle is about to deviate out of the lane.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

LDW system alerts the driver with a visual warning and a warning alarm when the system detects the vehicle departing the lane. The steering wheel will not be controlled.

Off

If you select "Off", the LKA system is deactivated.

DRIVER ATTENTION WARNING (DAW) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system displays the condition of the driver's fatigue level and inattentive driving practices.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system is set to be in the ON position, when your vehicle is first delivered to you from the factory.

• To turn ON the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system, turn on the engine, and then select "User Settings → Driver assistance → DAW (Driver attention warning) → High Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity" on the LCD display.

• The driver can select the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system mode.

• Off : The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system is deactivated.
• Normal Sensitivity : The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system alerts the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices.
• High Sensitivity : The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system alerts the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices faster than Normal mode.
• The set-up of the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system will be maintained, as selected, when the engine is re-started.

Display of the driver's attention level

■ Inattentive driving

OIK057131L

• The driver can monitor their driving conditions on the LCD display. The DAW screen will appear when you select the ASSIST mode tab ( ) on the LCD display if the system is activated. (For more details, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.)
• The driver's attention level is displayed on the scale of 1 to 5. The lower the level is, the more inattentive the driver is.
• The level decreases when the driver does not take a break for a certain period of time.
• The level increases when the driver attentively drives for a certain period of time.

- When the driver turns on the system whilst driving, it displays 'Last Break time' and level.

Take a break

OPDE056063

• The "Consider taking a break" message appears on the LCD display and a warning sounds in order to suggest the driver to take a break, when the driver's attention level is below 1.
• The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system does not suggest the driver to take a break, when the total driving time is shorter than 10 minutes.

Resetting the system

• The last break time is set to 00:00 and the driver's attention level is set to 5 (very attentive) when the driver resets the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system.

• The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system resets the last break time to 00:00 and the driver's attention level to 5 in the following situations.

• The engine is turned OFF.

• The driver unfastens the seat belt and then opens the driver's door.
• The vehicle is stopped for more than 10 minutes.

- The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system operates again, when the driver restarts driving.

System standby

OIK057133L OIK058134R

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system enters the ready status and displays the 'Disabled' screen in the following situations.

• The camera does not detect the lane.
• Driving speed remains under 37 mph (60 km/h) or over 112 mph (180 km/h).

System malfunction

Check Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

When the "Check Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system" warning message appears, the system is not working properly. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
• The system may suggest a break according to the driver's driving pattern or habits even if the driver doesn't feel fatigue.
• The driver, who feels fatigued, should take a break, even though there is no break suggestion by the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system.

NOTICE

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system utilizes the camera sensor on the front windscreen for its operation. To keep the camera sensor in the best condition, you should observe the followings:

• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windscreen, nor tint the front windscreen.
• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera sensor out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

- Do not disassemble the camera temporarily for tinted window or attaching any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble a camera and assemble it again, we recommend that you take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked for calibration.

CAUTION

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system may not properly operate with limited alerting in the following situations:

• The lane detection performance is limited. (For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in this chapter.)

• The vehicle is violently driven or is abruptly turned for obstacle avoidance (e.g. construction area, other vehicles, fallen objects, bumpy road).

• Forward drivability of the vehicle is severely undermined (possibly due to wide variation in tyre pressures, uneven tyre wear-out, toe-in/toe-out alignment).

• The vehicle drives on a curvy road.
• The vehicle drives through a windy area.
  • The vehicle drives on a bumpy road.
• The vehicle is controlled by the following driving assist systems:
• Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system
• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system
• Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system

CAUTION

Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system warning sounds.

SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Speed Limit Control operation

You can set the speed limit when you do not want to drive over a specific speed.

If you drive over the preset speed limit, the warning system operates (set speed limit will blink and chime will sound) until the vehicle speed returns within the speed limit.

i Information

Whilst speed limit control is in operation, the cruise control system cannot be activated.

Speed limit control switch

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel with logo and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

To set speed limit

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a close-up of the dashboard showing a blue arrow (no text or symbols visible)

OTM058160L OTM058037L

MODE: Changes mode between cruise control system and speed limit control system.

graph TD
    A["System off Cruise Control / Smart Cruise Control"] --> B["Speed Limit Control"]
    B --> A

RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit control speed.

O (Cancel): Cancels set speed limit.

1. Press the Button to turn the system on. The speed limit indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel with logo and a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

1. Push the toggle switch down (SET-).

2. Push the toggle switch up To turn off the speed limit control, do one of the following:

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-) and hold it. The speed will increase or decrease by 3 mph (5 km/h).

The set speed limit will display on the instrument cluster.

If you would like to drive over the pre-set speed limit when you depress the accelerator pedal less than approximately 50%, the vehicle speed will maintain within speed limit.

However if you depress the accelerator pedal more than approximately 70%, you can drive over the speed limit. Then the set speed limit will blink and chime will sound until you return the vehicle speed within the speed limit.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted dashboard and directional arrow (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- Press the OUTMODE

- If you press O (cancel) button once, the set speed limit will cancel, but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume the speed limit, push the +RES or SET- toggle switch on your steering wheel to your desired speed.

INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMIT WARNING (ISLW) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Illustration of a silver SUV with blue visor on a road, no visible text or symbols

The ISLW displays the speed limit information and overtaking restriction of current road and detail conditional through the instrument cluster and the navigation. The ISLW reads the traffic signs through the camera, which is attached on the upper part of the inner front windscreen.

The ISLW also utilises the navigation and vehicle information to display the speed limit information.

WARNING

• Intelligent Speed Limit Warning (ISLW) system is only a supplemental system and is not always able to correctly display speed limits and overtaking restrictions.
• The driver still holds the responsibility not to exceed the maximum speed limit.
• Do not install any accessories and stickers. Do not tint the front windscreen, especially near the rearview mirror.
• The ISLW detects the traffic signs through the camera to display the speed limit information.

Therefore, the ISLW may not properly operate, when it is hard to detect the traffic signs. For further details, please refer to the "Limitations of the system".

- Pay extreme caution to keep the camera sensor out of water.

• Do not arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.
• Do not disassemble camera temporarily for tinted window or attaching any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble a camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked to need a calibration.
• Do not locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction system.
• The system is not available in all countries.

i Information

We recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer when:

• The windscreen glass is replaced.
- The camera or related parts are repaired or removed.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the Speed Limit Warning by selecting 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Driving assist → ISLW (Speed Limit Warning)'.
• When the ISLW is activated, the symbols appear on the instrument cluster to display the speed limit information and overtaking restriction.
• When the ISLW is activated in the navigation setting, the above information and the restriction are also displayed on the navigation.

System activation

• The ISLW displays the speed limit information and alerts the overtaking restriction, when your vehicle passes by the relevant traffic signs.
• With the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver can activate the ISLW by selecting 'User Settings → Driving assist → ISLW (Speed Limit Warning)'.
• The ISLW displays the previous speed limit information, right after the ignition switch is placed to the ON position.
• You may find different speed limit information for the same road. The information is displayed depending on the driving situations. Because, traffic signs with additional sign (e.g. rainy, arrow, etc.) are also detected and compared with vehicle internal data (e.g. wiper operation, turn signal, etc.).

i Information

The speed limit information on the instrument cluster may differ from the one on the navigation. In this case, check the speed unit setting on the navigation.

Display

Display in cluster

OTM048176L

The cluster displays the speed limit information, overtaking restriction, detailed conditional speed limit and detailed overtaking restrictions.

Dark background with two horizontal lines and a circular icon labeled '80' at the bottom (no text or symbols on the main area)

OTM048177L

The cluster displays the speed limit information, overtaking restriction and conditional road sign.

Solid dark gray rectangle with two horizontal lines and a circled number 80 at the bottom (no text or symbols within the main area)

OTM048178L

If the ISLW detects the conditional road sign, the symbol of road sign is overlapped at the bottom or left of the speed limit on the cluster.

There may be signs with different speed limits on the same road. For example, normally, the speed limit is 75 mph (120 km/h), however the speed limit is 55 mph (90 km/h) when it is raining or snowing.

The conditional road sign means that you observe the speed limit and overtaking prohibition on certain conditions, such as when rain or snow.

■ No reliable speed limit information

Circular blue and white road sign with a central dashed line (no text or symbols)

WTL-220

- The symbol is displayed on the instrument cluster and the navigation, when the ISLW does not have any reliable speed limit information.

■ No passing information

WTL-222/WTL-221

- The symbol is displayed on the instrument cluster and the navigation, when the ISLW detects a no-overtaking sign.

■ Unlimited speed (only in Germany)

Circular sign with three parallel diagonal lines, no text or symbols present

WUM-205

- The symbol, 'end of limitation', is displayed on the instrument cluster for the roads in Germany, which have no speed limit applicable. It is displayed, until the vehicle passes by another speed limit sign.

■ End of a speed limit

WUM-207/WUM-208

- After passing "end of speed limitation" sign Intelligent Speed Limit Warning provides information from navigation to inform driver of perhaps afterwards applicable speed limit.

Dedicated display of ISLW

OTM048179L OTM048180L

1. Speed limit and overtaking restriction of current road
2. Conditional speed limit or overtaking restriction
3. Conditional road sign : Trailer, rain, snow or empty space

* Empty space : other conditional road sign (time etc.)

The ISLW detects the conditional road sign through the front camera and checks the sensor or controller of vehicle such as navigation or wiper operating status. If the ISLW recognises the current status meets under the conditional road sign condition, the speed limit and overtaking restriction located on the centre changes same as the conditional road sign.

i Information

The conditional speed limit and overtaking restriction may be different from the speed limit and overtaking restriction of current road.

And, the conditional speed limit and overtaking restriction displayed on the cluster will disappear after driving for a certain distance.

If ISLW does not recognise the road sign, nothing is displayed.

To turn ISLW off

If you turn off the ISLW, this message is displayed on the dedicated display of ISLW.

Warning message

OTM058147R

SLW (Speed Limit Warning) system disabled. Camera obscured

The warning message appears, when the camera lens is blocked by some objects. The ISLW (Intelligent Speed Limit Warning) does not operate, until the objects are removed. Check the windscreen glass around the camera area. If the problem persists after removing the objects, we recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OTM058148L

Check SLW (Speed Limit Warning) system

The warning message appears for a few seconds, when the ISLW does not properly operate. Then, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate.

We recommend that you have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Limitations of the system

The ISLW may not operate properly or may not provide correct information in the following situations.

When the traffic sign condition is poor

• The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.
• The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e. turned over, blocked by an object, and damaged).
• Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.
• The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.
• There is sunlight glare around the traffic sign due to low solar altitude.
• It is dark at night.
• There is bright light around the traffic sign.
• If road signs do not correspond to the standard and etc.
• The conditional road sign is indicated by letter, not specified image such as trailer, rain or snow.

When external condition is intervened

• Your vehicle drives right after another vehicle.
• The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle.
• Your vehicle drives in an area, which is uncovered by the navigation system.
• There is a malfunction with the navigation
• Your navigation has not been updated.
• Your navigation is being updated.
• As a result of incorrect detection by the camera.
• The top speed limitations stored in the navigation system are incorrect.
• The camera is calibrated right after the vehicle is delivered.
• There is something wrong with GPS.

- If the ISLW does not recognise normally vehicle status such as outside temperature, the ISLW cannot display the conditional road sign instead of road sign of current road.

When front visibility is poor

• The weather is bad, such as raining, snowing, and fogging.
• There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windscreen, where the camera is installed.
• The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf and etc..

Driver's attention

The ISLW may not assist the driver and may not properly operate.

- The ISLW is only to assist the driver. The driver should pay great caution to the vehicle operation.

- The driver always holds the responsibility of safe driving by following the applicable road traffic rule(s) and regulation(s).

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Cruise Control operation

1. (Gruise) indicator
2. Set speed

The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.
- If the Cruise Control is left on, (CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Cruise Control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system only when travelling on open highways in good weather.
- Do not use the Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

• When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads
• When driving on hilly or winding roads
• When driving in windy areas
• Do not use cruise control when towing a trailer.

NOTICE

During cruise-speed driving of a manual transmission vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or press the cruise control ON / OFF button.

i Information

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will activate after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the ignition or starting the vehicle.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted component showing airflow direction (no text or symbols)

Cruise control switch

MODE (CRUISE): Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

O (Cancel): Cancels cruise control operation.

i Information

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted dashboard and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

First, switch the mode to Cruise Control by pressing the button if equipped with the Speed Limit Control System.

The mode changes, as below, whenever the Button is pressed.

graph TD
    A["System off"] --> B["Cruise Control"]
    B --> C["Speed Limit Control"]
    C --> A

To set Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted dashboard component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Press the (CRUISE) button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The (CRUISE) indicator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Information - Manual transmission

For manual transmission vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it. The set speed on the LCD display will illuminate.
2. Release the accelerator pedal.

i Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, whilst driving uphill or downhill.

To increase Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a highlighted component (no text or symbols visible)

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and hold it, whilst monitoring the set speed on the instrument cluster.
  Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

To decrease Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch down in this manner.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at the increased speed, the Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be cancelled when:

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal. (for manual transmission vehicle)
- Pressing the O (Cancel) button located on the steering wheel.
- Pressing the (CRUISE) button. Both the (CRUISE) indicator and the set speed will disappear on the LCD.
- Pressing the button. Both the (ORUISE) indicator and the set speed will disappear on the LCD (if equipped with the Speed Limit Control).

• Moving the shift lever into N (Neutral). (for automatic transmission vehicle)
  • Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
  • The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in manual shift mode (for automatic transmission vehicle).

i Information

Each of the above actions will cancel Cruise Control operation (the set speed on the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the (CRUISE) button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the (CRUISE) button.

To resume preset Cruising speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

OTM058039OTI

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted dashboard and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

• Press the (CRUISE) button. The (CRUISE) indicator light will go off.
• Press the button. The cruise indicator light will go off (if equipped with Speed Limit Control).
• With the Cruise Control on, pressing the button once will turn Off the Cruise Control and turn on the Speed Limit Control.
• With the Cruise Control off and Speed Limit Control on, pressing the button will turn off both system.

i Information

The mode changes, as below, whenever the button is pressed.

graph TD
    A["System off"] --> B["Cruise Control"]
    B --> C["Speed Limit Control"]
    C --> A

SMART CRUISE CONTROL WITH STOP & GO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTM058054E

① Cruise indicator
② Set speed
③ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD display on the cluster, select Assist mode (A) For more informations, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and minimum distance between the vehicle ahead.

The Smart Cruise Control system will automatically adjust your vehicle speed to maintain your programmed speed and following distance without requiring you to depress the accelerator or brake pedals.

WARNING

For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

Smart Cruise Control Switch

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a digital display panel (no visible text or symbols)

MODE/(OURISE) : Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

O (Cancel) : Cancels cruise control operation.

Smart Cruise Control speed

To set Smart Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted directional arrow (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Push the MODE/ORUISE) button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise indicator will illuminate.

i Information

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted dashboard and blue arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the dashboard itself)

First, switch the mode to Smart Cruise Control by pressing the MODE button if equipped with the Speed Limit Control System.

The mode changes, as below, whenever the MODE is pressed.

graph TD
    A["System off"] --> B["Smart Cruise Control"]
    B --> C["Speed Limit Control"]
    C --> A

1. Accelerate to the desired speed. The Smart Cruise Control speed can be set as follows:

2. 20 mph \~ 110 mph (30 km/h \~ 180 km/h) : when there is no vehicle in front

3. 0 mph \~ 110 mph (0 km/h \~ 180 km/h) : when there is a vehicle in front

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Push the toggle switch down (SET-). The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD display will illuminate.

2. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly whilst going uphill or downhill.

i Information

• Vehicle speed may decrease on an upward slope and increase on a downward slope.

- When you are setting the cruise control speed, with a vehicle in front and your vehicle speed is between 0 \~ 20 mph (0 \~ 30 km/h), the speed will set to 20 mph (30 km/h).

To increase Smart Cruise Control set speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Follow either of these procedures:

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

- You can set the speed to 110 mph (180 km/h).

CAUTION

Check the driving condition before using the toggle switch. Driving speed sharply increases, when you push up and hold the toggle switch.

To decrease the Smart Cruise Control set speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

OTM058038 OTM058040

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch down in this manner.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph (30 km/h).

To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily when the Smart Cruise Control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with Smart Cruise Control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again.

i Information

Be careful when accelerating temporarily, because the speed is not controlled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.

Smart Cruise Control will be temporarily cancelled when:

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel with a logo and a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Cancelled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.
- Pushing the O (Cancel) button located on the steering wheel.

The Smart Cruise Control turns off temporarily when the Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise indicator is illuminated continuously.

Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.
- The vehicle is shifted to N (Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The parking brake is applied.
- The vehicle speed is over 120 mph (190 km/h).
- The ESC (Electronic Stability Control), TCS (Traction Control System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
- The sensor or the cover is dirty or blocked with foreign matter.
- The vehicle is stopped for a certain period of time.
- The vehicle stops and goes repeatedly for a long period of time.
- The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for a long period of time.
- The engine performance is abnormal.
• Engine rpm is in the red zone.

• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down (SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after the vehicle is stopped by the Smart Cruise Control system with no other vehicle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down (SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after stopping the vehicle with a vehicle stopped far away in front.
• The Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) is activated.

Each of these actions will cancel the Smart Cruise Control operation. The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD display will go off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise Control is cancelled automatically, the Smart Cruise Control will not resume even though the RES+ or SET- toggle switch is pushed.

i Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is cancelled by other than the reasons mentioned, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OIK057096L

Smart Cruise Control cancelled

If the system is cancelled, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions. Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control set speed

If any method other than the cruise toggle switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up (RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. However, if vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (30 km/h), it will resume when there is a vehicle in front of your vehicle.

i Information

Always check the road conditions when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) to resume speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted control panel showing a blue arrow (no text or symbols on the dashboard)

- Pushing the MODE/ (CRUISE) button. The cruise indicator will go off.

If you wish not to use the cruise control system, always turn the system off by pushing the MODE / (CRUISE) button.

- Pushing the 📋 button (if equipped with Speed Limit Control). The cruise indicator will go off.

- With the Smart Cruise Control on, pressing the button once will turn Off the Smart Cruise Control and turn on the Speed Limit Control.

- With the Smart Cruise Control off and Speed Limit Control on, pressing the button will turn off both system.

i Information

The mode changes, as below, whenever the BUTODE is pressed.

System off → Smart Cruise Control

WARNING

Take the following precautions :

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.

- If the Smart Cruise Control is left on, (indicate light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Smart Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Smart Cruise Control system off (indicate light OFF) when the Smart Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

- Use the Smart Cruise Control system only when travelling on open highways in good weather.

- Do not use the Smart Cruise Control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads

- When driving on a steep downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving in parking lots

- When driving near crash barriers

- When driving on a sharp curve

- When driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing ability decreases due to vehicle modification resulting level difference of the vehicle's front and rear

• Unexpected situations may lead to possible accidents. Pay attention continuously to road conditions and driving even when the smart cruise control system is being operated.

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

When the Smart Cruise Control system is ON, you can set and maintain the distance from the vehicle ahead of you without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:

For example, if you drive at 56 mph (90 km/h), the distance maintain as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet (52.5 m)

Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet (40 m)

Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet (32.5 m)

Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet (25 m)

i Information

The distance is set to the last set distance when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.

When the lane ahead is clear:

OIK057104N

The vehicle speed will maintain the set speed.

When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

Distance 4 Distance 3

Distance 2

Distance 1

OTM048124R/OTM058056E/OTM058057E/OTM058058E

• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the set speed.
• If distance from the front vehicle has been changed due to accelerating or decelerating of front vehicle, the distance on the LCD may be changed.

WARNING

OTM058047L

When using the Smart Cruise Control System:

• The warning message appears and warning chime sounds if the vehicle is unable to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning message appears and warning chime sounds, depress the brake pedal to actively adjust the vehicle speed, and the distance to the vehicle ahead.

• Even if always pay attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.
- Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

CAUTION

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 20 mph (30km/h)) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message "Watch for surrounding vehicles" will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehicles or objects that can suddenly appear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road condition ahead.

In traffic situation

OIK057107L

Use switch or pedal to accelerate

- In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well. However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the accelerator pedal or push up the toggle switch (RES+) or push down the toggle switch (SET-) to start driving.

- If you push the smart cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) whilst Auto Hold and advanced smart cruise control is operating the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white (if equipped with EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)).

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead

Front view of a modern electric car with visible grille and headlights (no text or symbols)

The Smart Cruise Control uses a sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.

If the sensor is covered with dirt or other foreign matter, the vehicle to vehicle distance control may not operate correctly.

Always keep the sensor clean.

Warning message

OTM058061R

SCC (Smart Cruise Control) disabled. Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the Smart Cruise Control system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor lens cover before operating the Smart Cruise Control system.

The Smart Cruise Control system may not properly activate, if the radar is totally contaminated, or if any substance is not detected after turning ON the engine (e.g. in an open terrain).

i Information

For the SCC operation is temporarily stopped if the radar is blocked, but you wish to use cruise control mode (speed control function), you must convert to the cruise control mode (refer to "To convert to Cruise Control mode" in the following page.

! CAUTION

• Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.
  • Always keep the radar sensor and lens cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the Smart Cruise Control system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the Smart Cruise Control system may not operate properly. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Use only HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

OIK058109R

Check SCC (Smart Cruise Control) system

The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally.

We recommend that you take your vehicle to by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and have the system checked.

To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control

OIK057097L

The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings → Driver assistance → SCC response → Fast/Normal/Slow' on the LCD display. You may select one of the three stages you prefer.

- Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.

- Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal.

- Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.

i Information

The last selected speed sensitivity of the smart cruise control is remained in the system.

To convert to Cruise Control mode

The driver may choose to only use the conventional Cruise Control mode (speed control function) by doing as follows:

1. Turn the Smart Cruise Control System on (the cruise indicator light will be on but the system will not be activated).
2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance button for more than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart Cruise Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is cancelled using the MODE / (CRUISE) button or the button is used after the engine is turned on, the Smart Cruise Control mode will turn on.

WARNING

When using the Cruise Control mode, you must manually adjust the distance to other vehicles by depressing the brake pedal. The system does not automatically adjust the distance to vehicles in front of you.

Limitations of the system

The Smart Cruise Control system may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.

On curves

Top-down view of a curved road with two cars, one highlighted with blue bounding boxes (no text or symbols on the car surfaces)

• The Smart Cruise Control system may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognised suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on curves and apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Top-down view of a road with two cars, one blue and one white, showing collision or collision (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed. Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of the Smart Cruise Control.

On inclines

Illustration of two cars on a hillside with a blue light beam, no text or symbols present

• During uphill or downhill driving, the Smart Cruise Control system may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognised suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

Top-down view of a road with two cars, one highlighted by an arrow and arrow, no text or symbols present.

Vehicle recognition

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars and a blue bounding box highlighting a vehicle (no text or symbols)

• A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognised by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.
• The radar may not detect immediately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your lane, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
• If a faster vehicle which moves into your lane, your vehicle will accelerate to the set speed.

Some vehicles in your lane cannot be recognised by the sensor:

• Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles
• Vehicles offset to one side
• Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-decelerating vehicles
• Stopped vehicles
• Vehicles with small rear profile such as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recognised correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs:

• When the vehicle is pointing upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment
• Whilst the steering wheel is operating
• When driving to one side of the lane
• When driving on narrow lanes or on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Top-down view of a multi-lane road intersection with cars and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

• Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution.

- When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down view of a three-way intersection with cars and a pedestrian crossing (no text or symbols)

• Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.

Two illustrations of a truck spraying water onto a car, showing engine exhaust and exhaust components (no text or symbols)

• Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that sticks out from the back of the vehicle.

WARNING

When using the Smart Cruise Control take the following precautions:

- If an emergency stop is necessary, you must apply the brakes. The vehicle cannot be stopped at every emergency situation by using the Smart Cruise Control system.

• Keep a safe distance according to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driving, a serious collision may result.
  • Always maintain sufficient braking distance and decelerate your vehicle by applying the brakes if necessary.
• The Smart Cruise Control system cannot recognise a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle. Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.
• Vehicles moving in front of you with a frequent lane change may cause a delay in the system's reaction or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

• Always be aware of the selected speed and vehicle to vehicle distance. The driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.
- The Smart Cruise Control system may not recognise complex driving situations so always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

NOTICE

The Smart Cruise Control system may not operate temporarily due to:

• Electrical interference
- Modifying the suspension
- Differences of tyre abrasion or tyre pressure
- Installing different type of tyres

LEADING VEHICLE DEPARTURE ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)

The Leading Vehicle Departure Alert system alerts the driver of the departure of the vehicle in front when the vehicle is stopped and the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system is in activation.

System setting and operating conditions

System setting

With the engine ON, the Leading Vehicle Departure Alert system turns on and gets ready to be activated when the 'User Settings → Driver assistance → Driving assist → Leading vehicle departure alert' is selected on the cluster. The system stops operation when the setting is deactivated. However, if the engine is turned off then on again, the system maintains the previous state.

Operating conditions

OIK057107L

Whilst the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system is in operation, your vehicle stops behind the vehicle in front when it stops. The message is displayed on the cluster within 3 seconds after the stop and the system will be in the standby position.

System activation

OTM058091L

If the driver does not take action for a certain period of time after the vehicle in front departs, the message is displayed on the cluster.

The vehicle departs automatically if the accelerator pedal is depressed or [RES +] or [SET -] switch is activated when there is a vehicle in front.

The Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system is deactivated if the accelerator pedal is depressed or [RES +] or [SET -] switch is activated when there is no vehicle in front.

WARNING

Always check the front of the vehicle and road conditions before departure.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the following precautions:

• Drive cautiously and maintain a longer braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use the second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spinning.
• Put sand, rock salt, tyre chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional traction whilst being stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING

Downshifting with an automatic transmission whilst driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tyre speed could cause the tyres to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal whilst shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal whilst the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tyres can increase very quickly. If the tyres become damaged, a tyre blow out or tyre explosion can occur. This condition is dangerous - you and others may be injured. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tyres or the engine. DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).

i Information

The ESC system (if equipped) must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission, and tyre damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other drivers' head-lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-lamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)
• Replace your windscreen wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windscreen.
• Be sure your tyres have enough tread. If your tyres do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. See "Tyre replacement" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

- If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly whilst driving until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tyre tread decreases, refer to "Tyre replacement" in chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

Highway driving

Tyres

Adjust the tyre inflation, as specified. Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tyres.

Do not install worn-out or damaged tyres, which may reduce traction or fail the braking operation.

i Information

Never over-inflate your tyres above the maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tyres.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less efficient than driving at a slower, more moderate speed. Maintain a moderate speed in order to conserve fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine coolant level and the engine oil before driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

Your multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV). SUV's have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. The specific design characteristics give them a higher centre of gravity than ordinary vehicles making them more likely to roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres, do not load your vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
- Avoid sharp turns and abrupt manoeuvres.
- Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the centre of gravity.
- Keep tyres properly inflated.
- Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.

WARNING

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all passengers are wearing their seat belts.

WINTER DRIVING

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tyres and cause other problems. To minimise winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tyres or to install tyre chains on your tyres.

Always carry emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tyre chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tyres

WARNING

Snow tyres should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tyres. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tyres of the same size and load range as the original tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. The traction provided by snow tyres on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tyres. Check with the tyre repairer for maximum speed recommendations.

i Information

Do not install studded tyres without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Tyre chains

Close-up of a car wheel with visible tire and connecting mesh lines, no text or symbols present

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are thinner than other types of tyres, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tyre chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tyres is recommended instead of tyre chains. Do not mount tyre chains on vehicles equipped with aluminium wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain. If tyre chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the tyre chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tyre chains. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tyre chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

When using tyre chains, attach them to the drive wheels as follows.

2WD : Front wheels

4WD : All four wheels

If a full set of chains is not available for an 4WD vehicle, chains may be installed on the front wheels only.

WARNING

The use of tyre chains may adversely affect vehicle handling:

• Drive less than 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

i Information

• Install tyre chains on the front tyres. It should be noted that installing tyre chains on the tyres will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
- Do not install studded tyres without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tyre chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tyre chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

NOTICE

When using tyre chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3\~0.6 miles (0.5\~1.0 km).
• Do not use tyre chains on vehicles equipped with aluminium wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 15 mm (0.59 in) wide to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter temperatures affect battery performance. Inspect the battery and cables, as specified in the chapter 7. The battery charging level can be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or in a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some regions during winter, it is recommended to use the "winter weight" oil with lower viscosity. For further information, refer to the chapter 8. When you are not sure about a type of winter weight oil, consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect the spark plugs, as specified in the chapter 7. If necessary, replace them. Also check all ignition wirings and components for any cracks, wear-out, and damage.

To prevent locks from freezing

To prevent the locks from being frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid or glycerin into key holes. When a lock opening is already covered with ice, spray approved de-icing fluid over the ice to remove it. When an internal part of a lock freezes, try to thaw it with a heated key. Carefully use the heated key to avoid an injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze solution in system

To prevent the window washer from being frozen, add authorised window washer anti-freeze solution, as specified on the window washer container. Window washer anti-freeze solution is available from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer, and most vehicle accessory outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze solution, to prevent any damage to the vehicle paint.

Do not let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. When there is the risk that your parking brake may freeze, temporarily apply it with the shift lever in P (Park). Also, block the rear wheels in advance, so the vehicle may not roll. Then, release the parking brake.

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in such conditions during the severe winter, you should check underneath the vehicle on a regular basis, to ensure that the front wheels and the steering components is unblocked.

Carry emergency equipment

In accordance with weather conditions, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment, whilst driving. Some of the items you may want to carry include tyre chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Do not place objects or materials in the engine compartment

Putting objects or materials in the engine compartment may cause an engine failure or combustion, because they may block the engine cooling. Such damage will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

TRAILER TOWING

If you are considering to tow with your vehicle, you should first your country's legal requirements. As laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for further details before towing.

Remember that trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper trailer towing is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• If you don't use the correct equipment and/or drive improperly, you can lose control of the vehicle when you are pulling a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the braking performance may be reduced. You and your passengers could be seriously or fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section.
• Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, GCW (Gross Combination Weight), GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight), GAW (Gross Axle Weight) and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
• When you tow a trailer, make sure to turn off the ISG system.

i Information

• The technically permissible maximum load on the rear axle(s) may be exceeded by not more than 15 % and the technically permissible maximum laden mass of the vehicle may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is lower. In this case, do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h) for vehicle of category M1 or 49.7 mph (80 km/h) for vehicle of category N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is towing a trailer, the additional load imposed at the trailer coupling device may cause the tyre maximum load ratings to be exceeded, but not by more than 15%. In this case, do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h) and increase the tyre inflation pressure by at least 0.2 bar.

If you decide to pull a trailer?

Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a trailer towbar dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your vehicle during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transmission damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for further information on additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 60 mph (100 km/h)) or posted towing speed limit.

• On a long uphill gradient, do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower.

• Carefully observe the weight and load limits provided in the following pages.

Trailer weight

What is the maximum safe weight of a trailer? It should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But even that can be too heavy. It depends on how you plan to use your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Tongue load

The tongue load is an important weight to measure because it affects the total Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer weight, within the limits of the maximum trailer tongue load permissible.

After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front. The front should be loaded with approximately 60% of the total trailer load; the rear should be loaded with approximately 40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper loading can result in damage to your vehicle and/or personal injury. Check weights and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office equipped with scales.

i Information

With increasing altitude the engine performance decreases. From 1,000 m above sea level and for every 1,000 m thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer weight (trailer weighter + gross vehicle weight) must be deducted.

Reference weight and distance when towing a trailer

Item		Petrol Engine(2.4L GDI)	Petrol Engine(2.4L MPI)		Diesel Engine(2.0L, 2.2L)
		A/T	M/T A/T	M/T A/T
Maximum trailer weightkg (lbs.)	Without brake system	750 (1653) 750 (1653)	750 (1653)	750 (1653)	750 (1653)
	With brake system	2000 (4409) 2000	(4409) 2000 (4409)	2500 (5512)	2000 (4409)
Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling devicekg (lbs.)		100 (220)
Recommended distance from rear wheel centre to coupling pointmm (inch)		1,165 (45.87)

M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission

Trailer towing equipment

Towbars

Side view of a white car with a visible rear bumper and two arrows pointing to the side of the bumper (no text or symbols on the car itself)

i Information

The mounting hole for towbars are located on both sides of the underbody behind the rear tyres.

It's important to have the correct towbar equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right towbar. Here are some rules to follow:

• Do you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the towbar. If you don't seal them, carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for towbars. Do not attach rental towbars or other bumper-type towbars to them. Use only a frame-mounted towbar that does not attach to the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI trailer towbar accessory is available at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Safety chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the towbar manufacturer or trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to your country's regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes loaded, then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Be sure not to modify your vehicle's brake system.

WARNING

Do not use a trailer with its own brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This is not a task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for this work.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you must get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer towbar and platform, safety chains, electrical connector(s), lights, tyres and brakes.

During your trip, occasionally check to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and trailer brakes are still working.

Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You will need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because of the increased vehicle length, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move your hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making turns

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike soft shoulders, kerbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well in advance.

Turn signals

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly connected, the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when, in fact, they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.

WARNING

Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle's lighting system. Use an approved trailer wiring harness. Failure to do so could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system and/or personal injury. Consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

Driving on hills

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get overheated and may not operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have automatic transmission, you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a trailer will minimise heat build-up and extend the life of your transmission.

NOTICE

To prevent engine and/or transmission overheating:

- When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 6%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves towards "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently.

- If you tow a trailer with the maximum gross vehicle weight and maximum trailer weight, it can cause the engine or transmission to overheat. When driving in such conditions, allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine or transmission has cooled sufficiently.

- When towing a trailer, your vehicle speed may be much slower than the general flow of traffic, especially when climbing an uphill gradient. Use the right hand lane when towing a trailer on an uphill gradient. Choose your vehicle speed according to the maximum posted speed limit for vehicles with trailers, the steepness of the gradient, and your trailer weight.

- Vehicles equipped with a automatic transmission when towing a trailer on steep gradients, need to be aware that the clutch in the transmission could overheat.

When the clutch is overheated, the safe protection mode engages. If the safe protection mode engages, the gear position indicator on the cluster blinks with a chime sound.

At this time, a warning message will appear on the LCD display and driving may not be smooth. If you ignore this warning, the driving condition may become worse.

To return to normal driving conditions, stop the vehicle on a flat road and apply the foot brake for a few minutes before driving off.

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached to your vehicle, you should not park your vehicle on a hill.

However, if you ever have to park your trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
   Turn the steering wheel in the direction of the kerb (left if headed down hill, right if headed up hill).
2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the vehicle.
4. Place wheel chocks under the trailer wheels on the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift to neutral, release the parking brake and slowly release the brakes until the trailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes and parking brakes.

7. Move the shift lever to P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or 1st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) when the vehicle is parked on a uphill gradient and in R (Reverse) on a downhill.

8. Shut off the vehicle and release the vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set.

WARNING

To prevent serious or fatal injury:

• Do not get out of the vehicle without the parking brake firmly set. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You and others could be seriously or fatally injured.

- Do not apply the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill.

Ready to leave after parking on a hill

1. With the shift lever in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down whilst you:

- Start your engine;

- Shift into gear; and

- Release the parking brake.

1. Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal.

2. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

3. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance when towing a trailer

Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic transmission fluid, axle lubricant and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to frequently check. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review these items before you start your trip. Don't forget to also maintain your trailer and towbar. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day's driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts and bolts should be tight.

NOTICE

To prevent vehicle damage:

• Due to higher load during trailer usage, overheating might occur on hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in a safe area to cool down the engine.
• Do not switch off the engine whilst the coolant gauge indicates over-heating.

(Keep the engine idle to cool down the engine)

• When towing check automatic transmission fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with an air conditioner, you should install a condenser fan to improve engine performance when towing a trailer.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

Two labels on your driver's door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tyre and Loading Information Label and the Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

Base Kerb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Kerb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Kerb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle kerb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Kerb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the driver's door sill.

Overloading

WARNING

The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the Certification Label attached to the driver's (or front passenger's) door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

Hazard warning flasher 6-2

In case of an emergency whilst driving ......6-2

If the engine stalls whilst driving....6-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .....6-2

If you have a flat tyre whilst driving 6-3

If the engine will not start 6-3

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly 6-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start....6-4

Jump starting 6-4

If the engine overheats 6-7

Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)......6-9

Check tyre pressure 6-9

Tyre pressure monitoring system....6-10

Low tyre pressure telltale....6-11

Low tyre pressure position telltale and tyre pressure telltale....6-11

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator ....6-12

Changing a tyre with TPMS 6-13

If you have a flat tyre (with spare tyre) ......6-15

Jack and tools 6-15

Removing and storing the spare tyre....6-16

Changing tyres....6-17

Jack label....6-24

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......6-25

If you have a flat tyre

(with tyre mobility kit)......6-26

Introduction 6-26

Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit.....6-27

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit 6-28

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit....6-29

Checking the tyre inflation pressure 6-31

Towing 6-33

Towing service 6-33

Removable towing hook 6-34

Emergency towing 6-35

Emergency commodity....6-37

Fire extinguisher 6-37

First aid kit....6-37

Triangle reflector 6-37

Tyre pressure gauge 6-37

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Interior view of a car dashboard with a traffic light indicator and directional arrows (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button with the ignition switch in any position. The button is located in the centre fascia panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

- The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

- The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

WHILST DRIVING

If the engine stalls whilst driving

• Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroads or crossing, if safe to do so, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

If you have a flat tyre whilst driving

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down whilst driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, move the shift lever into P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
• When changing a flat tyre, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

• Be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) if it is automatic transmission vehicle. The engine starts only when the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.
  Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for "Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.

CAUTION

Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.

If the engine turns over nor- mally but doesn't start

- Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.

If the engine still does not start, we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

JUMP STARTING

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery. Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

- When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or explode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply (battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

1. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
2. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission/automatic transmission vehicle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do not open the bonnet until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

WARNING

Whilst the engine is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belt to prevent serious injury.

1. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)
2. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

WARNING

NEVER remove the radiator cap or the drain plug whilst the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant in may blow out under causing serious

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back whilst the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

1. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
2. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and we recommend the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and warning sign (no readable text or symbols beyond the warning icon)

OTM048164L

(1) Low Tyre Pressure Telltale/TPMS Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-tale and tyre pressure telltale (Shown on the LCD display)

Check tyre pressure

OTM048125R

• You can check the tyre pressure in the Assist mode on the cluster.
  Refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
• Tyre pressure is displayed after a few minutes of driving after initial engine start up.

• If tyre pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to display" message will appear. After driving, check the tyre pressure.

• The displayed tyre pressure values may differ from those measured with a tyre pressure gauge.

• You can change the tyre pressure unit in the User Settings mode on the instrument cluster.
• psi, kpa, bar (Refer to "LCD Modes" in chapter 3).

Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tyre life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tyre failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Each tyre, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre pressure telltale when one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tyre pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tyre pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

If any of the below happens, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1. The low tyre pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or the engine is running.
2. The TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low tyre pressure position telltale remains illuminated.

Low tyre pressure telltale

OTM048164L

Low tyre pressure position telltale and tyre pressure telltale

When the tyre pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated and a warning message displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. The low tyre pressure position telltale light will indicate which tyre is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible. Inflate the tyres to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tyre inflation pressure label located on the driver's side centre pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tyre cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tyre with a spare tyre.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) after replacing the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre, the following will happen:

- The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel.

NOTICE

The spare tyre is not equipped with a tyre pressure sensor.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the low tyre pressure telltale may illuminate if the tyre pressure was adjusted to the recommended tyre inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a lowering of tyre pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is higher or lower, you should check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust the tyres to the recommended tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tyre pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tyres can cause the tyres to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.

We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the low tyre pressure position telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under-inflated tyre.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the low Tyre Pressure and Position telltales will come on. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

It is recommended that you do not use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tyre. Tyre sealant not approved by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer may damage the tyre pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre pressure sensor mounted inside the tyre behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you have your tyres serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) after replacing the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre, the following will happen:

- The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel.

You may not be able to identify a tyre with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tyre pressure gauge to measure the tyre's inflation pressure. Please note that a tyre that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tyre that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hour and driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that 3 hour period).

Allow the tyre to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tyre is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

A cold tyre means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

WARNING

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tyre damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tyre pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Do not modify the vehicle; it may interfere with the TPMS function.
  • The wheels on the market do not have a TPMS sensor.
  For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If you use the wheels on the market, use a TPMS sensor approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with a TPMS sensor or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic vehicle inspection conducted in your country.

*All vehicles sold in the EUROPE market during below period must be equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2012 \~
- Current model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2014\~ (Based on vehicle registrations)

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH SPARE TYRE, IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

Changing a tyre can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in this section when changing a tyre to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Be careful as you use the jack handle to stay clear of the flat end. The flat end has sharp edges that could cause cuts.

WARNING

Be cautious as the minimum ground clearance gets lower when you store the original tyre in the bottom of the vehicle after replacing it with a spare tyre.

In particular, drive below 18 mph (30 km/h) when driving over a speed bump and on uphill/downhill/uneven road.

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.

Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment.

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tyre changing only.

To prevent the jack from "rattling" whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

Removing and storing the spare tyre

Close-up of a car's front bumper showing internal engine compartment with a highlighted circular component (no text or symbols visible)

Your spare tyre is stored underneath your vehicle, directly below the cargo area.

To remove the spare tyre:

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and remove the cover with coin or flat - blade screwdriver.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing a blue circular arrow indicating refresh or reuse (no text or symbols)

1. Connect the socket and wheel lug nut wrench.
2. Loosen the bolt enough to lower the spare tyre.

Turn the wrench counterclockwise until the spare tyre reaches the ground.

Close-up of a car tire with a hand adjusting the wheel rim, showing a dial indicator (no text or symbols on the car itself)

1. After the spare tyre reaches the ground, continue to turn the wrench counterclockwise, and draw the spare tyre outside. Never rotate the wrench excessively, otherwise the spare tyre carrier may be damaged.

2. Draw out the retainer guide (1) and chain (2) through the centre hole of spare tyre.

To store the spare tyre:

1. Lay the tyre on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle and install the retainer guide and chain through the wheel centre.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it clicks.

CAUTION

Ensure the spare tyre retainer guide is properly aligned with the centre of the spare tyre to prevent the spare tyre from "rattling".

Otherwise, it may cause the spare tyre to fall off the carrier and lead to an accident.

Changing tyres

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby. Take the following safety precautions:

• Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a tyre in the lane of traffic. ALWAYS move the vehicle completely off the road on level, firm ground away from traffic before trying to change a tyre. If you cannot find a level, firm place off the road, call a towing service for assistance.

• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.
  • ALWAYS place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and NEVER on the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

• Do not start or run the engine whilst the vehicle is on the jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle whilst it is on the jack.

• Keep children away from the road and the vehicle.

• Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.

• Shift the shift lever into R (Reverse) with manual transmission or P (Park) with automatic transmission.
• Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

3D rendering of a silver SUV with sensor probe and blue indicator lights, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself

1. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tyre from the vehicle.
2. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

CAUTION

Changing a tyre

• To prevent vehicle movement whilst changing a tyre, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the wheel itself)

1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tyre has been raised off the ground.

Illustration of a car with suspension lock system, showing structural components and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

OTM068027L OTM068028L OTM068029L
7. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tyre you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.

Mechanical diagram showing a car tire mounted on a lift with a wrench and blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tyre just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 30 mm (1.2 in). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

2. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tyre, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.

1. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. The nuts should be installed with their tapered small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tyre to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

2. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle.

Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 11\~13 kgf.m (79\~94 lbf.ft)

If you have a tyre gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tyre in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

NOTICE

• Check the tyre pressure as soon as possible after installing a spare tyre. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.
• Check and tighten the wheel lug nuts after driving over 30 miles (50 km) if tyres are replaced. Re-check the tyre wheel lug nuts after driving over 620 miles (1,000 km).

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre from rattling whilst the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

WARNING

Inadequate spare tyre pressure

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to "Tyres and wheels" in section 8.

Use of compact spare tyres (if equipped)

Compact spare tyres are designed for emergency use only. Drive carefully on the compact spare tyre and always follow the safety precautions.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tyre failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tyre only in an emergency.
  • NEVER operate your vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tyre.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre continuously. Repair or replace the original tyre as soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tyre.

When driving with the compact spare tyre mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tyre pressure after installing the compact spare tyre. The compact spare tyre should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash whilst the compact spare tyre is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre on any other vehicle because this tyre has been designed especially for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tyre's tread life is shorter than a regular tyre. Inspect your compact spare tyre regularly and replace worn compact spare tyres with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact spare tyre at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer whilst the compact spare tyre is installed.

NOTICE

When the original tyre and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set correctly. The correct lug nut tightening torque is 11\~13 kgf·m (79\~94 lbf·ft).

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the compact spare tyre and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards, such as a potholes or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tyre diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tyre and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm (1 inch).
• Do not use tyre chains on the compact spare tyre. Because of the smaller size, a tyre chain will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre on any other wheels, nor should standard tyres, snow tyres, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel.

Jack label

Example

OOS067043

* The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission.

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.

10. Jack manufacturer

11. Production date

12. Representative company and address

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack

EC Declaration of Conformity

according to EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

We SAMKI IND. CO., LTD.

# 22, Hyojuk3-Gil, Buk-Gu, Ulsan, Korea

declare under our sole responsibility that the product

Product : Jack Assembly

Type Designation(s): Jack Assembly-600kg, Jack Assembly-700kg

Jack Assembly-800kg, Jack Assembly-1000kg

Jack Assembly-1200kg, Jack Assembly-1500kg

Serial No. : N/A

Year of Manufacture : 2013

to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standard(s) or other normative

document(s);

EN ISO12100 Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk assessment

(2010) and risk reduction

EN ISO12100-21A1 Safety of machinery - Basic concepts, general principles for design. Part

(2009) 2: Technical principles

EN 1494/A1 Mobile or movable jacks and associated lifting equipment

(2008)

following the provisions of Directive(s);

2006/42/EC Directive on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to

machinery (OJ L157 Jun, 9, 2006)

Urban, Korea / Jul 25 2013

Meun Duck, Cho President

(Place and date of issue)(name and signature or equivalent making of authorized person)

* T.C.F. Combining Prison: Safanet Limited (European Notified body : 1074)

Denford Garage, Denford, Ketterling Northants, NN14 40Q, England

JACKDOC14S

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

Top-down view of a car backrest with a device inset showing two components (no text or symbols visible)

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle

The Tyre Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tyre and we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

When two or more tyres are flat, do not use the tyre mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tyre.

WARNING

Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tyre walls. This can result in an accident due to tyre failure.

WARNING

Have your tyre repaired as soon as possible. The tyre may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tyre Mobility Kit.

Introduction

With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tyre puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tyre caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tyre.

After you ensured that the tyre is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tyre (distance up to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tyre dealer to have the tyre replaced.

It is possible that some tyres, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tyre may adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tyre Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tyre repair method and is to be used for one tyre only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit".

WARNING

Do not use the TMK if a tyre is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tyre can be sealed using the TMK.

Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the Tyre Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.

• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tyres. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tyre can be sealed using the tyre mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tyres.

• When the tyre and wheel are damaged, do not use Tyre Mobility Kit for your safety.
• Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may not be effective for tyre damage larger than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in). If the tyre cannot be made road-worthy with the Tyre Mobility Kit, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a tyre is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tyre.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit unattended whilst it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -30^ (-22°F).

• In case of skin contact with the sealant, wash the area thoroughly with plenty of water. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of eye contact with the sealant, flush your eyes for at least 15 minutes. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of swallowing the sealant, rinse the mouth and drink plenty of water. However, never give anything to an unconscious person and seek medical attention immediately.
• Long time exposure to the sealant may cause damage to bodily tissue such as kidney, etc.

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Speed- restriction label
2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

4. Connectors and cable for the battery direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor
7. ON/OFF switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tyre inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tyre inflation pressure

10. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

WARNING

Expired sealant

Do not use the Tyre sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tyre failure.

WARNING

Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit

CAUTION

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Detach the speed restriction label (0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

1. Shake the sealant bottle.

1. Screw the connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.
2. Ensure that the button (8) on the compressor is not pressed.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with visible hub and cable, no text or symbols present

1. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw the filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

Close-up of a mechanical device with a cylindrical component and cable, no visible text or symbols

1. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of the compressor (4) so that the bottle is upright.
2. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

CAUTION

Securely install the sealant filling hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.

1. Connect TMK cables to the battery in numerical order.

① RED cable : (+) battery terminal
② BLACK cable : (-) battery terminal

CAUTION

- TMK cable connection can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to TMK or battery, follow the TMK cable connection procedures.

• When disconnecting TMK cables, disconnect BLACK (-) cable first from the battery and then disconnect RED (+) cable.

• Be careful the spark from the battery when connect or disconnect the battery cables.

• With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5\~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tyre and Wheels, section 8). The inflation pressure of the tyre after filling is unimportant and will be checked/ corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tyre and stay away from the tyre when filling it.

CAUTION

Tyre pressure

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tyre pressure is below 200 kPa (29 psi). This could result in an accident due to sudden tyre failure.

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tyre valve.

Return the TMK to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide

Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation is possible if the engine is left running in a poorly ventilated or unventilated location (such as inside a building).

Two circular objects with blue liquid, one being rotated by a blue arrow (no text or symbols)

OLMF064106

Distributing the sealant

1. Immediately drive approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or, about 10min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tyre.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Whilst driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

Checking the tyre inflation pressure

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a blue arrow pointing to the center (no text or symbols visible)

1. After driving approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or about 10 min), stop at a safety location.
2. Connect the connection hose (9) of the compressor directly to the tyre valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

4. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the recommended tyre inflation. With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.

5. To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

6. To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button (8) on the compressor.

NOTICE

Do not let the compressor run for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the device will overheat and may be damaged.

i Information

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tyre reading, the compressor needs to be turned off.

CAUTION

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, drive the vehicle a second time, refer to Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4. Use of the TMK may be ineffectual for tyre damage larger than approximately 4 mm (0.16 in). We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer if the tyre cannot be made roadworthy with the Tyre Mobility Kit.

WARNING

The tyre inflation pressure must be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it is not, do not continue driving. Call for road side service or towing.

CAUTION

Tyre pressure sensor (if equipped with TPMS)

The sealant on the tyre pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tyre with a new one and inspect the tyre pressure sensors at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

When reinstalling the repaired or replaced tyre and wheel on the vehicle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 11\~13 kgf·m (79\~94 lbf·ft).

TOWING

Towing service

Three illustrations of a flatbed truck on different speeds, showing different car configurations (no text or symbols)

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

CAUTION

The 4WD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transmission or the 4WD system.

On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

CAUTION

- Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

Illustration of a pickup truck and a car with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

- Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

Illustration of a car being towed by a crane, with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed. The side impact and curtain air bag may deploy if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Failure to place the shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transmission.

Removable towing hook

Interior view of a car showing the roof and side panel with a highlighted sensor or sensor device (no text or symbols visible)

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the bumper.

1. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.
2. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a commercial tow truck service.

If a towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the ACC position so the steering wheel is not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more force than normal as you will have reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.
  • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

OTM068020

• Use a towing cable or chain less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transmission for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transmission fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing:

• Always pull straight ahead when using the towing hooks. Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
- Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.
- Limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing to avoid serious damage to the automatic transmission.

EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle is equipped with emergency commodities to help you respond to emergency situation.

Fire extinguisher

If there is small fire and you know how to use the fire extinguisher, follow these steps carefully.

1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle towards the base of the fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away from the fire and squeeze the handle to discharge the extinguisher. If you release the handle, the discharge will stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the base of the fire. After the fire appears to be out, watch carefully since it may re-ignite.

First aid kit

Supplies for use in giving first aid such as scissors, bandage and adhesive tape, etc. are provided.

Triangle reflector

Place the triangle reflector on the road to warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is parked by the roadside due to problems.

Tyre pressure gauge (if equipped)

Tyres normally lose some air in day-to-day use, and you may have to add a air periodically and usually it is not a sign of a leaking tyre, but of normal wear. Always check tyre pressure when the tyres are cold because tyre pressure increases with temperature.

To check the tyre pressure, take the following steps:

1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is located on the rim of the tyre.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the tyre valve. Some air will leak as you begin and more will leak if you don't press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate the gauge.
4. Read the tyre pressure on the gauge to see whether the tyre pressure is low or high.
5. Adjust the tyre pressure to the specified pressure. Refer to "Tyres and Wheels" in chapter 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.

Maintenance

Engine compartment 7-3

Maintenance services 7-6

Owner's responsibility....7-6

Owner maintenance precautions 7-6

Owner maintenance....7-7

Owner maintenance schedule....7-8

Scheduled maintenance services....7-9

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.7-10

Engine oil 7-13

Checking the engine oil level (Petrol engine)....7-13

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel Engine)....7-14

Checking the engine oil and filter 7-15

Engine coolant....7-16

Checking the engine coolant level....7-16

Changing the engine coolant 7-18

Brake/clutch fluid....7-19

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level....7-19

Washer fluid 7-20

Checking the washer fluid level 7-20

Parking brake 7-21

Checking the parking brake 7-21

Fuel Filter (For Diesel)....7-22

Draining water from fuel filter....7-22

Fuel filter cartridge replacement....7-22

Air cleaner 7-22

Filter replacement....7-22

Climate control air filter 7-24

Filter inspection....7-24

Filter replacement....7-24

Wiper blades....7-25

Blade inspection 7-25

Blade replacement 7-25

Battery....7-28

For best battery service....7-29

Battery capacity label....7-29

Battery recharging 7-30

Reset items 7-31

Tyres and wheels 7-32

Tyre care....7-32

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures .....7-33

Check tyre inflation pressure 7-34

Tyre rotation 7-34

Wheel alignment and tyre balance....7-35

Tyre replacement 7-36

Wheel replacement....7-37

Tyre traction....7-37

Tyre maintenance 7-37

Tyre sidewall labelling....7-37

Low aspect ratio tyres....7-41

Fuses....7-42

Instrument panel fuse replacement 7-43

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement......7-44

Fuse/Relay panel description 7-45

Light bulbs....7-59

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and daytime running light bulb replacement .....7-60

Front fog lamp 7-63

Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming 7-64

Side repeater lamp replacement 7-69

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement .....7-69

High mounted stop lamp replacement....7-71

License plate light bulb replacement 7-72

Interior light bulb replacement 7-72

Appearance care....7-74

Exterior care 7-74

Interior care....7-78

Emission control system 7-81

Crankcase emission control system....7-81

Evaporative emission control system....7-81

Exhaust emission control system 7-82

Selective Catalytic Reduction....7-85

Urea gauge 7-85

Malfunction with the SCR system 7-87

Clearing the vehicle-restarting restriction....7-88

Adding the urea solution....7-89

Storing the urea solution....7-92

Urea solution purity....7-92

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

■ Petrol Engine (Theta 2.4 MPI)

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine coolant cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Engine oil dipstick
7. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery terminal [+]
10. Battery terminal [-]

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTM078085R

■ Petrol Engine (Theta 2.4 GDI)

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine coolant cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Engine oil dipstick
7. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery terminal [+]
10. Battery terminal [-]

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTM078084R

■ Diesel Engine (R 2.0/2.2)

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine coolant cap
4. Fuse box
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filter cap
7. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
8. Air cleaner
9. Battery terminal [+]
10. Battery terminal [-]

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTM078020R

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. a HYUNDAI authorised repairer meets HYUNDAI's high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner's responsibility

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty Booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Owner maintenance precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

Several procedures can be done only by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:

• Park your vehicle on level ground, move the shift lever into the P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) position or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle) position, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/ OFF position.
• Block the tyres (front and back) to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jewellery that can become entangled in moving parts.

• If you must run the engine during maintenance, do so out doors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery and fuel-related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or a HYUNDAI authorised repairer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labour, parts and lubricants used.

WARNING

Diesel Engine

Never manipulate or modify the injection system whilst running the diesel engine or within 30 seconds after turning OFF the diesel engine. The high-pressure pump, high-pressure pipes, rail, and injectors are still subject to high pressure immediately after stopping the diesel engine.

When the fuel leakage vents out, it may cause serious body injury. Any people, who are implanted with the artificial cardiac pacemaker, should remain away from the ECU or the wiring harness by at least 30 cm, whilst running the diesel engine. The high currents of the electronic engine control system produce a considerable amount of magnetic fields.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
• Check for low or under-inflated tyres.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when travelling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all tyres including the spare for tyres that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

At least twice a year: (i.e., every Spring and Autumn)

• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windscreen washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and bonnet hinges.
• Lubricate door and bonnet locks and latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than Normal Maintenance Schedule which is provided in your Service Booklet.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt, place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the vehicle driving speed, damage the emission system, and cause the hard starting. When a considerable amount of foreign substances are accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel filter should be replaced.

Upon installing a new fuel filter, operate the diesel engine for several minutes, and check the connections for any leakages. We recommend you to have the fuel filter replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to ensure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Spark plugs (for Petrol engine)

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect spark plugs when the engine is hot. You may burn yourself.

Valve clearance (for Petrol engine)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system parts, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Engine coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)

Inspect the manual transmission fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)

Automatic transmission fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

We recommend that the automatic transmission fluid is changed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the maintenance schedule.

Information

Automatic transmission fluid colour is red when new.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transmission fluid will begin to look darker.

This is a normal condition. It does not need to be replaced based on the colour change.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transmission fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch fluid (if equipped)

Check the brake/clutch fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.

Brake pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, refer to the HYUNDAI web site.

(http://service.hyundai-motor.com)

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear rack, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant/compressor

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level (Petrol engine)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue tool and a magnified inset showing a tip (no text or symbols visible)

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).
6. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F.

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

NOTICE

• Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when adding or changing engine oil. If you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately.
• When you wipe the oil dipstick, you should wipe it with a clean cloth. When mixed with debris, it can cause engine damage.

Close-up of a mechanical component with liquid being poured into a tray (no visible text or symbols)

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in chapter 8.)

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel Engine)

Figure Required action
Range (A)	Recommend to contact a HYUNDAI authorised repair-
Range (B) Do not refill engine oil.
Range (C)	Normal.You may add engine oil as long as the oil level does not go above the C range.
Range (D)	You must add oil and make sure that the oil level is in the C Range.

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer's precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level ground in P (Park) with the parking brake set. If possible, block the wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

4. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level.

6. The level should be in the C range. If the level is in the D range, add enough engine oil to bring the level up to the C range.

Close-up of a car engine compartment with a hand pouring liquid into a cup (no visible text or symbols)

1. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in chapter 8.)

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

Checking the engine oil and filter

We recommend that the engine oil and filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant concentration level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before travelling to a colder climate.

NOTICE

- When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

- Do not drive with no engine coolant. It may cause water pump failure and engine seizure, etc.

Checking the engine coolant level

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue plastic housing and an arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between MAX and MIN (or F (Full) and L (Low)) marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionised) water. Bring the level to MAX, (or F (Full)) but do not overfill.

If frequent additions are required, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a blue-green button, no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

Never remove the coolant cap/radiator cap or the drain plug whilst the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when removing the coolant cap/radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back whilst the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

WARNING

The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the engine is not running cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.

The electric motor for the cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. If your vehicle is equipped with GDI, the electric motor for the cooling fan may begin to operate at any time and continue to operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only distilled (deionised) water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An incorrect coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminium engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient Temperature	Mixture Percentage (volume)
	Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F)	35 65
-25°C (-13°F)	40 60
-35°C (-31°F)	50 50
-45°C (-49°F)	60 40

i Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of -35^ ( -31^ ) and higher.

Changing the engine coolant

We recommend that coolant be changed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the Maintenance Schedule.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to engine parts, put a thick towel around the radiator cap and/or radiator cap before refilling the coolant to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts, such as the alternator.

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment with valve and cylinder (no visible text or symbols)

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in chapter 8.

i Information

Before removing the brake/clutch filler cap, read the warning on the cap.

i Information

Clean the filler cap before removing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch fluid from a sealed container.

WARNING

If the brake/clutch system requires frequent additions of fluid this could indicate a leak in the brake/clutch system. We recommend that the vehicle be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid comes in contact with your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

NOTICE

• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.
• Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.
• Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch system can damage system parts.

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

Interior view of a vehicle showing internal components and a blue arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury or death, take the following safety precautions when using washer fluid:

• Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windscreen and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flames to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Washer fluid may contain alcohol and can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and avoid contact with skin. Washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from children and animals.

PARKING BRAKE

Checking the parking brake

Type A

Interior view of a car's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb, 294N) of force. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Stroke : 8\~9 notch

Type B

Interior view of a car showing a hand interacting with the intake compartment (no visible text or symbols)

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard whilst fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Stroke : 5\~7 "clicks" at a force of 20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

Maintenance

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)

Draining water from fuel filter

The fuel filter in the diesel engine operates the critical function of separating water from the fuels and preventing accumulating of water in the base.

When enough water is accumulated inside the fuel filter, the warning light (○) illuminates with the ignition switch in the ON position.

In this case, we recommend you to have the system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

When the accumulated water is not drained at the proper timing, water may permeate in the fuel filter, damaging the major vehicle components, such as the fuel system.

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

We recommend the fuel filter cartridge be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the Maintenance Schedule.

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned for inspection using compressed air. Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it, as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be replaced.

Interior view of a car showing a blue battery labeled 'FULLS 100 DOWN (TA-200)' with no visible text or symbols beyond the label.

1. Pull down the air cleaner filter cover (1).

Close-up of a car engine bay with blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a blue industrial heat exchanger component with cooling fins and ventilation ducts (no visible text or symbols)

1. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
2. Pull down the lever to the UNLOCK position.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Reassemble the air cleaner cover in the reverse order.

i Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals.

NOTICE

• Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed. This will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in the severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you, the owner, replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.

Filter replacement

Interior view of a car showing a blue directional arrow and a blue circular mark on the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides.

Close-up of a car interior showing a blue arrow pointing to a component, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Remove the support strap (1).

Interior view of a car air intake or ventilation system showing airflow direction indicators (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the climate control air filter case whilst pressing the lock on the right side of the cover.

Exterior view of a rectangular electronic component with a blue arrow pointing to a circular detail (no text or symbols on the component itself)

1. Replace the climate control air filter.
2. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol(↓) facing downwards, otherwise, it may be noisy and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

Contamination of either the windscreen or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windscreen wipers.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, arms or other components, do not:

• Use petrol, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.

i Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windscreen difficult to clean.

i Information

Wiper blades are a consumable item and normal wear of the wipers may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

NOTICE

• In order to prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, the wiper arms should only be lifted when in the top wiping position.
  • Always return the wiper arms to the windscreen before driving.

Front windscreen wiper service positions

Diagram of a car interior showing a sensor or sensor device interacting with the window, with no visible text or symbols.

This vehicle has a "hidden" wiper design which means that the wipers cannot be lifted when they are in their bottom resting position.

1. Within 20 seconds of turning off the engine, hold the wiper lever down to the position for about 2 seconds until the wipers move to the top wipe position.
2. At this time you can lift the wipers off the windscreen.
3. Gently put the wipers back down onto the windscreen.
4. Turn the wipers to any ON position to return the wipers to the bottom resting position. 7-25

Type A

1. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then lift up the wiper blade.

2. Whilst pushing the lock (1), pull down the wiper blade (2).

Close-up of a hand using a pliers to cut metal wire (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

2. Install a new wiper blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

3. Return the wiper arm on the wind-screen.

Type B

Close-up of a curved mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Raise the wiper arm.

Close-up of a cable connector with two views (1 and 2) showing internal components and blue arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present.

1. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.

Close-up of a medical or laboratory procedure showing a tool interacting with a curved mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

2. Return the wiper arm on the wind-screen.

Rear window wiper blade

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a folding mechanism with a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

Close-up of a metallic stand with a close-up inset showing a camera lens (no text or symbols visible)

1. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the centre part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
2. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, we recommend that the wiper blades be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

BATTERY

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.

- The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE

• When you do not use the vehicle for a long time in a low temperature area, disconnect the battery and keep it indoors.
  • Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature areas.

NOTICE

If you connect unauthorised electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorised devices.

For best battery service

Close-up of an electronic device interior showing internal components and a highlighted section (no readable text or symbols)

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

i Information - For batteries marked with UPPER and LOWER

If your vehicle is equipped with a battery marked with LOWER (MIN) and UPPER (MAX) on the side, you should check the electrolyte level.

The electrolyte level should be between LOWER (MIN) and UPPER (MAX). When the electrolyte level is low, add distilled (or dc-mineralized) water. (Never add sulfuric acids or other electrolyte).

Be careful not to spill distilled (or de-mineralized) water over the battery surface or other adjacent components.

Also, do not overfill the battery cells.

If not, it may corrode the battery or other components. Finally, securely close the cell cap. However, we recommend you to contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for better battery service.

Battery capacity label

The actual battery label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity (in Ampere hours)

4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity (in min.)

5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in amperes by EN

Battery recharging

By battery charger

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on whilst the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load whilst the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING

Always follow these instructions when recharging your vehicle's battery to avoid the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from explosions or acid burns:

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.
  • Always work outdoors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
  • The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in a well ventilated area.

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin boiling violently.
- The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. Disconnect the battery charger in the following order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.
• Always use a genuine HYUNDAI approved battery when you replace the battery.

CAUTION

AGM battery (if equipped)

• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries are maintenance-free and we recommend that the AGM battery be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. For charging your AGM battery, use only fully automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.
• When replacing the AGM battery, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on top of the battery. This may cause leaks of internal electrolyte that could result in severe injury.

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good battery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 minutes before it is shutoff. The vehicle may not restart if you shut it off before the battery had a chance to adequately recharge. See "Jump Starting" in chapter 6 for more information on jump starting procedures.

Information

An inappropriately disposed of battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Reset items

The following items may need to be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window
- Sunroof
- Trip computer
• Climate control system
- Driver position memory system
- Clock
- Audio system

TYRES AND WHEELS

WARNING

Tyre failure may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. To reduce risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tyres monthly for proper inflation as well as wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tyre pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tyre label located on the driver's side centre pillar. Always use a tyre pressure gauge to measure tyre pressure. Tyres with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling.

• Check the pressure of the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tyres on your vehicle.

• Replace tyres that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tyres can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, or traction.

• ALWAYS replace tyres with the same size as each tyre that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tyres and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

Tyre care

Close-up of a car door with visible internal components and a circular annotation (no text or symbols on the main subject)

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tyre inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver's side centre pillar.

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures

All tyre pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Warm tyres normally exceed recommended cold tyre pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tyres to adjust the pressure or the tyres will be under-inflated. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tyre and Wheels" in chapter 8.

WARNING

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tyre wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tyre life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tyre failure that could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tyre failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

CAUTION

• Under-inflation results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation is also possible. Keep your tyre pressures at the proper levels. If a tyre frequently needs refilling, we recommend it be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Over-inflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the centre of the tyre tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

Check tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres, including the spare tyre, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tyre pressure gauge to check tyre pressure. You can not tell if your tyres are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tyres may look properly inflated when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tyre valve stem. Press the tyre gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tyre inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tyre and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended pressure. Make sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Tyre rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI recommends that the tyres be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you find any of these conditions. Replace the tyre if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tyre pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness (proper torque is 11\~13 kgf·m [79\~94 lbf·ft]).

graph TD
    A["Component 1"] --> B["Component 2"]
    C["Component 3"] --> D["Component 4"]
    E["Component 5"] --> F["Component 6"]
    G["Blue Arrow"] --> A
    G --> C
    G --> E
    G --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

i Information

The outside and inside of the unsymmetrical tyre is distinguishable. When installing an unsymmetrical tyre, be sure to install the side marked "outside" facing the outside. If the side marked "inside" is installed on the outside, it will have a negative effect on vehicle performance.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tyre for tyre rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tyres under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Wheel alignment and tyre balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tyre life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tyre wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

NOTICE

Incorrect wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminium wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread left on the tyre. Replace the tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tyre.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY:

• Replace tyres that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tyres can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and traction.

• Always replace tyres with the same size as each tyre that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tyres and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

• When replacing tyres (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tyres (or wheels) as a pair. Replacing just one tyre can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If only replacing one pair of tyres, it is recommended to install the pair of new tyres on the rear axle.

• Tyres degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, HYUNDAI recommends that tyres be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning may cause sudden tyre failure, which could lead to a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Compact spare tyre replacement (if equipped)

A compact spare tyre has a shorter tread life than a regular size tyre. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tyre. The replacement compact spare tyre should be the same size and design tyre as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tyre wheel. The compact spare tyre is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tyre wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tyre.

WARNING

The original tyre should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare and loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. The compact spare tyre is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare tyre.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tyres, tyres that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tyres should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tyres installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tyre sidewall labelling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tyre and also provides the tyre identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tyre in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

2. Tyre size designation

A tyre's sidewall is marked with a tyre size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tyres for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tyre size designation mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tyre size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

235/60R18 102H

235 - Tyre width in millimeters.

60 - Aspect ratio. The tyre's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

18 - Rim diameter in inches.

102 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tyre can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.5J X 18

7.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

18 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicle tyres. The speed rating is part of the tyre size designation on the sidewall of the tyre. This symbol corresponds to that tyre's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating Symbol	Maximum Speed
S 180	km/h (112 mph)
T 190	km/h (118 mph)
H 210	km/h (130 mph)
V 240	km/h (149 mph)
W 270	km/h (168mph)
Y	300km/h (186mph)

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : Tyre Identification Number)

Any tyres that are over six years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tyre) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tyre consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

The front part of the DOT shows a plant code number, tyre size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1518 represents that the tyre was produced in the 15th week of 2018.

4. Tyre ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tyre, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tyre and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tyre. When replacing the tyres on the vehicle, always use a tyre that has the same load rating as the factory installed tyre.

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tyre sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREAD WEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tyre when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tyre graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tyre graded 100.

The relative performance of tyres depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tyres. The tyres available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tyre's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tyre is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tyre's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tyre to degenerate and reduce tyre life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tyre is established for a tyre that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, over-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tyre failure. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Low aspect ratio tyres

A low aspect ratio tyre, of which the aspect ratio is lower than 50, is designed for a sporty-look vehicle. The low aspect ratio is to optimize handling and braking. Thus, it may be uncomfortable to ride and it may generate noises, in comparison with a normal tyre.

CAUTION

The side wall of a low aspect ratio tyre is shorter than the nor- mal one. Thus, the low-aspect wheel and tyre are easily dam- aged. Follow the below instructions.

• When driving on a rough road or driving off a road, be careful not to damage the tyres and wheels. After driving, inspect the tyres and wheels.

• When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or kerb stone, slowly drive the vehicle not to damage the tyres and wheels.

• When there is an impact on a tyre, inspect the tyre condition. Or, contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Inspect the tyre condition and pressure every 1,800 miles (3,000 km) to prevent a tyre damage.
• It is difficult to recognise a tyre damage only with your eyes. When there is a slight hint of a tyre damage, check and replace the tyre to prevent the damage caused by air leakage.
• When a tyre is damaged whilst driving on a rough road, off a road, or over obstacles, such as a pothole, manhole, or kerb stone, your warranty does not cover the damage.
• The tyre information is specified on the tyre side wall.

FUSES

■ Blade type

Normal

Blown

■ Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

Close-up of a mechanical device with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a computer monitor with a magnified inset showing a screen (no visible text or symbols)

OLF074075

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the engine and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING

NEVER replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or aluminium foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.

NOTICE

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

Instrument panel fuse replacement

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift (no visible text or symbols)

1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of the fuse panel cover to locate the suspected fuse location.

Close-up of a car engine compartment showing internal components and a highlighted battery cover (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuses panel.
2. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panels (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).
3. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

In an emergency, if you do not have a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlamps or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are undamaged, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling up.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. You may hear a clicking sound if the cover is securely latched. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur from water contact.

Multi fuse (Main fuse)

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with blue components and a magnified inset showing internal components (no readable text or symbols)

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

If the multi fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuse/Relay panel description

Driver's side fuse panel

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift (no visible text or symbols)

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

Driver's side fuse Panel

Fuse Name	Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit		Protected
MODULE 4	^4 MODULE	7.5A Stop	Lamp, Low Beam Assist-Dynamic, Driver Door Module
AIR BAG 1	^1	15A SRS	Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH	BRAKE SWITCH	7.5A IBU,	Stop Lamp Switch
MODULE 9	^9 MODULE	15A	Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Instrument Cluster, Low DC-DC Converter (Audio/AMP), A/C Control Module, Head Up Display, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Rain Sensor, Rear Seat Alert, Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Door Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Power Tail Gate Module
E-CALL	E-CALL	7.5A MTS	E-Call Module
MODULE 10	^10 MODULE	10A	Data Link Connector, Blind-Spot Collision Warning Unit LH/RH, Front Wireless Charger, Rear A/C Control Module
MODULE 7	^7 MODULE	10A Auto	Head Lamp Levelling Device Module, Head Lamp LH/RH
DCU	DCU	15A Dosing	Control Unit
AIR BAG IND.	^IND	10A A/C	Control Module, Instrument Cluster

Driver's side fuse Panel

Fuse Name	Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit		Protected
IBU 1	^1 IBU	7.5A IBU
MODULE 2	^2 MODULE	7.5A	Surround View Monitor, AC Inverter Outlet, AC Inverter Unit, Rear Seat Heater LH/RH, Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
MODULE 8	^8 MODULE	7.5A Hazard Switch, Key Solenoid
S/HEATER FRT	FRT	20A Front	Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
AIR BAG 2	^2	15A SRS	Control Module
MODULE 5	^5 MODULE	7.5A	Sttering Angle Sensor, Lane Departure Warning Unit, Crash Pad Switch, IBU, Parking Assist-Parallel Module, Fuel Pressure Sensor, Console Switch, ATM Shift Lever IND., 4WD ECM, Sport Mode Switch
IBU 2	^2 IBU	15A IBU,	Ignition Switch
SUNROOF 2	^2	20A Panorama Sunroof
MODULE 1	^1 MODULE	7.5A IBU
P/WDW RH	RH	10A	Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Safety Power Window RH, Rear Power Window Switch RH

Driver's side fuse Panel

Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit			Protected
ISG	ISG	15A	Low DC-DC Converter (AMP), Instrument Cluster, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Head Up Display, A/C Control Module
RR S/HEATER LH		25A Rear	Seat Heater LH
CLUSTER	CLUSTER	7.5A Instrument Cluster, Head Up Display
MDPS	[5268]	10A MDPS Unit
A/CON	A/C	7.5A E/R	Junction Block (RLY. 4), SUB Junction Block (RLY. 1,2,3)
CHILD LOCK	15A II [WWXX] Relay	Box (Child Lock/Unlock Relay)
DOOR LOCK	20A [ [HIGH] Lock	Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, Dead Lock Relay
REAR A/CON	REAR A/C	10A Rear	A/C Control Module, Rear Blower Motor, A/C Control Module
SUNROOF 1	1	20A Panorama Sunroof
P/WDW LH	LH [HWZW]	25A	Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Safety Power Window LH, Rear Power Window Switch LH

Driver's side fuse Panel

Fuse Name	Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit		Protected
MODULE 3	^3 MODULE	7.5A IBU
MODULE 6	^6 MODULE	7.5A	Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module, MTS E-Call Module, Low DC-DC Converter (Audio/AMP), Electro Chromic Mirror, Centre Low Panel Switch, Driver IMS Control Module, Rear Seat Heater LH/RH, AMP Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
WASHER 15A Multifunction		Switch
RR S/HEATER RH	RR RH	25A Rear	Seat Heater RH
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper		Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
AMP	AMP	25A AMP, Low DC-DC Converter (AMP)
ACC	ACC	7.5A	MTS E-Call Module, Surround View Monitor, AMP, IBU, Front Wireless Charger, Low DC-DC Converter (Audio/AMP), Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Front USB Charger, Rear USB Charger LH/RH
P/SEAT PASS	PASS	30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch, Walk In Relay
P/SEAT DRV	DRV	30A Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch

Engine compartment fuse panel

Close-up of mechanical components and a close-up of an electronic circuit board (no visible text or symbols)

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

OTM078049L

Engine compartment fuse panel

Type	Fuse Name	Symbol	Fuse Rating	Circuit Protected
MULTI FUSE (10P)	MDPS	^c/R [IMAGE]	C : 80A R : 100A	MDPS Unit
	C/FAN 1	^1 [IMAGE]	80A [D4H	A/D4HB/G4KJ] Cooling Fan Controller
	EPB 60A	ESP Control Module
	B+4	^4 [IMAGE]	50A ICU	Junction Block (Fuse - F16/F17/F27/F36/F46)
	B+3	^3 [IMAGE]	50A ICU	Junction Block (Fuse - F29/F39/F48/F49)
	B+2	^2 [IMAGE]	50A ICU	Junction Block (IPS 8/IPS 10/IPS 11/IPS 12/IPS 13/IPS 14/IPS 15)
	RR HTD 40A RL( Rear HTD Relay)
	ABS 1	^1 [IMAGE]	40A ABS	Control Module, ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
	BLOWER 40A RL( Blower Relay)
	ABS 2	^2 [IMAGE]	40A ABS	Control Module, ESP Control Module

Engine compartment fuse panel

Type	Fuse Name	Symbol	Fuse Rating	Circuit Protected
MULTI FUSE (5P)	GLOW 80A	[D_1 4HB]	Glow Relay Unit
	PTC HEATER 1	^1 PTC HEATER	50A SUB	Junction Block (RLY. 1)
	PTC HEATER 2	^2 PTC HEATER	50A SUB	Junction Block (RLY. 2)
	PTC HEATER 3	^3 PTC HEATER	50A SUB	Junction Block (RLY. 3)
	FUEL FILLTER		30A SUB	Junction Block (RLY. 4)
FUSE	B+1		50A	ICU Junction Block (IPS 1/IPS 2/IPS 3/IPS 4/IPS 5/IPS 6/IPS 7, Long/Short Term Load Latch Relay)
	B+5		50A ICU	Junction Block (Fuse - F4/F14/F23/F24/F33/F34/F44)
	INVERTER	30A A /erter	Unit
	POWER TAIL GATE		30A Power Tail Gate Module
	TRAILER 3		30A Trailer Lamp
	IG2	IG2	40A RLY.	2 (Start Relay), ICU Junction Block (Fuse - F15/F25/F32/F35/F42/F45)

Engine compartment fuse panel

Type	Fuse Name	Symbol	Fuse Rating	Circuit Protected
FUSE	C/FAN 2		50A RLY. 5 (Cooling Fan Relay)
	HTD MIRR	10A Driver/Passenger Power	Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
	A/CON 2		10A A/C	Control Module
	WIPER 2		10A RLY. 3 (Wiper (LO) Relay)
	ECU 4		15A ECM, PCM
	AMS	AMS	10A Battery Sensor
	4WD 20A	4WD ECM

Engine compartment fuse panel (PCB block)

Fuse Name	Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit	Protected
SENSOR 6	^8	15A [D4HA/D4HB] Glow Relay Unit
ABS 3		10A Multiple Purpose Check Connector, ABS Control Module, ESP Control Module
SENSOR 7		10A Smart Cruise Control Radar
SENSOR 5		10A [D4HA/D4HB] Oil Sensor Assembly, Front/Rear NOX Sensor, E/R Junction Block (RLY.5) [G4KJ] Oil Control Valve (Exhaust), Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, E/R Junction Block (RLY.5) [G4KE] Oil Control Valve #1/#2 (Intake/Exhaust), Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, E/R Junction Block (RLY.5) [G6DC] Oil Control Valve #3/#4 (Exhaust), E/R Junction Block (RLY.5)
IGNITION COIL	IGN COIL	20A [D4HA/D4HB] Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve [G4KJ] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4 [G4KE] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condecser [G6DC] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Condecser #1/#2
SENSOR 3		20A [D4HA/D4HB] Rail Pressure Regulating Valve [G6DC] PCM
SENSOR 4		15A [D4HA/D4HB] Electronic VGR Actuator, Lambda Sensor #1/#2, PM (Particulate Matter) Sensor, Cooling Fan Controller [G4KJ] Cooling Fan Controller [G4KE] PCM [G6DC] Not Used

Fuse Name	Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit		Protected
SENSOR 1	^51	10A	[D4HA/D4HB/G4KJ/G4KE] Fuel Pump Relay[G6DC] Fuel Pump Relay, Injector #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6
DCU 2	DCU 2	20A [D4H	A/D4HB] Doosing Control Unit
A/CON 1	^1 A/C	10A [D4H	A/D4HB] A/C Comp Relay
WIPER FRT 1	^1	25A Wiper Main Relay
TCU 2	^73	10A	[D4HA/D4HB/G6DC] TCMTransmission Range Switch
ECU 3	^85	10A ECM/PCM
B/A HORN 15	A Buc	Alarm Horn Relay,	Horn Relay
HORN 15A	Horn Relay
TRAILER 1	^1	15A TRA	LER LMAP (Europe)
FUEL PUMP	FUEL PUMP	20A Fuel	Pump Relay
ECU 1	^81	20A ECM/PCM
ECU 2	^82	20A	[G4KE] Injector #1/#2/#3/#4[G6DC] PCM
SENSOR 2		10A	[D4HA/D4HB] A/C Comp Relay, Sub Junction Block (RLY. 1/4), Mass Air Flow Sensor,EGR Cooling Bypass Solenoid Valve, Oil Pump Valve, Crankshaft Position Sensor[G4KJ] Oil Level Sensor, Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)[G4KE] Oil Level Sensor, Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down),Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2 (Intake/Exhaust)[G6DC] Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve,Oil Control Valve #1/#2 (Intake), Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4
DCU 3	DCU 3	15A [D4H	A/D4HB] Doosing Control Unit
DCU 1	DCU 1	20A [D4H	A/D4HB] Doosing Control Unit
POWER OUTLET 1	^1 POWER OUTLET	20A Rear	Power Outlet
POWER OUTLET 2	^2 POWER OUTLET	20A Front	Power Outlet
ACC	ACC	10A ICU	Junction Block (Fuse - F47)
TRAILER 2		15A TRA	LER LMAP (Europe)
TCU 1		15A	[D4HA/D4HB/G6DC] TCM[G4KJ/G4KE] PCM
IG 1	IG1	40A PDM	(IG1) Relay

Engine compartment fuse panel (Diesel engine only)

Interior view of a vehicle showing a blue plastic container being inserted into a black electronic device with white components (no visible text or symbols)

OTM078047

Engine compartment fuse panel

Symbol Relay Name Relay Type
^1 PTC HEATER	RLY. 1 (PTC Heater Relay #1) MICRO PLUG
^2 PTC HEATER	RLY. 2 (PTC Heater Relay #2)MICRO PLUG
^3 PTC HEATER	RLY. 3 (PTC Heater Relay #3)MICRO PLUG
	RLY. 4 (Fuel Filter Heater Relay)MICRO PLUG

LIGHT BULBS

Consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

Prior to working on a light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

NOTICE

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electrical wiring system.

i Information

After heavy driving rain or washing, headlamp and tail lamp lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle when raining and doesn't indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

i Information - Traffic Change

The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand several technical solutions (ex. automatic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). These headlamps are designed not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you need not change your headlamps in a country with opposite traffic direction.

i Information - Headlamp desiccant (if equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with desiccant to reduce fogging inside the headlamp due to moisture.

The desiccant is consumable and its performance may change based on the used period or environment.

If fogging inside the headlamp due to moisture continues for a long time, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and daytime running light bulb replacement

Type A

(1) Daytime running light
(2) Daytime running light/ Position lamp
(3) Headlamp (High)
(4) Headlamp (Low)
(5) Turn signal lamp
(6) Front fog lamp (if equipped)

WARNING

Hand holding a mechanical component with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

- Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.
- Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
- A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
- If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

Headlamp

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the bulb socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)
5. Remove the bulb from the head-lamp assembly.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Connect the bulb socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)
8. Install the bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

Turn signal lamp

1. Engage the parking brake and disconnect the negative battery cable.

Close-up of a car wheel with visible tire and mechanical components (no text or symbols)

1. Remove wheel guard clips (wheel guard: 4 pieces, under the front bumper: 3 pieces).

Mechanical component with a blue arrow pointing to a button, shown in an inset image (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

1. Push the wheel guard aside and remove the bulb socket-connector by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Remove the bulb from the turn signal lamp assembly.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Connect the bulb socket-connector.
5. Install the wheel guard in the reverse order.

Daytime running light/position lamp If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Type B

(1) Daytime running light
(2) Daytime running light/ Position lamp
(3) Support Headlamp (High/Low)
(4) Headlamp (High/Low)
(5) Turn signal lamp
(6) Front fog lamp (if equipped)

WARNING

Hand holding a metallic pipe fitting with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

• Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.
- Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
- A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
- If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

Lamps

If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

Mechanical component with highlighted internal structure and close-up view (no text or symbols)

OTM078086L

1. Loosen the pin-type retainers of the under cover and then remove the undercover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots of the housing.

5. Install a new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming

Headlamp aiming

1. Inflate the tyres to the specified pressure and remove any loads from the vehicle except the driver, spare tyre, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat floor.

3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines passing through respective head lamp centres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal line passing through centre of head lamps) on the screen.

4. With the headlamp and battery in normal condition, aim the head-lamps so the brightest portion falls on the horizontal and vertical lines.

5. To aim the low beam left or right, turn the driver clockwise or counterclockwise. To aim the low beam up or down, turn the driver clockwise or counterclockwise.

To aim the high beam up or down, turn the driver clockwise or counterclockwise.

Front fog lamp aiming

Mechanical component diagram showing a motor or scooter assembly with a screwdriver and blue directional arrow (no text or symbols)

The front fog lamp can be aimed as the same manner of the headlamps aiming.

With the front fog lamps and battery in normal condition, aim the front fog lamps. To aim the front fog lamp up or down, turn the driver clockwise or counterclockwise.

Aiming point

■ Halogen lamp

■ LED lamp

H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb centre and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb centre and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb centre and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centres (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centres (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centres

OTM078069L/OTM078070L

Vehicle condition	Lamp type H1 H2	H3 W1 W2 W3
Without driver mm (in)	Halogen 707	9 (27.87) 619.3 (24.38)		405.3 (15.96)	1490 (58.66)	1454 (57.24)	1544 (60.79)
	LED 643.3	(25.33) 1483 (58.39)
With driver mm (in)	Halogen 702	4 (27.65) 613.8 (24.17)		399.8 (15.74)	1490 (58.66)	1454 (57.24)
	LED 637.8	(25.11) 1483 (58.39)

Headlamp low beam

ODMEMC2026

1. Turn the low beam on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.

Front fog lamp

OTM078071L

1. Turn the front fog lamp on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).

Side repeater lamp replacement

Side view of a silver car with a blue accent on the side mirror (no text or symbols visible)

If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement

Type A

(1) Tail/Stop lamp
(2) Tail lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Backup lamp
(5) Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

Type B

(1) Tail lamp
(2) Stop lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Backup lamp
(5) Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust a mechanical component, with an inset showing a close-up of the component (no text or symbols visible)

Stop/Tail lamp (Type A)

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a close-up inset showing a plug (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
3. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
4. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and attached rearview panel (no visible text or symbols)

Tail lamp (Type A)

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a close-up inset showing a labeled connector (OTM078007), no readable text or symbols present.

1. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
3. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
4. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Tail / Stop lamp (Type B)

If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Turn signal lamp / Back up lamp / Rear fog lamp

If these lamps do not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

High mounted stop lamp replacement

Close-up of a car's front window with visible door and antenna (no text or symbols)

If the high mounted stop lamp does not operate, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

License plate light bulb replacement

Close-up of a car air vent with a connector, showing internal components and a close-up of the connector (no text or symbols visible)

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Interior light bulb replacement

Map lamp / Room lamp (LED Type)

If the lamp (1) does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb into the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

NOTICE

Be careful not to damage the cover, tab, and plastic housing.

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits.

A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.
  Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

WARNING

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes whilst driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly whilst maintaining a slow forward speed.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
  Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

Illustration of a car with an open hood and a hand holding a tool, no text or symbols present.

NOTICE

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier between your paint and contaminate. Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

NOTICE

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminium parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discolouration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes whilst driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly whilst maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminium wheel maintenance

The aluminium wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminium wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleanser containing acid or alkaline detergents.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings; by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed.

For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

- If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and vehicle peting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discolouration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the proper way to clean vinyl.

NOTICE

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

NOTICE

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the colour of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its colour can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

NOTICE

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

- Features of seat leather

- Leather is made from the outer skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a natural product, each part differs in thickness or density.

Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the product.

CAUTION

• Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.
  • Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

• Caring for the leather seats

• Vacuum the seat periodically to remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.
• Use of proper leather protector may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the colour. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.
• Light coloured (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

- Cleaning the leather seats

• Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminated spot. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.

• Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)
  Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.
• Oil

Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natural leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty Booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to ensure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

CAUTION

For the Inspection and Maintenance Test (with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapours from escaping into the atmosphere.

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions whilst maintaining good vehicle performance.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colourless and odourless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions following to avoid CO poisoning.

- Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

- A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as dry grass, paper, leaves, etc.

- The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot whilst the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic converter as you may get burned. Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle and do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

- Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol engines.

- Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the engine off and descending steep grades in gear with the engine off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of petrol, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.
  Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
  Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter (GPF) (if equipped)

The Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter (GPF) system removes the soot in the exhaust gas.

The GPF system automatically burns (or oxidises) the accumulated soot in accordance with driving situations, unlike a disposable air filter.

In other words, the accumulated soot is automatically purged out by the engine control system and by the high exhaust-gas temperature at normal/high driving speeds.

However, when the vehicle is continually driven at repeated short distances or driven at low speed for a long time, the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperature. In this case, the accumulated soot is out of the detection range, the soot oxidization process does not occur, and the Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter (GPF) Lamp ( ) dominates.

The Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate Filter (GPF) Lamp stops illuminating, when the driving speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), or when the engine rpm is between 1,500 and 4,000 with the gear in the 3rd position or above for approximately 30 minutes.

When the GPF Lamp continuously blinks or the warning message “Check exhaust system” illuminates in the above cases, we recommend that you have the GPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When the vehicle is continuously driven with the GPF Lamp flashing for an extended period of time, it may damage the GPF system and lower the fuel economy.

CAUTION

Gasoline (Petrol) Fuel (if equipped with GPF)

We recommend you to use only the regulated petrol fuels, when your vehicle is equipped with the GPF system.

When you use other petrol fuels which contain unspecified additives, they may damage the GPF system and cause exhaust emission problems.

Diesel particulate filter (DPF) (if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot in the exhaust gas.

The DPF system automatically burns (or oxidises) the accumulated soot in accordance with driving situations, unlike a disposable air filter.

In other words, the accumulated soot is automatically purged out by the engine control system and by the high exhaust-gas temperature at normal/high driving speeds.

However, when the vehicle is continually driven at repeated short distances or driven at low speed for a long time, the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperature. In this case, the accumulated soot is out of the detection range, the soot oxidization process does not occur, and the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp ( ) terminates.

CAUTION

Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)

We recommend you to use only the regulated diesel fuels, when your vehicle is equipped with the DPF system.

When you use other diesel fuels, which are high in sulfurs (above 50 ppm) or that contain unspecified additives, they may damage the DPF system and cause white smoke emissions.

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp stops illuminating, when the driving speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h), or when the engine rpm is between 1,500 and 2,500 with the gear in the 2nd position or above for approximately 25 minutes.

When the DPF Lamp continuously blinks or the warning message “Check exhaust system” illuminates in the above cases, we recommend that you have the DPF system checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When the vehicle is continuously driven with the DPF Lamp flashing for an extended period of time, it may damage the DPF system and lower the fuel economy.

Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)

The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system removes the nitrogen oxide from the exhaust gas. A smell can occur in the exhaust gas depending on the quality of the fuel, and it can degrade NOx reduction performance. Please use the regulated automotive diesel fuel.

Selective Catalytic Reduction (if equipped)

The Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system is to catalytically convert NOx to Nitrogen and Water by using the reduction agent, the urea solution.

Urea gauge (if equipped)

OTM048163L

The urea solution gauge indicates the approximate amount of remaining urea solution inside the urea solution tank.

* The urea gauge image pops up, whenever the ignition switch is pressed to the ON position.

graph TD
    A["Low urea"] --> B["Refill urea"]
    B --> C["Refill urea in 000km. Otherwise vehicle will not start"]
    C --> D["Refill urea tank. Otherwise vehicle will not start"]

OTM078072R/OTM078075R/OTM078074L/OTM078073

The lack warning messages of Urea appear below Urea 5.4 litre. When the warning message "Low urea" is displayed with SCR warning lamp (the urea tank needs to be refilled. If not refilled for a considerable mileage, visual warning system will escalate the intensity by displaying the message "Refill urea" with SCR warning lamp (

In this case, the tank soon needs to be refilled. The remaining urea in the tank approaches to too low level the warning message "Refill urea in 000km or vehicle will not start" with SCR warning lamp ("xxx mile (km)" represents the remaining travel distance allowed, so do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel distance without refilling.

Otherwise, the vehicle can't be restarted once the engine is turned off by ignition key. Based on the driving pattern, environmental condition and road profile, the deducted remaining mileage may differ from the actual travel distance.

When "Low urea" or "Refill urea" message is displayed, add at least 4 litres of urea. When "Refill urea in 000km or vehicle will not start" message is displayed, fill up urea at least 6 litres. When "Refill urea tank Otherwise vehicle will not start" message is displayed with SCR warning lamp (the vehicle can't be restarted once the engine is turned off by ignition key. For the above cases, full replenishment is always recommended.

Malfunction with the SCR system (if equipped)

	Upon detecting a malfunction			Driving 50 km after detecting a malfunction
Urea system failure (= no fuel injection)
Incorrect urea detected (= abnormal urea)		In			R 000 ve
Abnormal urea-solution consumption (= post treatment failure)					S sys 0th v

SCR system has malfunction due to disconnected electrical components, incorrect urea and so on.

"xxx km(mile)" represents the remaining travel distance allowed, so do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel distance without fixing the source of the malfunction. Otherwise, the vehicle can't be restarted once the engine is turned off by ignition key. In this case, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Clearing the vehicle-restarting restriction (if equipped)

No restart
Low urea solution level		Refill urea tank.Otherwise vehicle will not start
Urea system failure(= no fuel injection)		Service urea system in 000km.Otherwise vehicle will not start
Incorrect urea detected(= abnormal urea)		Refill with correct urea in 000km or vehicle will not start
Abnormal urea-solution consumption(= post treatment failure)		Service urea system in 000km.Otherwise vehicle will not start

Once the inducement system reached to final status and disabled the vehicle restart, it will only be deactivated in case the urea tank is replenished or the malfunctions have been rectified. If the vehicle can't be restarted with "Refill urea tank Otherwise vehicle will not start" message, refill more than 6 litres urea, wait for minutes and try vehicle starting again. If vehicle starting is not possible regardless of urea level, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Adding the urea solution

To refill the urea solution from the refill hose

Close-up of a car's front bumper showing the door and seatbelt opening, with a blue arrow pointing to the seatbelt (no text or symbols on the main subject)

1. Press the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a counterclockwise direction to open it.
3. Fully insert the refill hose to add the ISO 22241-specified urea solution over 5 litres or above the mark on the urea solution tank.
   * When "Refill Urea tank or vehicle will not start" message is displayed, fill up urea at least 6 litres.

* Pay the great caution not to add the urea solution into the fuel tank. If not, it surely applies adverse impact on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.
* Never use the urea solution mixture with additives or water. It may allow foreign substances to enter the urea solution tank. If so, it surely applies adverse impact on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.
* Use only the ISO 22241-specified urea solution. Any unauthorised urea solution surely applies adverse impacts on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.
4. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a clockwise direction to securely close it.

To refill the urea solution from the refill bottle

1. Press the ignition switch to the OFF position
2. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a counterclockwise direction to open it.
3. Add the ISO 22241-specified urea solution over 5 litres or above the mark on the urea solution tank.
   * Pay the great caution not to add the urea solution into the fuel tank. If not, it surely applies adverse impact on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.
   * Pay the great caution not to over-fill the (completely) fulfilled urea solution tank by force whilst refilling the urea solution from the refill bottle. The over-filled urea solution tank will be expanded when it becomes frozen and this can cause a serious malfunction of the urea solution tank or urea solution system.

* Never use the urea solution mixture with additives or water. It may allow foreign substances to enter the urea solution tank. If so, it surely applies adverse impact on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.

* Use only the ISO 22241-specified urea solution. Any unauthorised urea solution surely applies adverse impacts on the vehicle performance, causing various malfunctions.

1. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a clockwise direction to securely close it.

Adding the urea solution: Every approximately 3,700 miles (6,000 km) (The urea solution consumption is dependent on the road profile, driving pattern and environmental condition)

* It takes some time to update the cluster gauges after the UREA injection.

WARNING

- Do not apply any external impact on the DPF system. It may damage the catalyst, which is equipped inside the DPF system.

- Do not arbitrarily modify or manipulate the DPF system by redirecting or lengthen the exhaust pipe. It may adversely impact the DPF system.

- Avoid contact with the drained water from the exhaust pipe. The water is slightly acid and harmful to skin. If contacted, thoroughly wash it.

• Any arbitrary manipulation or modification of the DPF system may cause a system malfunction. The DPF system is controlled by the complex device.
• Wait for the DPF system to cool down before the maintenance service, as it is hot due to the heat generation. Otherwise, it may case a skin burn.
• Add only the specified urea solution, when your vehicle is equipped with the urea solution system.

• The urea solution system (i.e. urea solution nozzle, urea solution pump, and DCU) operates for approximately 2 minutes more to eliminate the remaining urea solution inside, even after the ignition switch is pressed to the OFF position. Before the maintenance service, make sure that the urea solution system is completely turned OFF.

• The poor urea solution or the unauthorised liquids may damage the vehicle components, including the DPF system. Any unverified additives in the urea solution may clog the SCR catalyst and cause other malfunctions, which require the expensive DPF system to be replaced.

• When the urea solution contacts with the eyes or the skin, you should thoroughly wash the contaminated skin area.
• When you swallow the urea solution, thoroughly rinse your mouth and drink a lot of fresh water. Then, immediately consult a doctor.

• When your cloth is contaminated with the urea solution, immediately change your cloth.

• When you have an allergic reaction to the urea solution, immediately consult a doctor.

• Do not allow a child to contact the urea solution.
• Wipe off any urea solution spillage with water or cloth. When the urea solution is crystallized, wipe it off with the sponge or the cloth, which is dampened in the cold water. When the urea solution spillage is exposed in the air for an extended period of time, it is crystallised in white, damaging the vehicle surface.
• The urea solution is not the fuel additives. Thus, it should not be injected to the fuel tank. Otherwise, it may damage the engine.

• The urea solution is the aqueous solution, which is inflammable, non-toxic, colourless and odourless.

• Store the urea solution tank only in the well-ventilated locations. When the urea solution is exposed to the hot temperature at approximately 50°C for an extended period of time (i.e. under the direct sunlight), the chemical decomposition may occur, emitting the ammonia vapour.

Storing the urea solution

• It is improper to store the urea solution in the containers made with the certain materials (i.e. aluminium, copper, copper alloy, non-alloyed still, and galvanized steel). The urea solution dissolves the metal materials, severely damaging the exhaust purification system to be non-repairable.
• Store the urea solution only in the containers made with the following materials.
  (DIN EN 10 088-1-/-2-/-3-specified CR-Ni steel, Mo-Cr-Ni steel, polypropylene, and polyethylene)

Urea solution purity

• The following situations may damage the DPF system.
• Fuels or any unauthorised liquids are added into the urea solution tank.
• Additives are mixed in the urea solution.
• Water is added to dilute the urea solution.
• Use only the ISO 22241- or DIN7007O-specified urea solution. When any unauthorised urea solution is added to the tank, we recommend you to contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• When any unauthorised impurities enter the urea solution tank, it may occur the following problems.
• Increased emission
• Malfunction with the DPF system
• Engine failure
  Never add the used urea solution, which is drained from the tank (i.e. whilst maintaining the vehicle). Its purity cannot be guaranteed. Always add the new urea solution.

Specification of the standard urea solution

Liquid such as diesel, petrol and alcohol shall never be used for SCR system. Any fluid other than recommended urea solution (conform to ISO22241 or DIN70070) can damage SCR system hardware and deteriorate vehicle emission.

WARNING

- When opening the urea solution tank cap at high outside temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and primarily cause irritation of the:

• Skin
• Mucous membranes
• Eyes

You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing and watering of the eyes. Do not inhale ammonia vapours. Do not allow urea solution to come in direct contact with your skin. It is hazardous to your health. Wash any affected areas off with plenty of clean water. If necessary, consult a doctor.

• When handling with urea solution in closed space, ensure good ventilation. When the bottle of urea solution container is opened, pungent smelling fumes may escape.
• Keep urea solution out of reach of children.
• When urea solution overflows into vehicle surface, wash out vehicle surface with clean water to prohibit corrosion from occurring.

• When replenishing, be careful lest the urea solution should overflow.

• In case the vehicle was parked at very low ambient temperature (below 11 degree Celsius) for a long time, the urea solution will be frozen in the urea solution tank. With frozen urea, the tank level may not be detected correctly until the urea solution will be defrosted by activated heater. Incorrect urea or diluted urea can increase the freezing point, and thus defrosting may not be properly done by the heater which is activated below certain temperatures. This phenomenon may cause malfunction of the SCR system which can lead to the prohibition of engine restarting.
  • The time to defrost the urea solution varies in accordance with driving conditions and outside temperatures.

CAUTION

• If defective urea solution or liquid that is not recommended is supplied, there may be damage on the parts of the vehicle such as processing device. If defective fuel is used, foreign objects will be accumulated to SCR catalyst and cause catalyst pushed away or breaking.
  After adding the incorrect urea solution, please visit the closest service centre as early as possible.
• Liquid that are not recommended such as diesel, petrol, and alcohol shall never be used other than the recommended urea solution that satisfy ISO22241 or DIN70070.

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions....8-2

Engine....8-2

Bulb wattage....8-3

Tyres and wheels....8-4

Load and speed capacity tyres....8-5

Air conditioning system 8-5

Vehicle weight and luggage volume....8-6

Recommended lubricants and capacities .....8-7

Recommended engine oil 8-9

Recommended SAE viscosity number....8-9

Vehicle identification number (VII)......8-11

Vehicle certification label....8-11

Tyre specification and pressure label .....8-12

Engine number 8-12

Air conditioner compressor label 8-13

Refrigerant label 8-13

Declaration of conformity....8-13

DIMENSIONS
mm (in)

Items mm (in)
Overall length 4770 (187.8)
Overall width 1890 (74.41)
Overall height 1680 (66.14) / 1705 (67.13)*		1
Front tread	235/65 R17 1643 (64.69)
	235/60 R18 1638 (64.49)
	235/55 R19 1635 (64.37)
Rear tread	235/65 R17 1652 (65.04)
	235/60 R18 1647 (64.84)
	235/55 R19 1644 (64.72)
Wheelbase 2765 (108.86)

^*1 : with roof rack

ENGINE

Item	Petrol theta II 2.4	Diesel R2.0 Diesel	R2.2
Displacement cc (cu. in)	2,359(143.95)	1,995(121.74)	2,199(134.19)
Bore x Stroke mm (in.)	88x97(3.46X3.81)	84x90(3.30X3.54)	85.4x96(3.34X3.77)
Firing order	1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders	4. In-line 4. In-line 4. In-line

BULB WATTAGE

Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Front	Headlamp	Low(Type A) HB3 60
		High(Type A) HB3 60
		Low(Type B) LED LED
		High(Type B) LED LED
	Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
	Turn signal lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED
	Daytime running lamp (DRL) / position lamp LED LED
	Fog lamp (Type A) H8 35
	Fog lamp (Type B)		LED LED
Rear	Rear combination lamp	Stop/Tail (Type A)	P21/5W	21/5
		Tail (Type A) W5W 5
		Stop/Tail (Type B)	LED LED
		Tail (Type B) LED LED
		Turn signal	PY21W 21
		Back up	W16W	16
	Fog lamp		LED LED
	High mounted stop lamp		LED LED
	License plate lamp		W5W	5
Interior	Map lamp (Type A)		FESTOON	10
	Map lamp (Type B)		LED LED
	Room lamp (Type A)		FESTOON	10
	Room lamp (Type B)		LED LED
	Sunvisor lamp		FESTOON	5
	Tailgate room lamp		FESTOON	10
	Glove box lamp		FESTOON	5

TYRES AND WHEELS

Item Tyre Size	Wheel Size		Inflation Pressure Bar (kPa, psi)				Wheel Lug Nut Torque kgf.m (lbf.ft, N.m)
			Normal load Maximum load
			Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tyre	235/65 R17 7.0J x 17		2.4 (240,35) 2.4 (240,35)				11~13(79~94,107~127)
	235/60 R18 7.5J x 18
	235/55 R19 8.0J x 19
Compact spare tyre	T165/90 R17 4.0T x 17		4.2 (420, 60)
	T155/85 R18 4.0T x 18

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tyre pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tyres typically lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tyre pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tyre pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level (Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile)).
• Must do not exceed maximum inflation pressure shown on equipped tyre sidewall.

⚠️ CAUTION

When replacing tyres, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.Using tyres of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TYRES

Item Tyre Size	Wheel Size		Load Capacity Speed Capacity
			LI *1	kg	SS *2	km/h
Full size tyre	235/65 R17	7.0J x 17	104	900	H	210
	235/60 R18	7.5J x 18	107	975	V	240
	235/55 R19	8.0J x 19	101	825	V	240
Compact spare tyre	T165/90 R17	4.0T x 17	116	1250	M	130
	T155/85 R18	4.0T x 18	115	1215	M	130

*1 LI : LOAD INDEX
*2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Items Weight of Volume		Classification
Refrigerant g	R1234yf	Front 625(22.05) ± 25(0.88)		R-1234yf (For Europe)R-134a (Except Europe)
		Front + Rear(97)	300(28.22) ± 25(0.88)
	R134a	Front 700(24.69) ± 25(0.88)
		Front + Rear	350(29.98) ± 25(0.88)
Compressor lubricant g (oz.)	Front 120 (4.23) ± 10(0.35)			PAG
	Front + Rear 210 (7.4) ± 10(0.35)

Contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for more details.

VEHICLE WEIGHT AND LUGGAGE VOLUME

Vehicle weight

■ Euro 6d

Item	Theta II 2.4 GDI	R2.0 (Diesel) R2.2 (Diesel)
	A/T 4WD M/T	2WD M/T	4WD A/T	4WD M/T 2WD	M/T 4WD A/T	2WD A/T	4WD
5 Seater [kg(lbs.)]	2,264(4,991)	2,341(5,161)	2,399(5,289)	2,402(5,296)	2,341(5,161)	2,400(5,291)	2,346(5,172)	2,407(5,307)
7 Seater [kg(lbs.)]	2,452(5,406)	2,528(5,573)	2,587(5,703)	2,589(5,708)	2,529(5,575)	2,588(5,706)	2,534(5,587)	2,594(5,719)

■ Euro 4,5

Item	Theta II 2.4 GDI	Theta II 2.4 MPI			R2.2 (Diesel)
	A/T 4WD	A/T 4WD	M/T 2WD	M/T 4WD	M/T 2WD	M/T 4WD	A/T 2WD	A/T 4WD
5 Seater [kg(lbs.)]	2,264(4,991)	2,264(4,991)	2,205(4,861)	2,263(4,989)	2,341(5,161)	2,400(5,291)	2,346(5,172)	2,407(5,307)
7 Seater [kg(lbs.)]	2,452(5,406)	2,452(5,406)	2,392(5,273)	2,450(5,401)	2,529(5,575)	2,588(5,706)	2,534(5,587)	2,594(5,719)

M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission

Luggage volume

Item 5 Seater 7 Seater
VDA	MIN. 625 L (22.1 cu ft) 547 L (19.3 cu ft)
	MAX. 1,695 L (59.8 cu ft) 1,625 L (57.3 cu ft)

Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 *2(drain and refill)RecommendsShellHELIXMotor oils	PetrolEngine	Theta II 2.4 MPI,Theta II 2.4 GDI	4.8 l (4.22 Imp. qts.)	ACEA A5/B5
	DieselEngine	R 2.0 with DPF*3	6.5 l (5.72 Imp. qts.)	ACEA C3 or C2
		R 2.2 with DPF*3
		R 2.0 without DPF*3		ACEA A3/B4
		R 2.2 without DPF*3
Manual transmission fluid			1.8 ~ 1.9 l(1.58 ~ 1.67 Imp. qts.)	API GL-4, SAE 70W(HK MTF 70W (SK),SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL),GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX))

^*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2: Engine oils labelled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

^*3 : Diesel Particulate Filter

*4 : If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL, ILSAC GF-3, ACEA A3

Lubricant Volume Classification
Automatic transmission fluid	Petrol Engine	Theta II 2.4MPI	7.1 l (6.24 Imp. qts.)	MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
		Theta II 2.4GDI	6.7 l (5.90 Imp. qts.)
	Diesel Engine	R2.0	7.0 l (6.16 Imp. qts.)
		R2.2	7.1 l (6.24 Imp. qts.)
Coolant	Petrol engine	Theta II 2.4 MPI	MT : 7.9 l (7.0 Imp. qts.) AT : 8.2 l (7.2 Imp. qts.)	Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminium radiator)
		Theta II 2.4 GDI	8.2 l (7.2 Imp. qts.)
	Diesel Engine	R2.0	8.8 l (7.7 Imp. qts.)
		R2.2	8.8~9.0 l (7.7 ~ 7.9 Imp. qts.)
Brake/clutch fluid			0.44~0.48 l (0.39 ~ 0.42 Imp. qts.)	FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil (4WD)			0.58 l (0.51 Imp. qts.)	HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/85 (SK HCT-5 GEAR OIL 75W/85 or EQUIVALENT)
Transfer case oil (4WD)			0.45 l (0.40 Imp. qts.)
Fuel			71 l (15.61 Imp. gal.)	Refer to Fuel requirements in the introduction chapter.
Urea solution (Diesel Engine)			18 l (15.84 Imp. qts.)	ISO22241, DIN70070

Recommended engine oil

Supplier Product
Shell	Petrol Engine	Helix Ultra AH 5W30
		Helix Ultra A5/B5 0W30
	Diesel Engine	Helix Ultra ECT AH 5W30
		Helix Ultra ECT C2/C3 0W30

Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

*1: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

■ Frame number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the engine compartment frame and back side of the engine.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the left side dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windscreen from outside.

LABEL

Close-up of a car door panel with a circular button and a small rectangular object on the side (no visible text or symbols)

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's (or front passenger's) side centre pillar shows the vehicle identification number (VIN).

TYRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

Close-up of a car door panel with buttons and a circular inset showing a black rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)

The tyres supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tyre label located on the driver's side centre pillar shows the tyre pressures recommended for your vehicle.

ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL

A compressor label informs you the type of compressor your vehicle is equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

Close-up of a car hood open with a blue logo, no visible text or symbols on the car body.

The refrigerant label provides information such as refrigerant type and amount.

The label is located on the underside of the bonnet.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (IF EQUIPPED)

The radio frequency components of the vehicle comply with requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1995/5/EC.

Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on HYUNDAI web site as follows;

http://service.hyundai-motor.com